Lexmark 2

Technical Reference
May 2007
www.lexmark.com
Lexmark and Lexmark with diamond design are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in the United States and/or other countries. 2007 Lexmark International, Inc. 740 West New Circle Road Lexington, Kentucky 40550
Edition: May 2007

The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you. This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time. Comments about this publication may be addressed to Lexmark International, Inc., Department F95/032-2, 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, Kentucky 40550, U.S.A. In the United Kingdom and Eire, send to Lexmark International Ltd., Marketing and Services Department, Westhorpe House, Westhorpe, Marlow Bucks SL7 3RQ. Lexmark may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. To obtain additional copies of publications related to this product, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com. References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the users responsibility. Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, MarkNet, MarkVision, and Optra are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in the United States and/or other countries. ColorGrade, PerfectFinish, and PictureGrade are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc. The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of other companies: Albertus Antique Olive Apple-Chancery Arial Candid CG Omega CG Times license The Monotype Corporation plc Monsieur Marcel OLIVE Apple Computer, Inc. The Monotype Corporation plc Agfa Corporation Product of Agfa Corporation Based on Times New Roman under from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of Agfa Corporation Apple Computer, Inc. Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries Nebiolo Apple Computer, Inc. The Monotype Corporation plc Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry ITC Avant Garde Gothic ITC Bookman ITC Lubalin Graph ITC Mona Lisa ITC Zapf Chancery Joanna Marigold Monaco New York Oxford Palatino Stempel Garamond Taffy Times New Roman TrueType Univers Wingdings International Typeface Corporation International Typeface Corporation International Typeface Corporation International Typeface Corporation International Typeface Corporation The Monotype Corporation plc Arthur Baker Apple Computer, Inc. Apple Computer, Inc. Arthur Baker Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries Agfa Corporation The Monotype Corporation plc Apple Computer, Inc. Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries Microsoft Corporation
Chicago Clarendon Eurostile Geneva GillSans Helvetica Hoefler
PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL 5 and PCL 6 are Hewlett-Packard Companys designations of a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. These printers are intended to be compatible with the PCL 5 and PCL 6 languages. This means these printers recognize PCL 5 and PCL 6 commands used in various application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands. Other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
1998, 2007 Lexmark International, Inc. All rights reserved. UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RIGHTS This software and any accompanying documentation provided under this agreement are commercial computer software and documentation developed exclusively at private expense.
TOC-1
Contents
Contents
Introduction ......................................................................1-1
Overview.............................................................................................................1-1 Navigational Tips ................................................................................................1-4 Printing the File...................................................................................................1-4 Bibliography........................................................................................................1-5
PCL Emulation..................................................................2-1
Selecting PCL Emulation....................................................................................2-1 Using SmartSwitch........................................................................................2-1 Using the Operator Panel or MarkVision Professional..................................2-1 Using Your Software Program ......................................................................2-2 Page Formatting .................................................................................................2-3 Printable Areas..............................................................................................2-3 Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, E450dn..........................................2-4 Print Area Menu Item..........................................................................................2-6 Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn..........................................................................................2-8 Forward and Backward Compatibility Modes for the Lexmark E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn............................................................2-9 Selecting Symbol Sets for Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, E450dn................................................................. 2-14 Command Structure ......................................................................................... 2-48 Control Codes ............................................................................................. 2-48 Commands.................................................................................................. 2-49 PCL Emulation Commands .............................................................................. 2-51 PCL Emulation Commands by Function ..................................................... 2-52 GL/2 Commands .............................................................................................. 2-74 Raster Image Graphics..................................................................................... 2-78 Raster Compression Mode ......................................................................... 2-78
TOC-2
Contents
Macros.............................................................................................................. 2-85
Printer Job Language ......................................................3-1

PJL Command Notation .....................................................................................3-1 Kernel Commands..............................................................................................3-2 Job Separation Commands ................................................................................3-4 Environment Commands and Variables .............................................................3-7 Common Variables for PCL Emulation .......................................................3-48 Status Readback Commands........................................................................... 3-54 Status Message Format ...................................................................................3-61 Information Messages................................................................................. 3-61 Auto-Continuable Conditions ...................................................................... 3-63 Attendance Conditions ................................................................................ 3-67 Operator Intervention - Paper Handling ...................................................... 3-72 Operator Intervention - Paper Jams............................................................ 3-75 Service Errors ............................................................................................. 3-80 Device Attendance Commands ........................................................................ 3-80 Unique PJL Commands.................................................................................... 3-82 File Commands for Flash or Disk................................................................ 3-86 File and Device Protection Commands ............................................................ 3-93 Protecting a File or Device .......................................................................... 3-93 Unlocking a Protected File or Device .......................................................... 3-95 Re-Locking a Protected File or Device........................................................ 3-96 Unlocking a Protected File or Device for the Current Job ...........................3-97 Recovering Lost Passwords........................................................................ 3-98
PostScript Emulation .......................................................4-1

Selecting PostScript Emulation ..........................................................................4-1 Using SmartSwitch........................................................................................4-1 Using the Operator Panel or MarkVision Professional..................................4-1 Using Your Software Program ......................................................................4-2 Paper Tray Support.......................................................................................4-5 Envelope Size Support................................................................................ 4-10 Envelope Tray Support ............................................................................... 4-12 Supplemental Operator Summary............................................................... 4-14 Page Device Parameters.................................................................................. 4-49
TOC-3
Contents
Interpreter Parameters ..................................................................................... 4-63 User Parameters ......................................................................................... 4-63 System Parameters..................................................................................... 4-66 Device Parameters...................................................................................... 4-72 Status and Error Messages .............................................................................. 4-93 Tagged Binary Not Active ........................................................................... 4-93 Tagged Binary Active .................................................................................. 4-93 Status Messages......................................................................................... 4-94
Switching Languages ......................................................5-1

SmartSwitch .......................................................................................................5-1 Setting SmartSwitch for Different Interfaces .................................................5-2 Printer Job Language .........................................................................................5-2 Sniffing................................................................................................................5-3
Flash Memory and Disk ...................................................6-1

Resource Data Collection (Download Target) ....................................................6-2 Storing Resources on Flash Memory or Disk................................................6-3 Viewing the Contents of Flash Memory and Disk...............................................6-3 Password Protection...........................................................................................6-7 Rewriting the Flash Content ...............................................................................6-8 Accessing Files with PostScript Emulation.........................................................6-9 File Naming Conventions ..............................................................................6-9 Device Search Order...................................................................................6-12 Performance ..................................................................................................... 6-13 Job Buffering .................................................................................................... 6-13 Creating a Partition ..................................................................................... 6-14 Enabling Job Buffering ................................................................................ 6-14 Disabling Job Buffering ............................................................................... 6-15 Recovering from a Power Loss ................................................................... 6-15
Printer Specifications ......................................................7-1

Airflow Requirement......................................................................................7-1 Noise Emission Levels ..................................................................................7-1
TOC-4
Contents
Electrical Specifications ................................................................................7-2 Power Requirements.....................................................................................7-3 Physical Specifications..................................................................................7-5 Clearance Requirements .............................................................................7-6 Environmental Conditions .............................................................................7-7 Altitude Specifications ...................................................................................7-7 Atmospheric Pressure...................................................................................7-7
Printer Interfaces..............................................................8-1
Setting Up the Communications Port .................................................................8-2 Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows 95/98/Me ..................8-2 Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows NT 4.0 ......................8-3 Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows 2000 .........................8-4 Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows XP ............................8-5 Deciding Which Interface to Use ........................................................................8-6 Parallel Interface.................................................................................................8-7 Standard Parallel Connector .........................................................................8-8 Using the INIT* Signal to Initialize.................................................................8-8 Computer-to-Printer Communications...........................................................8-8 Printer-to-Computer Communication (Advanced Status)............................ 8-13 Parallel Mode 1 ........................................................................................... 8-14 Parallel Mode 2 ........................................................................................... 8-15 Signal Descriptions ..................................................................................... 8-15 Using the RS-232C Serial Interface ............................................................ 8-21 Network Support............................................................................................... 8-30 Input Buffer ....................................................................................................... 8-31
TOC-5
Contents
PCL Support .................................................................... A-1
PJL Support ..................................................................... B-1
PostScript Support ......................................................... C-1
Index ................................................................................. X-1
1-1
Introduction
CHAPTER 1: Introduction
Overview
The following edition of the Technical Reference contains information about printer commands and printer languages supported by the following Lexmark printers: Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, E450dn To determine which commands and languages your printer supports, see the appendixes in the back of this document or see your printer documentation. If your printer is not included in this edition of the Technical Reference, it may be available in another version. Visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/ publications for more information. Table 1-1: Technical Reference Documentation Available in Hard Copy
If you need a Technical Reference for the... Optra K Optra N Optra SC Optra E310 Order Lexmark part number... 11A4079 11A9979 11C0905 12A2194
The Technical Reference is divided into the following:
Chapter 2: PCL Emulation

Shows how to select PCL emulation and discusses PCL emulation commands, GL/2 commands, and resident font and symbol set support.
1-2
Introduction
Chapter 3: Printer Job Language

Contains detailed information about certain commands that cause the printer to enter PCL emulation, PostScript emulation, and Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS), and many other types of commands.
Chapter 4: PostScript Emulation

Provides information about PostScript emulation and explains PostScript emulation supplemental operators.
Chapter 5: Switching Languages

Describes ways to switch printer languages and explains when you may want to choose one method over another.
Chapter 6: Flash Memory and Disk

Provides information about using the flash memory and hard disk. It describes how to manage printer memory, store resources (such as fonts and macros), and manage files.
Chapter 7: Printer Specifications

Lists printer specifications, including information about hardware and environmental conditions.
Chapter 8: Printer Interfaces

Provides information on printer interfaces, including information about parallel and serial interface, network support, and communication protocols. See the tables in the three appendixes to determine if your printer supports a particular PCL emulation, PJL, or PostScript emulation command. The appendixes are:
1-3
Introduction
Appendix A: PCL Support Appendix B: PJL Support Appendix C: PostScript Support
1-4
Introduction
Navigational Tips
If you are not familiar with PDF files, the following tips may help you find the information you need.
To move forward and backward through this document: Select an option under View in the menu bar at the top of the page. Use the arrows in the toolbar at the top of the page, or the up arrow and down arrow keys on the keyboard. Press the Page Up and Page Down keys on the keyboard. Use the scroll bar to the right of the page. Click the page number box on the status bar at the bottom of the page and type the page you want.
To increase or decrease the magnification of the pages: Select the magnifying glass icon on the toolbar at the top of the page and then draw a box around the area you want to view. Click the magnification box on the status bar and select an option from the drop-down menu.
To jump directly to a particular section or key word in this document: Click one of the bookmarks in the overview window to the left of the page. Click a topic in the table of contents. Select Tools from the menu bar and then choose Find or Search. Click the binoculars icon on the toolbar and then type a word in the text box. Click a cross-reference to a figure, page number, or heading in the document itself.
Printing the File

Although this book was designed primarily for online viewing, you can print a hard copy by clicking File on the toolbar, and then choosing Print. Make sure youve selected the correct printer, range of pages, and number of copies before you click OK. You should be aware that if you print this document on a color printer, the color you see on the paper may not match the color you see on your computer monitor.
1-5
Introduction
Bibliography
For detailed information about PCL emulation printer commands, PostScript emulation printer commands and operators, and interfaces, see the following documentation:
Hewlett-Packard DeskJet Printer Family Technical Reference, C2121-90101 Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 4 Typography and Graphics, Random House Electronic Publishing Hewlett-Packard PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference Manual, 5961-0509 Hewlett-Packard PostScript SIMM Technical Reference, I/O Device Operators and Parameters, C2080-90921 Hewlett-Packard Printer Job Language Technical Reference Manual, 5961H0512 IBM Personal System/2 Hardware Interface Technical Reference, S68X-2330 Interface between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Communications Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange, Electronic Industries Association, publications EIA RS-232C and EIA\TIA-232-E Network Printing Alliance Protocol, A Printer/Host Control Specification Developed by the NPA, Level 1, Revision N PostScript Language Reference Manual (Third Edition), Adobe Systems Incorporated, Addison-Wesley Publishing
2-1
PCL
CHAPTER 2: PCL Emulation

When you select PCL emulation as the printer language, the printer supports the Hewlett-Packard Companys LaserJet Printer Command Language. This chapter shows how to select PCL emulation and discusses PCL emulation commands, along with resident PCL emulation font and symbol set support. To determine which commands your printer supports, see Appendix A: PCL Support on page A-1.
Selecting PCL Emulation

Using SmartSwitch
When SmartSwitch is enabled for both printer languages on an interface (for example, Parallel, USB, Serial Option 1, or Network Option 1), the printer automatically switches to the printer language being sent by your software program. The printer is shipped with SmartSwitch enabled for both printer languages in all interfaces. The printer examines all print jobs and switches dynamically between PostScript emulation and PCL emulation.
Using the Operator Panel or MarkVision Professional

If SmartSwitch is set to Off for both printer languages, you can select PCL emulation from your printer operator panel or from MarkVision Professional. See your printer documentation for information on changing menu settings.
2-2
PCL
Using Your Software Program

To select PCL emulation, use the Printer Job Language (PJL) Enter Language Command. See ENTER LANGUAGE Command on page 3-3 for more information. See Printer Job Language on page 3-1 for the syntax and use of PJL. Warning: When you change printer languages, you may lose some or all previously downloaded resources, unless Resource Save is set to On or the resources are stored in flash memory or on disk.
2-3
PCL
Page Formatting
The printable areas and logical pages for PCL emulation (both portrait and landscape orientation) are illustrated below. See the Legend that follows for definitions of areas A through I.
Printable Areas
Legend:
A B C D E F G H Portrait physical page width and landscape physical page length Portrait physical page length and landscape physical page width Portrait logical page width Landscape logical page width Distance between the side edge of the physical page and the logical page in portrait Distance between the side edge of the physical page and the logical page in landscape Distance between the top and bottom edge of the physical page and logical page Distance between the left and right edge of the physical page and the printable area in portrait, or distance between the top and bottom edge of the physical page and printable area in landscape Distance between the top and bottom edge of the physical page and the printable area in portrait, or distance between the left and right edge of the physical page and the printable area in landscape
Note: The tables beginning on page 2-4 list the page sizes and dimensions of each area labeled on the preceding diagram for all paper and envelope sizes your printer supports. If information about your printer is not included in the following tables, see page 1-1 for information on how to get a Technical Reference for your printer.
2-4
PCL
Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, E450dn
The following table lists page sizes and print area dimensions for all paper and envelope sizes the Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n ,E350d, E352dn, and E450dn printers support. For more information about the printable areas and logical pages for PCL emulation, see Printable Areas on page 2-3. Table 2-1: Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, E450dn Paper and Envelope Dimensions
Selection Page Size Parameters2 Name Paper/Envelope Dimensions mm inches Paper
13, 613 12, 45, 612 26, 626 26, 626 1, 601 2, 602 3, 603 4 or 10 15 101
1 2 Page
Dimensions by Area (pels)1 A B C D E F G H I
A5 JIS B5 Paper A4 (198 mm)3 A4 (203 mm)3 Executive Letter Legal Folio Statement Universal
148 x 210 182 x 257 210 x 297 210 x 297 184 x 267 216 x 279 216 x 356 216 x 330 139.7 x 215.9 216 x 356
5.83 x 8.27 7.2 x 10.1 8.3 x 11.7 8.3 x 11.7 7.25 x 10.5 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 14 8.5 x 13 5.5 x 8.5 8.5 x 14
3496 4300 4960 4960 4350 5100 5100 5100 3300
4960 6070 7014 7014 6300 6600 8400 7800 5100
3196 4000 4676 4800 4050 4800 4800 4800 3000
4720 5830 6778 6778 6060 6360 8160 7560 4860
142 150 142 80 150 150 150 150 150 150
118 120 118 118 120 120 120 120 120 120
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
100 100 80 80 100 100 100 100 100 100
100 100 80 80 100 100 100 100 100 100
Pel dimensions are for 600 dpi. Size Parameters are explained in Table 2-16 on page 2-54. 3 The width of the logical page for A4 paper can be changed from the printer operator panel or your software application. 4 Paper ID 99 will be supported for backward compatibility with other Lexmark printers. Paper ID 99 has the same logical paper size as ID 100 (compatible with HP LaserJet 5Si/5SiMx) but is 8 pels wider than the Lexmark 4039. Note: The explanation of the printable area assumes the Print Area menu item is set to Normal. For more information, see Print Area Menu Item on page 2-6.
2-5
PCL
Table 2-1: Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, E450dn Paper and Envelope Dimensions (Continued)
Selection Page Size Parameters2 Name Paper/Envelope Dimensions mm inches Envelope
90 91 99 , 100 600 89 81 80
1
4
Dimensions by Area (pels)1 A B C D E F G H I
DL C5 B5 Envelope Other Envelope 9 (Com 9) 10 (Com 10) 7 3/4 (Monarch)
220 x 110 229 x 162 250 x 176 216 x 356 225 x 98 241 x 105 98 x 191
8.66 x 4.33 9.02 x 6.38 9.84 x 6.93 8.5 x 14 8.875 x 3.875 9.5 x 4.125 3.875 x 7.5
2598 3826 4156 5100 2326 2474 2326
5196 5408 5904 8400 5324 5700 4300
2314 2542 3872 4800 2024 2174 2024
4960 5172 5668 8160 5084 5460 4260
142 142 142 150 150 150 150
118 118 118 120 120 120 120
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
100 100 100 100 100 100 100
100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Pel dimensions are for 600 dpi. Size Parameters are explained in Table 2-16 on page 2-54. 3 The width of the logical page for A4 paper can be changed from the printer operator panel or your software application. 4 Paper ID 99 will be supported for backward compatibility with other Lexmark printers. Paper ID 99 has the same logical paper size as ID 100 (compatible with HP LaserJet 5Si/5SiMx) but is 8 pels wider than the Lexmark 4039. Note: The explanation of the printable area assumes the Print Area menu item is set to Normal. For more information, see Print Area Menu Item on page 2-6.
2 Page
2-6
PCL
Print Area Menu Item

The printable area is the area on a sheet of paper within which a pel can be printed. Logical page is a conceptual entity that defines the area in which margins (top, bottom, left, right) may be set and the area in which the PCL cursor may be positioned. The physical page border is the actual physical boundaries of a page. The Print Area menu item is available from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. For some printers, Print Area supports three values: Normal, Whole Page, and Fit to Page. See your printer documentation for more information .
Normal setting Whole Page setting
Legend: PCL Logical Page Area
Physical Page Border
PCL Printable Area
Only Portrait Orientation is shown for all settings.
The Normal setting, which is the factory default, means the printable area includes the entire page except the narrow border around the edge of the page. This is the nonprintable area. The printer measures margin settings relative to the logical page. For a more detailed explanation of the Normal setting, see Printable Areas on page 2-3.
2-7
PCL
The Whole Page setting only affects pages printed when using PCL emulation. If Whole Page is selected, the PCL language sets the logical page area equal to the physical page dimensions. Since the logical page dimensions and the physical page dimensions are the same, in theory, the cursor may be positioned anywhere on the page. However, the PCL language clips the image to the printable area. So, the Whole Page setting is useful for printing scanned images that extend from edge to edge of a page. Some printers offer the Fit to Page setting. When Fit to Page is selected, PCL emulation or PostScript emulation formats a page using a printable area equal to the physical page, which is from one edge of the page to the other edge of the page. If you use this setting, no clipping occurs. In Fit to Page, the PCL emulation logical page dimensions are equal to the physical page dimensions, as in the Whole Page setting. The printer holds this formatted image in memory, but when the page prints, the image is compressed a small amount in both horizontal and vertical directions, and then centered on the physical page for letter-size paper only. This process creates a small margin around the image. This artificial margin prevents printing from one edge to the other, since doing so could contaminate the printer and cause printing problems. The following illustrations show an image held in memory for printing from one edge to the other and how the image would actually print based on the Fit to Page setting. Notice that a small border appears at the edges of the printed page, and the image is slightly compressed.
Physical Page Edge
Formatted Image with Fit to Page
Printed Image with Fit to Page
2-8
PCL
Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn
Your printer has 91 resident fonts in PCL emulation, including 89 scalable fonts and two bitmapped fonts. The E120 and E120n has 19 resident fonts including 17 scalable fonts and two bitmapped fonts. Several parameters are used to select a font from the data stream. These include symbol set, spacing, point or pitch, style, weight, and typeface number. For scalable fonts, you can vary the size of a font by specifying pitch or point size. For bitmapped fonts, you must choose the pitch or point size listed on the font sample pages. You can print the font sample pages using a PJL command (see LPRINTPCLFONTS on page 3-83.), or through MarkVision Professional (network models only). See your printer documentation for more information. A symbol set defines which characters are available for a font and the code point for each of these characters. Your printer supports 88 resident symbol sets. The tables beginning on page 2-10 show the symbol sets available for each font in PCL emulation. Not all fonts support all symbol sets. You can select a font as the PCL emulation default through MarkVision Professional (network models only). See your printer documentation for more information. The fonts are divided into three major groups. The first 47 fonts (R0 to R46) shown on the font sample pages are the standard PCL emulation fonts. The next 39 fonts (R47 to R85) are called Type 1 fonts and were originally defined for PostScript emulation, but now also work in the PCL emulation. The final five fonts (R86 to R90) are additional specialty PCL emulation fonts. For a list of the 47 standard PCL emulation fonts, see Table 2-2 on page 2-9. For a list of the 39 Type 1 fonts, see Table 2-3 on page 2-11. For a list of the five additional specialty PCL emulation fonts, see Table 2-11 on page 2-43. These tables list both the forward and backward compatibility font selection commands. For more information on forward and backward compatibility, see page 2-9. For more information on selecting symbol sets, see page 2-38. For compatibility purposes, you can disable Type 1 fonts with the Printer Job Language (PJL) LTYPE1FONTS command. The factory default for these fonts is Enabled. See LTYPE1FONTS on page 3-48 for more information.
2-9
PCL
You can also select fonts using PJL commands. The selection parameter is the number portion from the font identifier shown on the font sample pages, such as 0 or 76 from font identifiers R0 or R76. Use the PJL values shown in the tables beginning on page 2-9 to select a symbol set. If a symbol set does not have a PJL value, use the symbol set ID to select the symbol set. A font selection can be either temporary or set as the default. Use the following PJL commands to select fonts: FONTSOURCE, FONTNUMBER, PITCH, PTSIZE, SYMSET, SET, DEFAULT. See Table 3-5: Common Variables for PCL Emulation on page 3-48 for more information about these commands.
Forward and Backward Compatibility Modes for the Lexmark E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn
Your PCL emulation has forward and backward compatibility modes. The forward compatibility mode is used to emulate the fonts in the Hewlett-Packard Companys LaserJet 4050. The backward compatibility mode is used for compatibility with the Hewlett-Packard Companys LaserJet 5 and the Lexmark family of printers. Note: Lexmark E120 and E120n support Backward Compatibility Modes, but not Forward Compatibility Modes.
Standard PCL Emulation Fonts

The following table lists the font selection commands for forward and backward compatibility mode for each of the 47 standard PCL emulation fonts. Since the font selection commands for the forward and backward compatibility modes are identical, they are listed together in the table. Table 2-2: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands
Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode Standard PCL Emulation Font Name Courier Courier Italic Courier Bold Courier Bold Italic CG Times
1This
Spacing 0 0 0 0 1
Style 0 1 0 1 0
Weight 0 0 3 3 0
Typeface 4099 4099 4099 4099 4101
font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Companys LaserJet 4050.
2-10
PCL
Table 2-2: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands (Continued)
Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode Standard PCL Emulation Font Name CG Times Italic CG Times Bold CG Times Bold Italic Univers Medium Univers Medium Italic Univers Bold Univers Bold Italic Times New Roman Times New Roman Italic Times New Roman Bold Times New Roman Bold Italic Arial Arial Italic Arial Bold Arial Bold Italic Letter Gothic Letter Gothic Italic Letter Gothic Bold Univers Condensed Medium Univers Condensed Medium Italic Univers Condensed Bold Univers Condensed Bold Italic Garamond Antiqua Garamond Kursiv Garamond Halbfett Garamond Kursiv Halbfett CG Omega CG Omega Italic CG Omega Bold CG Omega Bold Italic Antique Olive Antique Olive Italic Antique Olive Bold
1This
Spacing 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Style 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 4 5 4 5 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Weight 0 3 3 0 0 3 3 0 0 3 3 0 0 3 3 0 0 3 0 0 3 3 0 0 3 3 0 0 3 3 0 0 3
Typeface 4101 4101 4101 4148 4148 4148 4148 16901 16901 16901 16901 16602 16602 16602 16602 4102 4102 4102 4148 4148 4148 4148 4197 4197 4197 4197 4113 4113 4113 4113 4168 4168 4168
2-11
PCL
Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode Standard PCL Emulation Font Name Albertus Medium Albertus Extra Bold Clarendon Condensed Bold Marigold Coronet Line Printer 16 POSTNET Barcode Wingdings Symbol
1This 1
Spacing 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
Style 0 0 4 0 1 0 0 0 0
Weight 1 4 3 0 0 0 0 0 0
Typeface 4362 4362 4140 4297 4116 0 0 31402 16686
Type 1 Fonts
Thirty of the Type 1 fonts have different font selection parameters in the forward and backward compatibility modes and nine of the fonts work only in the forward compatibility mode. With the appropriate printer driver installed and selected, your software program selects these fonts. The following table shows the font selection commands for forward and backward compatibility modes and indicates the font group for each font. All Type 1 fonts are supported by both the Hewlett-Packard Companys LaserJet 4050 and the Lexmark family of printers unless otherwise noted. Table 2-3: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands
Forward Compatibility Mode Type 1 Font name Helvetica Helvetica Italic Helvetica Bold Helvetica Bold Italic Helvetica Narrow Helvetica Narrow Italic
1 2
Backward Compatibility Mode Typeface Spacing Style 24580 24580 24580 24580 24580 24580 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 4 5 Weight 0 0 3 3 0 0 Typeface 61444 61444 61444 61444 61444 61444
Spacing Style 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 4 5
Weight 0 0 3 3 0 0
Notice the values for forward and backward compatibility modes differ slightly for Bold. This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Companys LaserJet 4050. 3 This font is not implemented in the Lexmark family of printers.
2-12
PCL
Forward Compatibility Mode Type 1 Font name Helvetica Narrow Bold Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic Palatino Roman Palatino Italic Palatino Bold Palatino Bold Italic ITC Bookman Light ITC Bookman Light Italic ITC Bookman Demi ITC Bookman Demi Italic ITC Avant Garde Book ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique ITC Avant Garde Demi
1
Backward Compatibility Mode Typeface Spacing Style 24580 24580 24591 24591 24591 24591 24623 24623 24623 24623 24607 24607 24607 24607 24703 24703 24703 24703 45099 24579 24579 24579 24579 25093 25093 25093 25093 24580 24580 24580 24580 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 -3 -3 5 5 61444 61444 61444 61444 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 5 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 Weight 3 3 0 0 3 3 -3 -3 2 2 0 0 3 3 0 0 3 3 0 Typeface 61444 61444 61455 61455 61455 61455 61487 61487 61487 61487 61471 61471 61471 61471 61463 61463 61463 61463 61483
Spacing Style 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2
Weight 3 3 0 0 3 3 -3 -3 2 2 0 0 2 2 0 0 3 3 0 0 0 3 3 0 0 3 3 -3 -3 5 5
4 5 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique1 Century Schoolbook Roman Century Schoolbook Italic Century Schoolbook Bold Century Schoolbook Bold Italic ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic CourierPS
3
CourierPS
Oblique3
CourierPS Bold3 CourierPS Bold Oblique3 Times Roman3

3
Times Italic
Times Bold3 Times Bold Italic3 Helvetica Light Helvetica Light

2
Oblique2
Helvetica Black2 Helvetica Black Oblique

1 2
2-13
PCL
Forward Compatibility Mode Type 1 Font name SymbolPS
3
Backward Compatibility Mode Typeface Spacing Style 45358 45101 1 0 0 61485 Weight Typeface
Spacing Style 1 1 0 0
Weight 0 0
ITC Zapf Dingbats

1 2
Your Lexmark printer defaults to the forward compatibility mode to enable a HewlettPackard Companys driver to select the forward compatibility fonts. The Lexmark PCL emulation driver uses the backward compatibility mode and temporarily switches the printer to this mode. The PCL (PJL) emulation commands to switch the default compatibility modes are: Forward
ESC
%-12345X@PJL DEFAULT LPARM:PCL LFONTCOMPATIBILITY=PCL6 %-12345X %-12345X@PJL DEFAULT LPARM:PCL LFONTCOMPATIBILITY=PCL5 %-12345X
@PJL RESET
ESC
Backward
ESC
@PJL RESET
ESC
Specialty PCL Fonts

The following table lists the font selection commands for forward and backward compatibility mode for each of the five specialty PCL emulation fonts. Since the font selection commands for the forward and backward compatibility modes are identical, they are listed together in the table. These fonts are supported only in PCL 5 emulation, not in PCL XL. Table 2-4: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands
Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode Standard PCL Emulation Font Name C39 Narrow1
1
Spacing 1 1 1 0 0
Style 0 0 0 0 0
Weight 0 0 0 0 0
Typeface 32774 32772 32777 23584 23590
C39 Regular C39 Wide1 OCR-A OCR-B

1 1 1
This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Companys LaserJet 4050.
2-14
PCL
Selecting Symbol Sets for Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, E450dn
To determine if a font or typeface supports a symbol set, see the complete listing of PCL emulation fonts and symbol sets in the following tables: Table 2-7: Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Specials on page 2-26, Table 2-9: Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Latin 1 on page 2-31, and Table 2-11: Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Specials on page 2-43.
Selecting Symbol Sets for the Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn
To determine if a font or typeface supports a symbol set, see the complete listing of PCL emulation fonts and symbol sets in the following tables: Table 2-7: Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Specials on page 2-26, Table 2-10: Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic,
2-15
PCL
Greek on page 2-37, and Table 2-11: Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Specials on page 2-43 Table 2-5: Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Latin 1
Latin 1 PC-8 Danish/Norwegian (437N) ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (ECMA-94)
PC-861 Iceland PC-863 Canadian French PC-865 Nordic PC-1004 OS/2 ABICOMP Brazil/Portugal ABICOMP International Roman-8
PC-858 Multilingual Euro
Ventura International VNINTL 13J
PC-8, Code Page 437
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
Windows 98 Latin 1
PC-850 Multilingual
ISO 8859-15 Latin 9
Roman Extension
PC-860 Portugal
Typeface / Symbol Set
21U 23U 25U 9J 13P 14P 8U ROMAN8
11U PC8DN
19U WINL1
12U PC850
13U PC858
DESKTOP Desk Top 7J
PSTEXT
LEGAL
WIN30
ISOL1
ISOL9
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Courier Courier Italic Courier Bold Courier Bold Italic CG Times CG Times Italic CG Times Bold CG Times Bold Italic Univers Medium Univers Medium Italic Univers Bold Univers Bold Italic Times New Roman Times New Roman Italic Times New Roman Bold Times New Roman Bold Italic
10U PC8
20U
10J
12J
Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set. Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
14J
1U
9U
0N
9N
4U
0E
VNUS
Ventura US
Roman-9
MC Text
PS Text
Legal
2-16
PCL
Table 2-5: Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Latin 1 (Continued)
PC-8, Code Page 437
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
Windows 98 Latin 1
PC-850 Multilingual
ISO 8859-15 Latin 9
Roman Extension
PC-860 Portugal
21U 23U 25U 9J 13P 14P 8U ROMAN8
11U PC8DN
19U WINL1
12U PC850
13U PC858
DESKTOP Desk Top 7J
PSTEXT
LEGAL
WIN30
ISOL1
ISOL9
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Arial Arial Italic Arial Bold Arial Bold Italic Letter Gothic Letter Gothic Italic Letter Gothic Bold Univers Condensed Medium Univers Condensed Medium Italic Univers Condensed Bold Univers Condensed Bold Italic Garamond Antiqua Garamond Kursiv Garamond Halbfett Garamond Kursiv Halbfett CG Omega CG Omega Italic CG Omega Bold CG Omega Bold Italic
10U PC8
20U
10J
12J
14J
1U
9U
0N
9N
4U
0E
VNUS
Ventura US
Roman-9
MC Text
PS Text
Legal
2-17
PCL
PC-8, Code Page 437
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
Windows 98 Latin 1
PC-850 Multilingual
ISO 8859-15 Latin 9
Roman Extension
PC-860 Portugal
21U 23U 25U 9J 13P 14P 8U ROMAN8
11U PC8DN
19U WINL1
12U PC850
13U PC858
DESKTOP Desk Top 7J
PSTEXT
LEGAL
WIN30
ISOL1
ISOL9
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Antique Olive Antique Olive Italic Antique Olive Bold Albertus Medium Albertus Extra Bold Clarendon Condensed Bold Marigold Coronet Helvetica Helvetica Italic Helvetica Bold Helvetica Bold Italic Helvetica Narrow Helvetica Narrow Italic Helvetica Narrow Bold Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic Palatino Roman Palatino Italic Palatino Bold
10U PC8
20U
10J
12J
14J
1U
9U
0N
9N
4U
0E
VNUS
Ventura US
Roman-9
MC Text
PS Text
Legal
2-18
PCL
PC-8, Code Page 437
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
Windows 98 Latin 1
PC-850 Multilingual
ISO 8859-15 Latin 9
Roman Extension
PC-860 Portugal
21U 23U 25U 9J 13P 14P 8U ROMAN8
11U PC8DN
19U WINL1
12U PC850
13U PC858
DESKTOP Desk Top 7J
PSTEXT
LEGAL
WIN30
ISOL1
ISOL9
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Palatino Bold Italic ITC Bookman Light ITC Bookman Light Italic ITC Bookman Demi ITC Bookman Demi Italic ITC Avant Garde Book ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique ITC Avant Garde Demi ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique Century Schoolbook Roman Century Schoolbook Italic Century Schoolbook Bold Century Schoolbook Bold Italic ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic CourierPS CourierPS Oblique CourierPS Bold CourierPS Bold Oblique Times Roman
10U PC8
20U
10J
12J
14J
1U
9U
0N
9N
4U
0E
VNUS
Ventura US
Roman-9
MC Text
PS Text
Legal
2-19
PCL
PC-8, Code Page 437
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
Windows 98 Latin 1
PC-850 Multilingual
ISO 8859-15 Latin 9
Roman Extension
PC-860 Portugal
21U 23U 25U 9J 13P 14P 8U ROMAN8
11U PC8DN
19U WINL1
12U PC850
13U PC858
DESKTOP Desk Top 7J
PSTEXT
LEGAL
WIN30
ISOL1
ISOL9
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Times Italic Times Bold Times Bold Italic Helvetica Light Helvetica Light Oblique Helvetica Black Helvetica Black Oblique Line Printer 16 POSTNET Barcode C39 Narrow C39 Regular C39 Wide OCR-A OCR-B Wingdings Symbol SymbolPS ITC Zapf Dingbats
10U PC8
20U
10J
12J
14J
1U
9U
0N
9N
4U
0E
VNUS
Ventura US
Roman-9
MC Text
PS Text
Legal
2-20
PCL
Table 2-6: E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek
Latin 2 Latin 5 Latin 6 PC-775 Baltic (PC-8 Latin 6) Windows 98 Latin 6 (Baltic) Cyrillic Greek PC-8 Greek Alternate (437G) 14G
ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic
PC-857 Latin 5 (Turkish)
PC8TK PC-Turkish (437T)
ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek
PC-8 Polish Mazovia
Windows 98 Cyrillic
Windows 98 Latin 2
Windows 98 Latin 5
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6
Windows 98 Greek
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
PC-8 Latin/Greek 12G
PC-8 Bulgarian
PC-869 Greece
PC-851 Greece
Russian-GOST
PC-866 Cyrillic
PC-855 Cyrillic
PC-852 Latin 2
PC-8 PC Nova
Ukrainian
Turkish-8
WINL2
17U PC852
WINL5
ISOL2
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Courier Courier Italic Courier Bold Courier Bold Italic CG Times CG Times Italic CG Times Bold CG Times Bold Italic Univers Medium
24Q
27Q
ISOL5
11G
10G
16U
18U
26U
10N
10R
12R
13R
14R
12N
19L
9G
Univers Medium Italic Univers Bold Univers Bold Italic Times New Roman Times New Roman Italic Times New Roman Bold Times New Roman Bold Italic Arial Arial Italic Arial Bold
8G
2N
5N
6N
9R
3R
9E
5T
9T
8T
Greek-8
2-21
PCL
Table 2-6: E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek (Continued)
PC-8 Polish Mazovia
Windows 98 Cyrillic
Windows 98 Latin 2
Windows 98 Latin 5
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6
Windows 98 Greek
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
PC-8 Bulgarian
PC-869 Greece
PC-851 Greece
Russian-GOST
PC-866 Cyrillic
PC-855 Cyrillic
PC-852 Latin 2
PC-8 PC Nova
Ukrainian
Turkish-8
WINL2
17U PC852
WINL5
ISOL2
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Arial Bold Italic Letter Gothic Letter Gothic Italic Letter Gothic Bold Univers Condensed Medium Univers Condensed Medium Italic Univers Condensed Bold Univers Condensed Bold Italic Garamond Antiqua Garamond Kursiv Garamond Halbfett Garamond Kursiv Halbfett CG Omega CG Omega Italic CG Omega Bold CG Omega Bold Italic Antique Olive
24Q
27Q
ISOL5
11G
10G
16U
18U
26U
10N
10R
12R
13R
14R
12N
19L
9G
8G
2N
5N
6N
9R
3R
9E
5T
9T
8T
Greek-8
2-22
PCL
PC-8 Polish Mazovia
Windows 98 Cyrillic
Windows 98 Latin 2
Windows 98 Latin 5
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6
Windows 98 Greek
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
PC-8 Bulgarian
PC-869 Greece
PC-851 Greece
Russian-GOST
PC-866 Cyrillic
PC-855 Cyrillic
PC-852 Latin 2
PC-8 PC Nova
Ukrainian
Turkish-8
WINL2
17U PC852
WINL5
ISOL2
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Antique Olive Italic Antique Olive Bold Albertus Medium Albertus Extra Bold Clarendon Condensed Bold Marigold Coronet Helvetica Helvetica Italic Helvetica Bold Helvetica Bold Italic Helvetica Narrow Helvetica Narrow Italic Helvetica Narrow Bold Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic Palatino Roman Palatino Italic Palatino Bold
24Q
27Q
ISOL5
11G
10G
16U
18U
26U
10N
10R
12R
13R
14R
12N
19L
9G
8G
2N
5N
6N
9R
3R
9E
5T
9T
8T
Greek-8
2-23
PCL
PC-8 Polish Mazovia
Windows 98 Cyrillic
Windows 98 Latin 2
Windows 98 Latin 5
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6
Windows 98 Greek
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
PC-8 Bulgarian
PC-869 Greece
PC-851 Greece
Russian-GOST
PC-866 Cyrillic
PC-855 Cyrillic
PC-852 Latin 2
PC-8 PC Nova
Ukrainian
Turkish-8
WINL2
17U PC852
WINL5
ISOL2
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Palatino Bold Italic ITC Bookman Light ITC Bookman Light Italic ITC Bookman Demi ITC Bookman Demi Italic ITC Avant Garde Book ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique ITC Avant Garde Demi ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique Century Schoolbook Roman Century Schoolbook Italic Century Schoolbook Bold Century Schoolbook Bold Italic ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
24Q
27Q
ISOL5
11G
10G
16U
18U
26U
10N
10R
12R
13R
14R
12N
19L
9G
8G
2N
5N
6N
9R
3R
9E
5T
9T
8T
Greek-8
2-24
PCL
PC-8 Polish Mazovia
Windows 98 Cyrillic
Windows 98 Latin 2
Windows 98 Latin 5
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6
Windows 98 Greek
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
PC-8 Bulgarian
PC-869 Greece
PC-851 Greece
Russian-GOST
PC-866 Cyrillic
PC-855 Cyrillic
PC-852 Latin 2
PC-8 PC Nova
Ukrainian
Turkish-8
WINL2
17U PC852
WINL5
ISOL2
PJL Value Symbol Set ID CourierPS CourierPS Oblique CourierPS Bold CourierPS Bold Oblique Times Roman Times Italic Times Bold Times Bold Italic Helvetica Light Helvetica Light Oblique Helvetica Black Helvetica Black Oblique Line Printer 16 POSTNET Barcode C39 Narrow C39 Regular C39 Wide OCR-A OCR-B
24Q
27Q
ISOL5
11G
10G
16U
18U
26U
10N
10R
12R
13R
14R
12N
19L
9G
8G
2N
5N
6N
9R
3R
9E
5T
9T
8T
Greek-8
2-25
PCL
PC-8 Polish Mazovia
Windows 98 Cyrillic
Windows 98 Latin 2
Windows 98 Latin 5
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6
Windows 98 Greek
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
PC-8 Bulgarian
PC-869 Greece
PC-851 Greece
Russian-GOST
PC-866 Cyrillic
PC-855 Cyrillic
PC-852 Latin 2
PC-8 PC Nova
Ukrainian
Turkish-8
WINL2
17U PC852
WINL5
ISOL2
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Wingdings Symbol SymbolPS ITC Zapf Dingbats
24Q
27Q
ISOL5
11G
10G
16U
18U
26U
10N
10R
12R
13R
14R
12N
19L
9G
8G
2N
5N
6N
9R
3R
9E
5T
9T
8T
Greek-8
2-26
PCL
Table 2-7: Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Specials
Specials Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats C39 Bar Code (plus Human Readable)
MSPUBL Microsoft Publishing
VNMATH Ventura Math
PSMATH PS Math
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Courier Courier Italic Courier Bold Courier Bold Italic CG Times CG Times Italic CG Times Bold CG Times Bold Italic Univers Medium Univers Medium Italic Univers Bold Univers Bold Italic Times New Roman Times New Roman Italic Times New Roman Bold Times New Roman BoldItalic Arial Arial Italic Arial Bold Arial Bold Italic Letter Gothic
PIFONT
MATH8
109Y
209Y
579L
19M
15U
15Y
10L
9L
14L
6M
5M
8M
0O
1O
3K
9Y
6J
PCL ITC Zapf Dingbats
PS ITC Zapf Dingbats
POSTNET Barcode
C39 Bar Code (plus Lower Case)
PC-911 Katakana
C39 Bar Code (Upper Case)
Wingdings
Symbol
OCR-A
OCR-B
Math-8
Pi font
2-27
PCL
Table 2-7: Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Specials (Continued)
VNMATH Ventura Math
PSMATH PS Math
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Letter Gothic Italic Letter Gothic Bold Univers Condensed Medium Univers Condensed Medium Italic Univers Condensed Bold Univers Condensed Bold Italic Garamond Antiqua Garamond Kursiv Garamond Halbfett Garamond Kursiv Halbfett CG Omega CG Omega Italic CG Omega Bold CG Omega Bold Italic Antique Olive Antique Olive Italic Antique Olive Bold Albertus Medium Albertus Extra Bold Clarendon Condensed Bold Marigold
PIFONT
MATH8
109Y
209Y
579L
19M
15U
15Y
10L
9L
14L
6M
5M
8M
0O
1O
3K
9Y
6J
POSTNET Barcode
PC-911 Katakana
Wingdings
Symbol
OCR-A
OCR-B
Math-8
Pi font
2-28
PCL
VNMATH Ventura Math
PSMATH PS Math
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Coronet Helvetica Helvetica Italic Helvetica Bold Helvetica Bold Italic Helvetica Narrow Helvetica Narrow Italic Helvetica Narrow Bold Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic Palatino Roman Palatino Italic Palatino Bold Palatino Bold Italic ITC Bookman Light ITC Bookman Light Italic ITC Bookman Demi ITC Bookman Demi Italic ITC Avant Garde Book ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique ITC Avant Garde Demi ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique
PIFONT
MATH8
109Y
209Y
579L
19M
15U
15Y
10L
9L
14L
6M
5M
8M
0O
1O
3K
9Y
6J
POSTNET Barcode
PC-911 Katakana
Wingdings
Symbol
OCR-A
OCR-B
Math-8
Pi font
2-29
PCL
VNMATH Ventura Math
PSMATH PS Math
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Century Schoolbook Roman Century Schoolbook Italic Century Schoolbook Bold Century Schoolbook Bold Italic ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic CourierPS CourierPS Oblique CourierPS Bold CourierPS Bold Oblique Times Roman Times Italic Times Bold Times Bold Italic Helvetica Light Helvetica Light Oblique Helvetica Black Helvetica Black Oblique Line Printer 16 POSTNET Barcode C39 Narrow C39 Regular
PIFONT
MATH8
109Y
209Y
579L
19M
15U
15Y
10L
9L
14L
6M
5M
8M
0O
1O
3K
9Y
6J
POSTNET Barcode
PC-911 Katakana
Wingdings
Symbol
OCR-A
OCR-B
Math-8
Pi font
2-30
PCL
VNMATH Ventura Math
PSMATH PS Math
PJL Value Symbol Set ID C39 Wide OCR-A OCR-B Wingdings Symbol SymbolPS ITC Zapf Dingbats
PIFONT
MATH8
109Y
209Y
579L
19M
15U
15Y
10L
9L
Table 2-8: Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn ISO PCL Emulation Symbol Sets
Symbol Set ID 1E 0U 0S 0I 2S 1G 0D 1F Symbol Set / Typeface ISO 4: United Kingdom ISO 6: ASCII ISO 11: Swedish for Names ISO 15: Italian ISO 17: Spanish ISO 21: German ISO 60: Norwegian Version 1 ISO 69: French
14L
6M
5M
8M
0O
1O
3K
9Y
6J
POSTNET Barcode
PC-911 Katakana
Wingdings
Symbol
OCR-A
OCR-B
Math-8
Pi font
2-31
PCL
Table 2-8: Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn ISO PCL Emulation Symbol
Symbol Set ID 2U 0F 0G 0K 2K 3S 1S 6S 4S 5S 1D Symbol Set / Typeface ISO 2: IRV (International Ref Version) ISO 25: French ISO: HP German ISO 14: JIS ASCII ISO 57: Chinese ISO 10: Swedish ISO: HP Spanish ISO 85: Spanish ISO 16: Portuguese ISO 84: Portuguese ISO 61: Norwegian Version 2
Table 2-9: Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Latin 1
PC-8, Code Page 437
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
Windows 98 Latin 1
PC-850 Multilingual
ISO 8859-15 Latin 9
Roman Extension
PC-860 Portugal
21U 23U 25U 9J 13P 14P 8U ROMAN8
11U PC8DN
19U WINL1
12U PC850
13U PC858
DESKTOP Desk Top 7J
PSTEXT
LEGAL
WIN30
ISOL1
ISOL9
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Courier Courier Italic Courier Bold
10U PC8
20U
10J
12J
14J
1U
9U
0N
9N
4U
0E
VNUS
Ventura US
Roman-9
MC Text
PS Text
Legal
2-32
PCL
PC-8, Code Page 437
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
Windows 98 Latin 1
PC-850 Multilingual
ISO 8859-15 Latin 9
Roman Extension
PC-860 Portugal
21U 23U 25U 9J 13P 14P 8U ROMAN8
11U PC8DN
19U WINL1
12U PC850
13U PC858
DESKTOP Desk Top 7J
PSTEXT
LEGAL
WIN30
ISOL1
ISOL9
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Courier Bold Italic CG Times CG Times Italic CG Times Bold CG Times Bold Italic Univers Medium Univers Medium Italic Univers Bold Univers Bold Italic Times New Roman Times New Roman Italic Times New Roman Bold Times New Roman Bold Italic Arial Arial Italic Arial Bold Arial Bold Italic Letter Gothic Letter Gothic Italic
10U PC8
20U
10J
12J
14J
1U
9U
0N
9N
4U
0E
VNUS
Ventura US
Roman-9
MC Text
PS Text
Legal
2-33
PCL
PC-8, Code Page 437
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
Windows 98 Latin 1
PC-850 Multilingual
ISO 8859-15 Latin 9
Roman Extension
PC-860 Portugal
21U 23U 25U 9J 13P 14P 8U ROMAN8
11U PC8DN
19U WINL1
12U PC850
13U PC858
DESKTOP Desk Top 7J
PSTEXT
LEGAL
WIN30
ISOL1
ISOL9
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Letter Gothic Bold Univers Condensed Medium Univers Condensed Medium Italic Univers Condensed Bold Univers Condensed Bold Italic Garamond Antiqua Garamond Kursiv Garamond Halbfett Garamond Kursiv Halbfett CG Omega CG Omega Italic CG Omega Bold CG Omega Bold Italic Antique Olive Antique Olive Italic Antique Olive Bold Albertus Medium Albertus Extra Bold Clarendon Condensed Bold
10U PC8
20U
10J
12J
14J
1U
9U
0N
9N
4U
0E
VNUS
Ventura US
Roman-9
MC Text
PS Text
Legal
2-34
PCL
PC-8, Code Page 437
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
Windows 98 Latin 1
PC-850 Multilingual
ISO 8859-15 Latin 9
Roman Extension
PC-860 Portugal
21U 23U 25U 9J 13P 14P 8U ROMAN8
11U PC8DN
19U WINL1
12U PC850
13U PC858
DESKTOP Desk Top 7J
PSTEXT
LEGAL
WIN30
ISOL1
ISOL9
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Marigold Coronet Helvetica Helvetica Italic Helvetica Bold Helvetica Bold Italic Helvetica Narrow Helvetica Narrow Italic Helvetica Narrow Bold Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic Palatino Roman Palatino Italic Palatino Bold Palatino Bold Italic ITC Bookman Light ITC Bookman Light Italic ITC Bookman Demi ITC Bookman Demi Italic ITC Avant Garde Book
10U PC8
20U
10J
12J
14J
1U
9U
0N
9N
4U
0E
VNUS
Ventura US
Roman-9
MC Text
PS Text
Legal
2-35
PCL
PC-8, Code Page 437
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
Windows 98 Latin 1
PC-850 Multilingual
ISO 8859-15 Latin 9
Roman Extension
PC-860 Portugal
21U 23U 25U 9J 13P 14P 8U ROMAN8
11U PC8DN
19U WINL1
12U PC850
13U PC858
DESKTOP Desk Top 7J
PSTEXT
LEGAL
WIN30
ISOL1
ISOL9
PJL Value Symbol Set ID ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique ITC Avant Garde Demi ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique Century Schoolbook Roman Century Schoolbook Italic Century Schoolbook Bold Century Schoolbook Bold Italic ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic CourierPS CourierPS Oblique CourierPS Bold CourierPS Bold Oblique Times Roman Times Italic Times Bold Times Bold Italic Helvetica Light Helvetica Light Oblique Helvetica Black
10U PC8
20U
10J
12J
14J
1U
9U
0N
9N
4U
0E
VNUS
Ventura US
Roman-9
MC Text
PS Text
Legal
2-36
PCL
PC-8, Code Page 437
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
Windows 98 Latin 1
PC-850 Multilingual
ISO 8859-15 Latin 9
Roman Extension
PC-860 Portugal
21U 23U 25U 9J 13P 14P 8U ROMAN8
11U PC8DN
19U WINL1
12U PC850
13U PC858
DESKTOP Desk Top 7J
PSTEXT
LEGAL
WIN30
ISOL1
ISOL9
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Helvetica Black Oblique Line Printer 16 POSTNET Barcode C39 Narrow C39 Regular C39 Wide OCR-A OCR-B Wingdings Symbol SymbolPS ITC Zapf Dingbats
10U PC8
20U
10J
12J
14J
1U
9U
0N
9N
4U
0E
VNUS
Ventura US
Roman-9
MC Text
PS Text
Legal
2-37
PCL
Table 2-10: Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek
PC-8 Polish Mazovia
Windows 98 Cyrillic
Windows 98 Latin 2
Windows 98 Latin 5
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6
Windows 98 Greek
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
PC-8 Bulgarian
PC-869 Greece
PC-851 Greece
Russian-GOST
PC-866 Cyrillic
PC-855 Cyrillic
PC-852 Latin 2
PC-8 PC Nova
Ukrainian
Turkish-8
WINL2
17U PC852
WINL5
ISOL2
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Courier Courier Italic Courier Bold Courier Bold Italic CG Times CG Times Italic CG Times Bold CG Times Bold Italic Univers Medium
24Q
27Q
ISOL5
11G
10G
16U
18U
26U
10N
10R
12R
13R
14R
12N
19L
9G
Univers Medium Italic Univers Bold Univers Bold Italic Times New Roman Times New Roman Italic Times New Roman Bold Times New Roman Bold Italic Arial
8G
2N
5N
6N
9R
3R
9E
5T
9T
8T
Greek-8
2-38
PCL
PC-8 Polish Mazovia
Windows 98 Cyrillic
Windows 98 Latin 2
Windows 98 Latin 5
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6
Windows 98 Greek
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
PC-8 Bulgarian
PC-869 Greece
PC-851 Greece
Russian-GOST
PC-866 Cyrillic
PC-855 Cyrillic
PC-852 Latin 2
PC-8 PC Nova
Ukrainian
Turkish-8
WINL2
17U PC852
WINL5
ISOL2
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Arial Italic Arial Bold Arial Bold Italic Letter Gothic Letter Gothic Italic Letter Gothic Bold Univers Condensed Medium Univers Condensed Medium Italic Univers Condensed Bold Univers Condensed Bold Italic Garamond Antiqua Garamond Kursiv Garamond Halbfett Garamond Kursiv Halbfett CG Omega CG Omega Italic CG Omega Bold
24Q
27Q
ISOL5
11G
10G
16U
18U
26U
10N
10R
12R
13R
14R
12N
19L
9G
8G
2N
5N
6N
9R
3R
9E
5T
9T
8T
Greek-8
2-39
PCL
PC-8 Polish Mazovia
Windows 98 Cyrillic
Windows 98 Latin 2
Windows 98 Latin 5
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6
Windows 98 Greek
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
PC-8 Bulgarian
PC-869 Greece
PC-851 Greece
Russian-GOST
PC-866 Cyrillic
PC-855 Cyrillic
PC-852 Latin 2
PC-8 PC Nova
Ukrainian
Turkish-8
WINL2
17U PC852
WINL5
ISOL2
PJL Value Symbol Set ID CG Omega Bold Italic Antique Olive Antique Olive Italic Antique Olive Bold Albertus Medium Albertus Extra Bold Clarendon Condensed Bold Marigold Coronet Helvetica Helvetica Italic Helvetica Bold Helvetica Bold Italic Helvetica Narrow Helvetica Narrow Italic Helvetica Narrow Bold Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic Palatino Roman
24Q
27Q
ISOL5
11G
10G
16U
18U
26U
10N
10R
12R
13R
14R
12N
19L
9G
8G
2N
5N
6N
9R
3R
9E
5T
9T
8T
Greek-8
2-40
PCL
PC-8 Polish Mazovia
Windows 98 Cyrillic
Windows 98 Latin 2
Windows 98 Latin 5
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6
Windows 98 Greek
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
PC-8 Bulgarian
PC-869 Greece
PC-851 Greece
Russian-GOST
PC-866 Cyrillic
PC-855 Cyrillic
PC-852 Latin 2
PC-8 PC Nova
Ukrainian
Turkish-8
WINL2
17U PC852
WINL5
ISOL2
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Palatino Italic Palatino Bold Palatino Bold Italic ITC Bookman Light ITC Bookman Light Italic ITC Bookman Demi ITC Bookman Demi Italic ITC Avant Garde Book ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique ITC Avant Garde Demi ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique Century Schoolbook Roman Century Schoolbook Italic Century Schoolbook Bold
24Q
27Q
ISOL5
11G
10G
16U
18U
26U
10N
10R
12R
13R
14R
12N
19L
9G
8G
2N
5N
6N
9R
3R
9E
5T
9T
8T
Greek-8
2-41
PCL
PC-8 Polish Mazovia
Windows 98 Cyrillic
Windows 98 Latin 2
Windows 98 Latin 5
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6
Windows 98 Greek
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
PC-8 Bulgarian
PC-869 Greece
PC-851 Greece
Russian-GOST
PC-866 Cyrillic
PC-855 Cyrillic
PC-852 Latin 2
PC-8 PC Nova
Ukrainian
Turkish-8
WINL2
17U PC852
WINL5
ISOL2
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Century Schoolbook Bold Italic ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic CourierPS CourierPS Oblique CourierPS Bold CourierPS Bold Oblique Times Roman Times Italic Times Bold Times Bold Italic Helvetica Light Helvetica Light Oblique Helvetica Black Helvetica Black Oblique Line Printer 16 POSTNET Barcode C39 Narrow C39 Regular
24Q
27Q
ISOL5
11G
10G
16U
18U
26U
10N
10R
12R
13R
14R
12N
19L
9G
8G
2N
5N
6N
9R
3R
9E
5T
9T
8T
Greek-8
2-42
PCL
PC-8 Polish Mazovia
Windows 98 Cyrillic
Windows 98 Latin 2
Windows 98 Latin 5
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6
Windows 98 Greek
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
PC-8 Bulgarian
PC-869 Greece
PC-851 Greece
Russian-GOST
PC-866 Cyrillic
PC-855 Cyrillic
PC-852 Latin 2
PC-8 PC Nova
Ukrainian
Turkish-8
WINL2
17U PC852
WINL5
ISOL2
24Q
27Q
ISOL5
11G
10G
16U
18U
26U
10N
10R
12R
13R
14R
12N
19L
9G
8G
2N
5N
6N
9R
3R
9E
5T
9T
8T
Greek-8
2-43
PCL
Table 2-11: Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Specials
VNMATH Ventura Math
PSMATH PS Math
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Courier Courier Italic Courier Bold Courier Bold Italic CG Times CG Times Italic CG Times Bold CG Times Bold Italic Univers Medium Univers Medium Italic Univers Bold Univers Bold Italic Times New Roman Times New Roman Italic Times New Roman Bold Times New Roman BoldItalic Arial Arial Italic Arial Bold Arial Bold Italic Letter Gothic
PIFONT
MATH8
109Y
209Y
579L
19M
15U
15Y
10L
9L
14L
6M
5M
8M
0O
1O
3K
9Y
6J
POSTNET Barcode
PC-911 Katakana
Wingdings
Symbol
OCR-A
OCR-B
Math-8
Pi font
2-44
PCL
VNMATH Ventura Math
PSMATH PS Math
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Letter Gothic Italic Letter Gothic Bold Univers Condensed Medium Univers Condensed Medium Italic Univers Condensed Bold Univers Condensed Bold Italic Garamond Antiqua Garamond Kursiv Garamond Halbfett Garamond Kursiv Halbfett CG Omega CG Omega Italic CG Omega Bold CG Omega Bold Italic Antique Olive Antique Olive Italic Antique Olive Bold Albertus Medium Albertus Extra Bold Clarendon Condensed Bold Marigold
PIFONT
MATH8
109Y
209Y
579L
19M
15U
15Y
10L
9L
14L
6M
5M
8M
0O
1O
3K
9Y
6J
POSTNET Barcode
PC-911 Katakana
Wingdings
Symbol
OCR-A
OCR-B
Math-8
Pi font
2-45
PCL
VNMATH Ventura Math
PSMATH PS Math
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Coronet Helvetica Helvetica Italic Helvetica Bold Helvetica Bold Italic Helvetica Narrow Helvetica Narrow Italic Helvetica Narrow Bold Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic Palatino Roman Palatino Italic Palatino Bold Palatino Bold Italic ITC Bookman Light ITC Bookman Light Italic ITC Bookman Demi ITC Bookman Demi Italic ITC Avant Garde Book ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique ITC Avant Garde Demi ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique
PIFONT
MATH8
109Y
209Y
579L
19M
15U
15Y
10L
9L
14L
6M
5M
8M
0O
1O
3K
9Y
6J
POSTNET Barcode
PC-911 Katakana
Wingdings
Symbol
OCR-A
OCR-B
Math-8
Pi font
2-46
PCL
VNMATH Ventura Math
PSMATH PS Math
PJL Value Symbol Set ID Century Schoolbook Roman Century Schoolbook Italic Century Schoolbook Bold Century Schoolbook Bold Italic ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic CourierPS CourierPS Oblique CourierPS Bold CourierPS Bold Oblique Times Roman Times Italic Times Bold Times Bold Italic Helvetica Light Helvetica Light Oblique Helvetica Black Helvetica Black Oblique Line Printer 16 POSTNET Barcode C39 Narrow C39 Regular
PIFONT
MATH8
109Y
209Y
579L
19M
15U
15Y
10L
9L
14L
6M
5M
8M
0O
1O
3K
9Y
6J
POSTNET Barcode
PC-911 Katakana
Wingdings
Symbol
OCR-A
OCR-B
Math-8
Pi font
2-47
PCL
VNMATH Ventura Math
PSMATH PS Math
PIFONT
MATH8
109Y
209Y
579L
19M
15U
15Y
10L
9L
All fonts that support the Roman-8 (8U) symbol set also support the following 19 symbol sets. Table 2-12: Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn ISO PCL Emulation Symbol Sets
Symbol Set ID 1E 0U 0S 0I 2S 1G 0D Symbol Set / Typeface ISO 4: United Kingdom ISO 6: ASCII ISO 11: Swedish for Names ISO 15: Italian ISO 17: Spanish ISO 21: German ISO 60: Norwegian Version 1
14L
6M
5M
8M
0O
1O
3K
9Y
6J
POSTNET Barcode
PC-911 Katakana
Wingdings
Symbol
OCR-A
OCR-B
Math-8
Pi font
2-48
PCL
Table 2-12: Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn ISO PCL Emulation Symbol
Symbol Set ID 1F 2U 0F 0G 0K 2K 3S 1S 6S 4S 5S 1D Symbol Set / Typeface ISO 69: French ISO 2: IRV (International Ref Version) ISO 25: French ISO: HP German ISO 14: JIS ASCII ISO 57: Chinese ISO 10: Swedish ISO: HP Spanish ISO 85: Spanish ISO 16: Portuguese ISO 84: Portuguese ISO 61: Norwegian Version 2
Command Structure
This section introduces the different types of PCL emulation commands and their structure, or syntax. It also demonstrates how you can link commands to abbreviate them.
Control Codes
Control Codes are single-character instructions. Table 2-13: Control Codes
Code BS HT LF Dec 8 9 10 Hex 08 09 0A Function Backspace Horizontal Tab Line Feed Result Moves the cursor toward the left margin one horizontal space equal to the last printed character Moves the cursor to the next defined tab stop Advances the cursor to the same horizontal position on the following line as determined by either the Vertical Motion Index (VMI) or Set Line Spacing command Advances the cursor to the same horizontal position at the top margin of the next page
FF
12
0C
Form Feed
2-49
PCL
Table 2-13: Control Codes (Continued)

Code CR SP SI SO Dec 13 32 15 14 Hex 0D 20 0F 0E Function Carriage Return Space Primary Font Secondary Font Result Moves the cursor to the left margin Moves the cursor to the right one column Selects the primary font Selects the secondary font
Commands
PCL emulation commands are multibyte strings (also known as escape sequences) that begin with the Escape control code (ESC, , decimal 27, or hexadecimal 1B). The ESC control code notifies the printer that the characters that follow are to be interpreted as part of a command and are not control codes or data to be printed.
Command Structure
Most PCL emulation commands have the following structure:
ESC
& a # C
Spaces have been added to this example for readability. The command parameter variables are indicated by a number sign (#). Table 2-14: Description of Command Structure
Element
ESC
Description Decimal 27 or hex 1B Parameterized character from American National Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) table (ranging from 33 to 47 decimal) Group character from ASCII table (ranging from 96 to 126 decimal) that specifies a group type of control Decimal character string value within specified numeric ranges; may be preceded by a + or - sign and contain a decimal point Termination character from ASCII table (ranging from 64 to 94 decimal)
& a # C
Command Parameters
A command parameter sets the value for a command. This value stays constant until either a different value resets the command or a command resets the printer to the default values. For example, after the printer receives a command that selects a right
2-50
PCL
margin beginning at column 63, the right margin of each printed page begins at column 63. That margin stays constant until a right margin command with a different value resets it or until the printer is reset. Parameters for each command are listed in the command tables beginning on page 2-52. Use the Symbol Set Tables to determine the decimal or hexadecimal value for each parameter. To determine a decimal or hex value, first locate the value of the parameter you require in the Symbol Set Table. The decimal value is the value shown in the bottom of the cell or box with that parameter. To find a hex value, go straight up the grid from the desired parameter and read the value in the top heading. This is the first character of the hex value. Next, go straight across the grid to the left of the parameter and read the value in the left column heading. This is the second character of the hex value. For example, ESC () is coded 1B in Hex and 27 in decimal. (Any one of the three values , 1B, or 27 might be used in your application. Read your documentation to determine which to use.) The example on the following page sets the pitch of the primary font to 16.66 characters per inch. Example:
ESC
(s16.66H Decimal: 27 40 115 49 54 46 54 54 72
Hex: 1B 28 73 31 36 2E 36 36 48
Use the plus symbol (+) or the minus symbol (-) to select a position relative to the current cursor position. For example:
ESC ESC
&a6C &a+6C ESC&a-6C
Move to horizontal cursor position, column six Move six columns to the right of the current position Move six columns to the left of the current position
Linking Commands
You can combine PCL emulation commands by linking them if the first 3 bytes of the commands are identical. The combined, short form sends the first 3 bytes only once in the string. To combine commands:
Use the first 3 bytes (characters) of the command only once at the start of the command string. Make the last letter of each command in the string lowercase. Capitalize the last letter of the string.
2-51
PCL
For example, notice that the first 3 bytes of these two commands are the same:
ESC ESC
(s10H (s4099T
Select 10 characters per inch Select Courier typeface
To combine these two commands, use this form:

ESC
(s10h4099T
which is 3 bytes shorter than the long form:

ESC
(s10HESC(s4099T
You can combine more than two commands; for example, you can add Select Stroke Weight Bold (ESC(s3B) to the previous two commands:
ESC
(s10h3b4099T
or in the long form:

ESC
(s10HESC(s3BESC(s4099T
PCL Emulation Commands

See the following tables for a listing of the commands grouped by function. To determine which commands your printer supports, see Table A-1: PCL Emulation Commands on page A-1.
2-52
PCL
PCL Emulation Commands by Function

Table 2-15: Job Control
Command / Parameters
ESC
Function / Result Printer Reset Prints any partial pages. Resets printer environment to defaults. Deletes all temporary downloaded resources.
ESC
&d#A
Number of Collated Copies Turns collation of pages off or sets the number of collated copies.
0 = Collation off 1 ... 999 (number of Copies)

ESC
&l#X
Number of Copies Affects the page currently in process and subsequent pages.
# = number of Copies (1 to 32767) Default = 1

ESC&
l#S
Simplex/Duplex Print Long-edge or short-edge binding refers to the side of the physical page where binding occurs.
0 Single-Sided (Default) 1 Duplex Long-Edge Binding 2 Duplex Short-Edge Binding 100 Manual Duplex First Sides 101 Manual Duplex Second Sides
ESC
&l#U
Long-Edge Offset Registration Also known as Left Offset. Adjusts placement of logical page along the width of the physical page.
# = number of Decipoints Range = -32767 to 32767 (1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch) Default = 0

ESC
&l#Z
Short-Edge Offset Registration Also known as Top Offset. Adjusts placement of logical page along the length of the physical page.
# = number of Decipoints Range = -32767 to 32767 (1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch) Default = 0
2-53
PCL
Table 2-15: Job Control (Continued)

ESC
Function / Result Unit of Measure Sets the size for the PCL Unit (units per inch). The Unit of Measure defines the unit used in the following commands: Horizontal Cursor Position by PCL Unit (ESC*p#X) Vertical Cursor Position by PCL Unit (ESC*p#Y) Horizontal Rectangle Size by PCL Unit (ESC*c#A) Vertical Rectangle Size by PCL Unit (ESC*c#B)
&u#D
Range = (96, 100, 120, 144, 150, 160, 180, 200, 225, 240, 288, 300, 360, 400, 450, 480, 600, 720, 800, 900, 1200, 1440, 1800, 2400, 3600, 7200) Default = 300 units per inch
The Unit of Measure also affects the rounding of character escapements and the Horizontal Motion Index. Note: This command does not affect the interpretation of binary raster data for bitmapped fonts, raster graphics, or user defined fill patterns.
ESC%
12345X
Universal Exit Language (UEL) / Start of PJL This command terminates the current printer language and allows switching into PJL. For more information, see UNIVERSAL EXIT LANGUAGE Command on page 3-2.
2-54
PCL
Table 2-16: Page Control

ESC
Function / Result Set Page Size Selects the physical size of the paper, which also determines the logical page dimensions. See the tables beginning on page 2-1 for the paper and envelope dimensions your printer supports. If the requested page size is not in the requested source or if no source is requested, sources are checked for the requested size in the following order: multipurpose feeder, tray 1, tray 2, tray 3, tray 4, tray 5, and envelope feeder. Notes: When the printer receives the page size command, any partially formatted pages are printed, and the cursor position and margins are reset. Duplex printing is not supported on any envelope. The size loaded in the active source is checked to see if it matches the requested size. If the multipurpose feeder is configured as Cassette or Manual, the same applies; however, if the multipurpose feeder is configured as First and media is loaded in the multipurpose feeder, then, regardless of media size, it is the source used until it is empty.
&l#A 1 2 3 4, 10 6, 11 13, 25 15 26 27 12, 45 46 101 Executive Letter Legal Folio Ledger (11 x 17) A5 Paper Statement A4 Paper A3 Paper B5 Paper B4 Paper Custom Paper/Universal
Paper
Envelopes 80 81 89 90 91 99, 100 600

ESC
Monarch 7 3/4 Commercial 10 Commercial 9 DL C5 B5 Envelope Other Envelope
&l#H 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 21 62 Active Source or Eject Page Tray 1 (Default) Manual Paper Feed Manual Envelope Feed Tray 2 Tray 3 Optional Envelope Feeder Auto Select Multipurpose Feeder Tray 4 Tray 5 Optional Paper Source
Paper Source Selects the paper feed source. Note: If the paper source is changed for the back of a duplexed page, a blank back page prints, the paper source changes, and the information for the back side of the page is printed on the front side of a page sent from the new paper source.
ESC
&f#G
Set Universal Width Sets the width of the Universal size in decipoints.
# = number of Decipoints (1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)

ESC
&f#F
Set Universal Height Sets the height of the Universal size in decipoints.
# = number of Decipoints (1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)

ESC&f#O
Set Universal Feed Direction Short-edge Long-edge Sets the feed direction of Universal size. Feed direction means which side of the print media, either the short edge or the long edge, feeds through the printer first.
0 1
2-55
PCL
Table 2-16: Page Control (Continued)

ESC
Function / Result Set Universal Custom Name Sets the user-specified custom name for the Universal paper size being used. Select Orientation Specifies the position of the logical page with respect to the physical page. Note: This setting resets margins, the number of printable lines per page, and the cursor position. Print Direction Rotates the coordinate system counter-clockwise in 90 increments with respect to the current orientation. Note: Margins are not rotated or cleared.
&f#W [custom name]
# = number of bytes in the custom name

ESC
&l#O 0 1 2 3 Portrait (Default) Landscape Reverse Portrait Reverse Landscape
ESC
&a#P
# = Degrees (0, 90, 180, 270) Default = 0

ESC&c#T
Character Text Path Direction Horizontal Printing Vertical Rotated Printing Vertically rotates text for use in vertical writing, such as printing Japanese text. Set Left Margin Sets the left margin to the left edge of the designated column. Note: The column width is defined by the space character of the active font and the Horizontal Motion Index (HMI). Set Right Margin Sets the right margin to the right edge of the designated column. Note: The column width is defined by the space character of the active font and the HMI. Clear Horizontal Margins Clears left and right margins.
0 -1
ESC
&a#L
# = Column Default = 0
ESC
&a#M
# = Column Default = Logical Page Width

ESC
9 &l#E
ESC
Set Top Margin Sets the number of lines between the top of the physical page and first line of print. Line height is determined by the current Vertical Motion Index (VMI) and/or line spacing value. Note: Setting a top margin of 0 results in the first line of text falling outside of the printable area.
# = number of lines Default = 3 (1/2 inch)
ESC&
l1T l#F
Job Separation This command is parsed and ignored.
ESC&
Set Text Length Sets the bottom margin length in lines, measured from the first line of the page. Text Length equals Logical Page Length 1 inch (1/2 inch for top and 1/2 inch for bottom).
# = number of lines Default = 60 or 64 (Country specific)
2-56
PCL

ESC
Function / Result Set Output Bin Sets the exit path to direct paper to one of the output bins.
&l#G 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Auto Select (uses the active bin) Standard Bin Bin 1 or Rear Bin Bin 1 or Rear Bin Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10
ESC
&l#L 0 1 Off On (Default)
Skip Perforation Perforation area includes the area from the bottom margin of the current page to the top margin of the next page. When skipping perforations, a line feed past the bottom margin ejects a page and places the cursor at the top margin of the next page. Set Horizontal Motion Index (HMI) Sets the width of all characters for fixed-space fonts. Sets only the width of the space for proportional spaced fonts. Set Vertical Motion Index (VMI) Sets Vertical Motion Index in 1/48 inch increments. The VMI determines the vertical distance between lines. Notes: For some printers, you can change the default VMI from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional by using the Lines Per Page menu item. See your printer documentation for more information. Use of this command alters any previous Set Line Spacing command settings.
ESC
&k#H
# = number of 1/120 inch increments (Valid to 4 decimal places)

ESC&
l#C
# = number of 1/48 inch increments (Valid to 4 decimal places) Default = 8
2-57
PCL

ESC
Function / Result Set Line Spacing (Alternative Method)
&l#D 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 48 1 line/inch 2 lines/inch 3 lines/inch 4 lines/inch 6 lines/inch (Default) 8 lines/inch 12 lines/inch 16 lines/inch 24 lines/inch 48 lines/inch
Specifies VMI in lines per inch. Notes: For some printers, you can change the default VMI from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional by using the Lines Per Page menu item. See your printer documentation for more information. Unsupported values are ignored. Use of this command alters any earlier VMI setting.
ESC&a#G
Duplex Page Side Selection Next Side Front Side Back Side Specifies which physical page side to print next when duplex printing. Note: When the duplex option is not installed, this command causes a conditional page eject. Set Page Length Sets the logical page length in number of lines. Notes: This command is sent at the beginning of a page in a print job and prior to any printable data. When the command is sent, the current page is closed and printed. Unsupported values are ignored. Text Scale Mode Turn Text Scale Mode OFF Turn Text Scale Mode ON Allows 66 lines of text at six lines per inch to print on an effective page length of 10 1/2 inches. Notes: Unsupported values are ignored. The command is ignored when the printer is in landscape mode.
0 1 2
ESC
&l#P # = number from 0 to 14 0 = default page length is used (1 to 14 = new page length is set)
ESC
&k#W 5 6
2-58
PCL
Table 2-17: Alphanumeric ID

ESC
Function / Result Alphanumeric ID Selects the media type using a character string. The string ID is case sensitive and may be up to 511 bytes long. The string ID specifies the media type requested. Media Type Plain Paper Bond Transparency Card Stock Labels Letterhead Pre-printed Colored Paper Envelope Custom Type 1 Custom Type 2 Custom Type 3 Custom Type 4 Custom Type 5 Custom Type 6 Alphanumeric String Plain Bond Transparency Card Stock Labels Letterhead Preprinted Color Envelope Custom Type 1 or User Type 1 Custom Type 2 or User Type 2 Custom Type 3 or User Type 3 Custom Type 4 or User Type 4 Custom Type 5 or User Type 5 Custom Type 6 or User Type 6
&n#W [operation] [string]
# = number of data bytes that make up the operation and string Operation operation = 100 or 1 byte = 0x64 or 'd' ascii For example: 100 String string = See Alphanumeric String list at right Media Select
For example, the following shows the command and parameters used to select bond paper: ESC&n5WdBond To select letterhead paper: ESC&n11WdLetterhead
Table 2-18: Cursor Positioning

ESC
Function / Result Horizontal Cursor Position (in Columns)

1
&a#C
# = number of Columns
Moves the cursor to a new position along the horizontal axis. Note: The column width is determined by the space character width of the active font or the Horizontal Motion Index (HMI), if set.
ESC
&a#H
1
Horizontal Cursor Position (in Decipoints) Moves the cursor to a new position along the horizontal axis.
# = number of Decipoints
(1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)

ESC*p#X
Horizontal Cursor Position (in PCL Units)

1
# = number of PCL Units
Moves the cursor to a new position along the horizontal axis. Note: PCL units are set by the Unit-of-Measure Command.
Parameter preceded by + or - sign denotes a relative cursor move from the current cursor position. Parameter without a sign denotes an absolute cursor move from the top left margin.
2-59
PCL
Table 2-18: Cursor Positioning (Continued)

ESC
Function / Result Vertical Cursor Position (in Rows)
&a#R Rows1
# = number of
Moves the cursor to a new position along the vertical axis. Note: Row height is determined by either the Vertical Motion Index (VMI) or the Set Line Spacing Command.
ESC
&a#V Decipoints1
Vertical Cursor Position (in Decipoints) Moves the cursor to a new position along the vertical axis.
# = number of
(1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)

ESC
*p#Y
1
Vertical Cursor Position (in PCL Units) Moves the cursor to a new position along the vertical axis. Note: PCL units are set by the Unit-of-Measure Command.
# = number of PCL Units
ESC=
Half Line-Feed Moves the cursor down 1/2 line (1/2 of the current VMI).
ESC&k#G
Set Line Termination CR=CR, LF=LF, FF=FF (Default) CR=CR+LF, LF=LF, FF=FF CR=CR, LF=CR+LF, FF=CR+FF CR=CR+LF, LF=CR+LF, FF=CR+FF Controls how the printer responds to the Carriage Return (CR), Line Feed (LF), and Form Feed (FF) control codes.
0 1 2 3
ESC&f#S
Push / Pop Cursor Position Push Pop Sets up a cursor position stack for storing and recalling various cursor positions. The stack can store up to 20 cursor positions.
0 1
1
Parameter preceded by + or - sign denotes a relative cursor move from the current cursor position. Parameter without a sign denotes an absolute cursor move from the top left margin.
2-60
PCL
Note: For the commands listed in Table 2-19, font selection is based on all parameters set following the best fit selection rules. Table 2-19: Font Selection
ESC ESC
Function / Result Select Symbol Set The line-draw characters are contained in the symbol set ID 10U, PC-8. The non-U.S. characters are contained in symbol set ID 12U, PC-850.
(# (primary) )# (secondary)
# = symbol set ID Default = 10U (PC-8) or 12U (PC-850), [Country specific]

ESC
(s#P (primary) (secondary) Fixed (Default) Proportional
Select Spacing Selects a font with proportional or fixed spacing.
ESC)s#P
0 1
ESC
(s#H (primary) (secondary)
Select Pitch Selects the number of characters per inch (cpi) for a fixed-space bitmapped or monospaced scalable font. Valid to 2 decimal places. Note: Pitch is not needed for proportional spaced fonts. Height (Select Point Size) Sets the font height in points. Valid to 2 decimal places. Note: Point size is not needed for monospaced fonts. For fonts larger than 12 points, it may be necessary to change the line spacing. Select Style Identifies the physical traits of a character and the composition of the font symbols. Note: You can only use this command to select fonts currently available in the printer. It cannot alter the appearance of the available fonts.
ESC)s#H
# = characters per inch Default = 10

ESC(s#V ESC
(primary)
)s#V (secondary) # = height in points (.25 to 999.75)
Default = 12
ESC(s#S ESC)s#S
(primary) (secondary) Upright (Default) Italic Condensed Condensed Italic Compressed Expanded Outline Inline Shadowed Outline Shadowed
0 1 4 5 8 24 32 64 128 160
2-61
PCL
Table 2-19: Font Selection (Continued)

ESC ESC
Function / Result Select Stroke Weight Selects a font with a particular thickness. Note: This command will not alter the stroke weight of an available font.
(s#B (primary) )s#B (secondary) -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Ultra Thin Extra Thin Thin Extra Light Light Demi Light Semi Light Medium (Default) Semi Bold Demi Bold Bold Extra Bold Black Extra Black Ultra Black (primary)
ESC(s#T ESC
Select Typeface Selects the best fit font design. To obtain the typeface values for downloaded fonts, print the font list from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. See your printer documentation for more information. On the printout, the typeface number is the last number on the font selection command example line. The example line is below the name of the font. In the following example, the typeface number is underlined: RO Courier
<<ESC>>(<<symset>><<ESC>>(s0p<<pitch>>h0s0b4099T
)s#T (secondary) # Typeface identifier (0 - 65535)
Note: For a list of typeface numbers, see Table 2-2 on page 2-9 and Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn on page 2-8.
ESC
(#X (primary) (secondary)
Select Font by Font ID Selects the font by the identification number.
ESC)#X
# = Font ID (0 - 32767)
ESC ESC ESC
(3@ (primary) )3@ (secondary) &p#X[data]
Select Default Font Sets all font selection characteristics to the Default Font. Transparent Print Data Prints the next number of bytes as text. Select Underline Type (Enable)
# = number of data of bytes to print as text

ESC&d#D
0,1 2 3 4
ESC&d@
Fixed Fixed - double Floating Floating - double
Notes: Fixed underline is drawn 5 pels below cursor position. Floating underline position is determined by all the positions of the characters with descenders in the fonts that are to be underlined. Underline thickness is 1/100 inch. Underline - Disable
2-62
PCL
Table 2-19: Font Selection (Continued)

ESC
Function / Result Text Parsing Method
&t#P 0, 1 21 31 38 1008
1 byte characters Communicates to the PCL parser whether character codes are 1 or 2 byte characters interpreted as 1-byte or 2-byte character codes. 1 or 2 byte characters 1 or 2 byte characters 1, 2, or 3 byte characters (UTF-8) Select Primary and Secondary Pitch 10.00 cpi 16.66 cpi 12.00 cpi Selects the pitch for the primary and secondary font.
ESC
&k#S 0 2 4
Table 2-20: User-Defined Symbol Set

ESC*c#R
Function / Result Symbol Set ID Code Sets the symbol set identification for the symbol set downloaded.
# = Symbol Set ID (0 - 32767) Default = 0

ESC
(f#W[data]
Define Symbol Set Contains the data for the user-defined symbol sets. Symbol Set Control
# = number of data bytes

ESC
*c#S 0 1 2 4 5 Delete all (temporary and permanent) Delete all temporary Delete current (ID) Make current temporary Make current permanent
Manages user-defined symbol sets.
2-63
PCL
Table 2-21: Font Creation

ESC
Function / Result Set Font ID Sets the identification number for the font being downloaded.
*c#D
# = Font ID # (0 - 32767) Default = 0

ESC
)s#W[data]
Load Font Header Downloads soft font header information. Note: Set Font ID before using this command.
ESC
*c#F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Delete all (temporary and permanent) Delete all temporary Delete previous font ID Delete previous specified character Make previous font ID temporary Make previous font ID permanent Copy current font
Font Control Manages soft fonts.
ESC
*c#E # = Code Point (0 - 65536)
Set Character Code Sets the decimal code point associated with the next character downloaded or deleted. Load Character Downloads character descriptor and data to the current character code.
Default = 0
ESC(s#W[data]
Table 2-22: Macros

ESC
Function / Result Set Macro ID Sets the ID for the macro you have created on flash or disk.
&f#Y
# = Macro ID (0 - 32767) Default = 0

ESC
&f#X 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Start definition End definition Execute macro (previous macro ID) Call macro (previous macro ID) Enable overlay (previous macro ID) Disable overlay Delete all macros Delete all temporary macros Delete current macro ID Make last ID temporary Make last ID permanent
Macro Control Manages use of macros. Notes: GL/2 commands are supported inside macros. Only call and execute macro commands are allowed within a macro. A macro may call or execute another macro. This is called nesting. A maximum of two nesting levels are allowed, for a total of three levels. See Macros on page 2-85 for additional information.
2-64
PCL
Table 2-23: Print Model

ESC
Function / Result Area Fill ID Selects pattern used to fill a rectangular area.
*c#G
Gray Scale Fills 0 1-2 3-10 11-20 21-35 36-55 56-80 81-99 100 White (default) 2% gray 10% gray 15% gray 30% gray 45% gray 70% gray 90% gray 100% gray (Black)
Note: This command is also used to set the user-defined pattern ID.
Cross-Hatch Fills 1 2 3 4 5 6 Horizontal line Vertical line Diagonal line Diagonal line Square grid Diagonal grid
User-Defined Patterns # = User-Defined Pattern ID

ESC*v#N
Source Transparency Mode Transparent (Default) Opaque Affects copying of white pixels from the source onto the destination image. Pattern Transparency Mode Transparent (Default) Opaque Affects copying of white pixels from the pattern onto the destination image. Logical Operation Defines boolean operations to be performed on data already printed and data about to be printed. Pixel Placement Grid Intersection (Default) Grid Centered Determines how pixels are placed for a rectangular area fill and GL/2 objects. Pixel Placement does not affect text or raster images.
0 1
ESC*v#O
0 1
ESC
*l#O
# = logical operation, value (0 to 255) Default = 252

ESC
*l#R 0 1
ESC*v#T
Select Current Pattern Solid Black (Default) Solid White Gray Shading Pattern Cross-Hatch Pattern User Defined Pattern True gray Level Fill Selects pattern used when printing text and raster images.
0 1 2 3 4 9
2-65
PCL
Table 2-24: User-Defined Pattern

ESC
Function / Result User-Defined Pattern Downloads binary pattern data. Set Pattern Reference Point
*c#W[data]

ESC
*p#R 0 1 Rotate with print (Default) Fixed
Sets the pattern reference point to the current cursor position for userdefined patterns. Note: Default pattern reference point is the upper left corner of the logical page.
ESC
*c#Q 0 1 2 4 5 Delete all patterns (temporary and permanent) Delete all temporary patterns Delete pattern (last ID specified) Make pattern of last ID # temporary Make pattern of last ID # permanent
Pattern Control Manages the use of user-defined patterns. Note: Use the Area Fill ID command (ESC*c#G) to set the ID.
Table 2-25: Rectangular Area Fill Graphics

ESC*c#H
Function / Result Horizontal Rectangle Size (in Decipoints) Specifies the rectangle width in decipoints.
# = Number of Decipoints (0 - 32767) (1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch) Default = 0, valid to 4 decimal places
ESC
*c#A
Horizontal Rectangle Size (in PCL Units) Specifies the rectangle width in PCL units. Note: The size of PCL Units is set by the Unit-of-Measure command. Vertical Rectangle Size (in Decipoints) Specifies the rectangle height in decipoints.
# = Number of PCL Units (0 - 32767) Default = 0

ESC
*c#V
# = Number of Decipoints (0 - 32767) (1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch) Default = 0, valid to 4 decimal places
ESC
*c#B
Vertical Rectangle Size (in PCL Units) Specifies the rectangle height in PCL units. Note: The size of PCL Units is set by the Unit-of-Measure command.
# = Number of PCL Units (0 - 32767) Default = 0
2-66
PCL
Table 2-25: Rectangular Area Fill Graphics (Continued)

ESC
Function / Result Area Fill ID Selects the pattern used to fill the rectangular area.
*c#G
Gray Scale Fills 0 1-2 3-10 11-20 21-35 36-55 56-80 81-99 100 White (default) 2% Gray 10% Gray 15% Gray 30% Gray 45% Gray 70% Gray 90% Gray 100% Gray (Black)
Note: This command is also used to set the user-defined pattern ID.
Cross-Hatch Fills 1 2 3 4 5 6 Horizontal Line Vertical Line Diagonal Line Diagonal Line Square Grid Diagonal Grid
User-Defined Patterns # = User-Defined Pattern ID

ESC*c#P
Fill Rectangular Area Black Fill (Default) White Fill Gray Fill Pre-Defined Cross-Hatch Pattern Fill User-Defined Pattern Current Pattern Fill True gray Level Fill Fills a rectangular area defined by Horizontal and Vertical Rectangle Sizes with the selected pattern.
0 1 2 3 4 5 9
2-67
PCL
Table 2-26: Raster Graphics

ESC
Function / Result Raster Resolution
*t#R 75 100 150 200 300 600 1200 75 dpi 100 dpi 150 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 600 dpi 1200 dpi
Note: 200 dpi is only supported when the printer is operating in 600 dpi or 1200 dpi mode.
ESC
*r#F 0 3 Rotate with print Fixed (Default)
Raster Graphics Presentation Sets the Raster Image Orientation in relation to the logical page. Raster Width (Source) Sets the width of the clip window for raster graphics. Raster Height (Source) Sets the height of the clip window for raster graphics. Start Raster Graphics Left Graphics Margin at 0 (Default) Current Cursor Position At logical left page limit with scaling On At current cursor position with scaling On Sets the left margin for raster graphics.
ESC
*r#S # = Number of Input Pixels
ESC
*r#T # = Number of Raster Lines
ESC
*r#A 0 1 2 3
ESC*b#V[data]
Transfer Raster Data by Plane This command is used when the raster data is encoded by plane as specified by the Simple Color command or the Configure Image Data command. The command sends each plane in the row except the last. Y Offset Moves the cursor position down by the specified number of raster lines.
# = Number of Data Bytes
ESC
*b#Y # = Number of Raster Lines
2-68
PCL
Table 2-26: Raster Graphics (Continued)

ESC
Function / Result Set Raster Compression Mode
*b#M 0 1 2 3 5 9 999 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 Uncoded (Default) Run-Length Encoded Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) byte Delta Row Adaptive Compression Replacement Delta Row Zlib Group 4 Group 3 one dimensional Group 3 two dimensional K=2 Group 3 two dimensional K=4 TIFF word (16 bit) TIFF double-word (32 bit) Adaptive compression (includes TIFF word and TIFF double-word)
Identifies the compression mode the host uses to transfer RIG data. For instance, this command can be run-length encoding or TIFF encoding. Note: For further information, see Raster Compression Mode on page 2-78 and Group 3 and Group 4 Raster Compression on page 2-83.
ESC
*b#W[data] # = Number of Data Bytes
Transfer Raster Data by Row/Block Transfers RIG data. Note: After each command, the cursor position is moved to the beginning of the next raster row.
ESC
*rB
End Raster Graphics (Version B) Signals the end of the raster graphics transfer. If a Raster Height is specified, the cursor is moved to the first raster row past the Raster Height.
ESC*rC
End Raster Graphics (Version C) Same as Version B, but: Resets the compression mode to uncoded. Setsthe left graphics margin to 0.
ESC*t#H
Raster Width (Destination) Sets the width of the destination raster.
2-69
PCL
Table 2-26: Raster Graphics (Continued)

ESC
Function / Result Raster Height (Destination) Sets the height of the destination raster.
*t#V
ESC
*g#W[data]
Set Raster Configuration Sets the configuration of the destination raster.
# - 8 (K-only) or 26 (KCMY) Data Byte 0 - 0x02 (constant) Byte 1 - number of colors 0x01 - K only 0x04 - CMYK Byte 2,3 - X res for K plane 0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600) Byte 4,5 - Y res for K plane 0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600) Byte 6,7 - K plane intensity levels 0x02 (1 bit/plane) or 0x04 (2 bits/plane) Byte 8,9 - X res for C plane 0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600) Byte 10,11 - Y res for C plane 0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600) Byte 12,13 - C plane intensity levels 0x02 (1 bit/plane) or 0x04 (2 bits/plane) Byte 14,15 - X res for M plane 0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600) Byte 16,17 - Y res for M plane 0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600) Byte 18,19 - M plane intensity levels 0x02 (1 bit/plane) or 0x04 (2 bits/plane) Byte 20,21 - X res for Y plane 0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600) Byte 22,23 - Y res for Y plane 0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600) Byte 24,25 - Y plane intensity levels 0x02 (1 bit/plane) or 0x04 (2 bits/plane)
2-70
PCL
Table 2-27: Color Extensions

ESC
Function / Result Monochrome Print Mode
&b#M 0 1
Print in mixed render algorithm Changes each color value to its gray scale equivalent. mode Print using gray scale equivalent Palette Control Delete all palettes except those in stack (active palette is deleted) Delete all palettes in stack (active palette not affected) Delete palette specified by Palette Control ID Copy active palette to ID specified by Palette Control ID Provides palette management.
ESC
&p#C 0
1 2 6
ESC
&p#I 0 to 32767 Palette ID number
Palette Control ID Indicates the ID number used by the Palette Control command. Select Palette Palette ID number Selects a new active palette by indicating the ID number. Color Lookup Tables Resets or initializes the color lookup tables for each primary color to the unity curve Data for color lookup table Enables the color lookup tables and specifies the table to use.
ESC
&p#S 0 to 32767 *l#W[data] 0
ESC
770, Data
ESC
*m#W[data] 7 to 32767, Data Data size and data of byte-aligned binary data that specifies a matrix or matrices for the primary colors
Download Dither Matrix Downloads a device dependent user-defined dither matrix.
ESC
*o#W[data] 1 to 32767, Data Specifies lightness, saturation, and image scaling
Driver Configuration Command Indicates the lightness, saturation, and scaling algorithm to be applied to a job. Push/Pop Palette Push (Save) Palette Pop (Restore) Palette Saves (push) the current palette and then restores (pop) it from the palette stack. Simple Color 4 planes, device CMYK palette 3 planes, device CMY palette Single plane, K (black) palette 3 planes, device RGB palette Creates a fixed-size palette. The color specification of the palette cannot be modified.
ESC
*p#P 0 1
ESC
*r#U -4 -3 1 3
2-71
PCL
Table 2-27: Color Extensions (Continued)

ESC
Function / Result Gamma Correction
*t#I 0 0.0 to 4.0 Gamma Correction Off Gamma Number
Improves the perceptual correctness of color data sent from the monitor to any other non-linear device by adjusting the brightness and darkness. Render Algorithm Selects the algorithm used for dithering images and fills.
ESC
*t#J
ESC
*v#A -32767.0 to 32767.0
Color Component One Indicates the first primary color specified by the Assign Color Index command. Color Component Two Indicates the second primary color specified by the Assign Color Index command. Color Component Three Indicates the third primary color specified by the Assign Color Index command. Assign Color Index Designates the three current color components to the specified palette index number. n represents the number of bits per index. Foreground Color Sets the foreground color to the specified index in the current palette. n represents the current palette size. Configure Image Data Creates programmable palettes.
ESC
*v#B -32767.0 to 32767.0
ESC*v#C
-32767.0 to 32767.0
ESC*v#I
# = Palette Index 0 to 2n 1 = Palette Index

ESC
*v#S # = Palette Index 0 to 2n 1 = Palette Index
ESC*v#W[data]
ESC*i#W[data]
Viewing Illuminant 8, Data Designates the relative white point used in determining a viewing illuminant condition.
2-72
PCL
Table 2-28: Status Readback

ESC
Function / Result Set Status Readback Location Type
*s#T 0 1 2 3 4 5 7 200 Invalid location (Default) Use currently selected location All locations Internal (resident) Downloaded entity Cartridge User-installable flash Disk
Sets the status location type to the specified value. The 5 value for Cartridge may be specified, but since your printer does not support font cards or cartridges, the command is ignored. The 7 value for User-installable flash is only valid when flash memory is installed. The 200 value is only valid when a hard disk is installed. Set Status Readback Location Unit
ESC
*s#U 0 1 2 All If download, temporary; otherwise, highest priority If download, permanent; otherwise, next higher priority
Sets the status location unit to the specified value. The location unit is used along with the location type to identify a location for the Inquire Status Readback Entity command. Note: The unit value is interpreted differently, depending on the location type specified. Inquire Status Readback Entity
ESC
*s#I 0 1 2 3 4 Font Macro User-defined pattern Symbol set (for unbound scalable fonts) Font extended
Returns the requested information set by Set Status Readback Location Type and Set Status Readback Location Unit.
ESC*s1M
Free Space Returns the total available memory and the largest available block of memory.
ESC
&r#F 0 1 Flush all complete pages Flush all pages
Flush All Pages Holds print jobs in the print buffer until the current job finishes printing. Echo Returns # back to host computer.
ESC
*s#X
-32767 to 32767 Default = 0
2-73
PCL
Table 2-29: Picture Frame

ESC
Function / Result Picture Frame Horizontal Size (in Decipoints) Specifies the horizontal dimension of the picture frame used when printing a GL/2 plot. Picture Frame Vertical Size (in Decipoints) Specifies the vertical dimension of the picture frame used when printing a GL/2 plot. Set Picture Frame Anchor Point
*c#X
# of Decipoints: 0 to 32767 (1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)

ESC
*c#Y
# of Decipoints: 0 to 32767 (1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)

ESC
*c0T 0 Set Anchor Point to Cursor Position
Sets the position of the picture frame anchor point to the cursor position. The picture frame anchor point defines the location of the upper left corner of the picture frame. GL/2 Horizontal Plot Size Specifies the horizontal scaling factor used when importing an image into the picture frame. GL/2 Vertical Plot Size Specifies the vertical scaling factor used when importing an image into the picture frame. Enter GL/2 Language
ESC*c#K
Size in inches: 0 to 32767

ESC
*c#L
Size in inches: 0 to 32767

ESC%#B
0 1
ESC%#A
Use Previous GL/2 Pen Position Use Current PCL Cursor Position
Exits PCL emulation and uses GL/2 commands to print. Enter PCL Emulation
0 1
Use Previous PCL Cursor Position Use Current GL/2 Pen Position
Exits GL/2 mode and uses PCL emulation commands to print.
Table 2-30: Miscellaneous Commands

ESC
Function / Result End-Of-Line Text Wrap
&s#C 0 1 Enable Disable (Default)
Enabling End-Of-Line Text Wrap moves portions of lines that extend into the unprintable area to the next line. Disabling drops the portion extending into the unprintable area. Display Functions On Prints all control codes and escape sequences rather than executing them. Notes: To prevent characters from falling outside the right margin (and not printing), enable End-Of-Line Text Wrap (ESC&s0C). To see the control characters and other blank codepoints in symbol set Roman8 (8U), set the symbol set to PC-8 (10U).
ESCY
2-74
PCL
Table 2-30: Miscellaneous Commands (Continued)

ESC
Function / Result Display Functions Off Turns off Display Functions; resumes normal command processing.
ESC
Print Test Page Causes a test page to print.
ESC
*o#M(b) -1 0 1 Ink Saver Normal Best
Print Quality Selects the print quality setting for the page.
ESC
&l#M(b) 0 1 2 3 4 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 Plain Paper Bond Coated Paper Glossy Paper Transparency Photo Paper Card Stock Labels Envelope Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Iron On
Paper Type Selects the paper type setting for the page.
GL/2 Commands
Note: GL/2 is not a stand-alone plotter emulation. It can only be entered from within PCL emulation and cannot be used with software without a unique printer driver written explicitly for GL/2. The following tables list the GL/2 commands by group. To determine which GL/2 commands your printer supports, see Table A-2: GL/2 Commands on page A-7. Table 2-31: Configuration Group
Command / Parameter CO "text" DF; IN (n); IP (XP1, YP1(, XP2, YP2)); Command Name Comment Default Values Initialize Input P1 and P2
2-75
PCL
Table 2-31: Configuration Group (Continued)

Command / Parameter IR (XP1, YP1, XP2, YP2)); IW (X1, Y1, X2, Y2); MC (mode(, opcode)); PP (mode); RO (angle); SC (Xmin, Xmax, Ymin, Ymax(, type(, left, bottom))); Command Name Input Relative P1 and P2 Input Window Logical Operation Pixel Placement Rotate Coordinate System Scale
Table 2-32: Vector Group

Command / Parameter AA Xcenter, Ycenter, sweep_angle(, chord_angle); AR Xcenter, Ycenter, sweep_angle(, chord_angle); AT Xinter, Yinter, Xend, Yend(, chord_angle); BR X1, Y1, X2, Y2, X3, Y3(,...); BZ X1, Y1, X2, Y2, X3, Y3(,...); CI radius(, chord_angle); PA (X, Y(,...)); PD (X, Y(,...)); PE (flag(value) | coordinates (...)); PR (X, Y(,...)); PU (X, Y(,...)); RT Xincr inter, Yincr inter, Xincr end, Yincr end(, chord_angle); WU (type); Command Name Arc Absolute Arc Relative Absolute Arc Three Point Bezier Relative Bezier Absolute Circle Plot Absolute Pen Down Polyline Encoded Plot Relative Pen Up Arc Relative Three Point Pen Width Units
Table 2-33: Polygon Group

Command / Parameter EA X, Y; EP; ER X, Y; EW radius, start_angle, sweep_angle(, chord_angle); FP (0); FP 1; PM (mode); RA X, Y; Command Name Edge Rectangle Absolute Edge Polygon Edge Rectangle Relative Edge Wedge Fill Polygon, Odd/Even Fill Polygon, Non-Zero Winding Polygon Mode Fill Rectangle Absolute
2-76
PCL
Table 2-33: Polygon Group (Continued)

Command / Parameter RR X, Y; WG radius, start_angle, sweep_angle(, chord_angle); Command Name Fill Rectangle Relative Fill Wedge
Table 2-34: Character Group

Command / Parameter AD (kind, value(,...)); CF (mode(, pen)); CP (spaces, lines); DI (run, rise); DR (run, rise); DT (label_terminator(, mode)); DV (path(, line)); ES (width(, height)); FI font_ID; FN font_ID; LB char...char label_terminator; LM (mode,[row number]) LO (position); LO 21; SA; SB (mode); SD (kind, value(,...)); SI (width, height); SL (tangent); SR (width, height); SS; TD (mode); Command Name Define Alternate Font Character Fill Character Plot Absolute Direction Relative Direction Define Label Terminator Define Variable Text Path Extra Space Primary Font Secondary Font Label Label Mode Label Origin Uses PCL Label Origin Select Alternate Font Scalable or Bitmapped Fonts Define Standard Font Absolute Character Size Character Slant Relative Character Size Select Standard Font Transparent Data
2-77
PCL
Table 2-35: Line and Fill Attributes Group

Command / Parameter AC (X, Y); CR (red black ref, red white ref, green black ref, green white ref, blue black ref, blue white ref); FT (fill_type(, option1(, option2)); FT22, (PCL User-Defined Pattern ID); FT 9, level; LA (kind, value(,...));. LT (pattern_number(, pattern_length(, mode))); NP (number); PC (pen (, red, green, blue)); PW (width(, pen)); RF (index(, width, height(, pen, ...))); SM (character); SP (pen); SV (screen_type(, option1(, option2))); SV (9, level,) TM (width, height(, number...)); TR (mode); UL (index(, gap,...gap)); WU (type); Command Name Anchor Corner Color Range Fill Type Fill Type Fill Type Line Attributes Line Type Number of Pens Pen Color Pen Width Define Raster Fill Symbol Mode Select Pen Screened Vectors Screened Vectors Threshold Matrix Transparency Mode User Defined Line Pen Width Units
2-78
PCL
Raster Image Graphics

These commands utilize the raster area. Before sending data, set the presentation mode, the resolution, the compression mode, the raster height and width, and start raster graphics. These parameters are in effect until you overwrite them with a different command or there is a printer reset. To ensure that the printed image appears in the expected area, set width and height parameters.
Raster Compression Mode

The Raster Compression Mode command determines how raster data is coded. It affects the amount of code required to create an image, and the efficiency of image printing. Syntax:
ESC
*b#M
Parameters: 0 1 2 3 5 9 999 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 Uncoded (default) Run-Length Encoded Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) Byte Delta Row Adaptive Compression Replacement Delta Row Zlib Group 4 Group 3 one dimensional Group 3 two dimensional K=2 Group 3 two dimensional K=4 TIFF word (16 bit) TIFF double-word (32 bit) Adaptive Compression (includes TIFF word and TIFF double-word)
2-79
PCL
Descriptions and examples of the different parameters appear on the following pages. Each example draws the same square outline 64 bits (8 bytes) wide by 64 scan lines long.
Uncoded Data
Uncoded Data is not compressed. Only those bytes needed to form the image are sent. Each bit represents a single dot. In the first byte, bit 7 corresponds to the first dot in the raster row, bit 5 to the third dot, and so forth. Example:
ESC
*p300x300Y
*t100R *r0F ESC*b0M ESC *r1A ESC *b8W 'FF ESC*b8W '80 ESC *b8W '80 ... ESC*b8W '80 ESC *b8W 'FF ESC *rB
ESC ESC
FF FF FF FF FF FF FF'x 00 00 00 00 00 00 01'x 00 00 00 00 00 00 01'x 00 00 00 00 00 00 01'x FF FF FF FF FF FF FF'x
|Move the cursor to 1" x 1" (1 in. from top margin and 1 in. from left edge of logical page) |Set resolution to 100 dots per inch |Rotate image to match current orientation |Set compression mode to Uncoded |Start raster graphics at current position |Raster data uncompressed
|Repeat to provide 64 total scan lines
|End graphics
2-80
PCL
Run-Length Encoded Data

Run-Length Encoded Data is interpreted in pairs of bytes. The first byte:
Acts as a counter, or control byte. Indicates how many times to repeat the data in the second byte. Can be from 0 (no repetition) to 255. The second byte is the data byte.
Example:
*p300x600Y *b1M ESC*r1A ESC *b2W '07FF'x ESC *b6W '0080 0500 0001'x ESC*b6W '0080 0500 0001'x ... ESC *b6W '0080 0500 0001'x ESC*b2W '07FF'x ESC *rB
ESC ESC
|Move cursor to 1" x 2" |Set compression to Run-Length |Start raster graphics at current position |Run-Length: 8x'FF'x |1x'80'x, 6x'00'x, 1x'01'x |1x'80'x, 6x'00'x, 1x'01'x |... |1x'80'x, 6x'00'x, 1x'01'x |8x'FF'x |End graphics
Tagged Image File Format

TIFF Packbits contain a control byte (a signed number) that indicates whether the raster data bytes are to be repeated (up to 127 times) or printed as encoded data.
For control values of 0 through 127, the next (Control+1) byte(s) is uncoded. For control values of -1 through -127 ('FF'x - '81'x), the next byte is repeated (Abs(Control)+1) times.
Example:
*p300x900Y *b2M ESC *r1A ESC *b2W 'F9FF'x ESC*b6W '0080 FB00 0001'x ESC *b9W '078000000000000001'x ... ESC*b6W '0080 FB00 0001'x ESC *b2W 'F9FF'x ESC *rB
ESC ESC
|Move cursor to 1" x 3" |Set compression to TIFF |Start Raster Graphics at current position | TIFF: 8x'FF'x |1:'80'x, 6x'00'x, 1: '01'x or |8: '8000000000000001'x |... |1:'80'x, 6x'00'x, 1: '01'x |8x'FF'x |End graphics
2-81
PCL
Delta Row
Delta Row is a compression mode that identifies and transmits only those bytes different from the ones in a preceding row. The control byte consists of two parts:
High 3 bits: Number of bytes to replace +1 (1 to 8). Low 5 bits: Offset from last unmodified byte (0-30); if the offset is 31, the next byte(s) is added to the offset until the next byte is not 255.
Example:
*p300x1200Y *b3M ESC *r1A
ESC ESC
*b9W 'E0FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'x *b9W 'E08000000000000001'x ESC*b0W ... ESC *b0W ESC*b9W 'E0FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'x ESC *rB
ESC ESC
|Move cursor to 1" x 4" |Set compression to Delta Row |Start raster graphics at current position |Num Offset |'111 00000'b=8 at 0: 'FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'x |8 at 0: '8000000000000001'x |No bytes change |No bytes change |8 at 0: '8FFFFFFFFFFFFFF'x |End graphics
2-82
PCL
Adaptive Compression
Adaptive compression allows the combined use of compression methods 0 through 3 (Uncoded, Run-Length Encoded, TIFF, and Delta Row). It also allows the printing of empty rows (all zeros) or duplicate rows.
The Transfer Raster Data command size includes all rows (scan lines). Scan Mode and SizeH,L are three-byte primary control strings: CountH and CountL.
Table 2-36: Adaptive Compression Control Strings

Scan Mode 0 1 2 3 4 5 254 255 CountH,CountL Data sizeH,L Data sizeH,L Data sizeH,L Data SizeH,L NumberH,L of empty rows NumberH,L of duplicate rows Data SizeH,L Data SizeH,L Data Uncoded raster scan data Size of Run-length encoded data (high,low) Size of Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) data (high,low) Size of Delta Row data (high,low) None None TIFF word TIFF double-word
Example:
*p300x1500Y *b5M ESC *b29W '03 0009'x 'E0FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'x '01 0006'x '0080 FB00 0001'x '05 0035'x '02 0002'x 'F9FF 'x ESC *rB
ESC ESC
|Move cursor to 1" x 5" |Set the compression to Adaptive Compression |Raster Data: 29 bytes follow | Delta Row: 8 at 0: 'FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFh'x | Run Length: 1:'80'x, 6x'00'x, 1:'01'x | Duplicate rows: 61 times | TIFF: 8x'FF'x |End graphics
2-83
PCL
Zlib
Zlib is a generic compression method. It refers to a standard for compression as well as the library that implements the standard. The zlib compression method uses the deflate algorithm. This same algorithm is used by more widely known compression utilities such as PKZIP and GZIP. Compressed data is a series of variably-sized blocks. An encoder determines how to break the data into blocks and finds the best compression method to use for each block. An encoder works based on the following principles. The encoder creates a dictionary containing different characters in a set of data. Short strings of bits represent more commonly occurring characters, and long strings of bits represent less frequently used characters. A probability tree determines which characters are frequently used. Repeated patterns in a string of characters are identified and stored, so the string doesnt have to be stored multiple times. A three-bit zlib header is added to the beginning of a block to describe the type of compression used and indicates whether the block is a final block. Other information in the header includes checksums, compression algorithm used, and the level of compression. In compression all checksums are set to zero and in decompression the checksums are ignored. The memory required for zlib compression and decompression is independent of the size of the data to be compressed or decompressed. The number 999 does not conflict with other compression types, so it is used to represent zlib compression. See page 2-78 for more information.
Group 3 and Group 4 Raster Compression

Since Group 4 images do not use line endings, the width of the image must be specified using the Raster Width command (ESC*r#S). The compressed image data is sent to the printer using the Transfer Raster Data command (ESC*b#W). The maximum number of bytes that can be sent using the Transfer Raster Data command is 32K bytes. Images larger than 32K bytes must be broken up and sent using multiple commands. It does not matter where the image is broken, or how many Transfer Raster Data commands are used. Once the image is started (with a Transfer Raster Data command), no other commands are allowed until the entire image has been sent.
2-84
PCL
The following example prints a Group 4 image file that is 256 bits wide and 9,645 bytes long:
*b1002M *r256S ESC *r1A ESC *b9645W ...[Group 4 image data]... ESC *rB
ESC ESC
|Set Raster Compression to Group 4 |Define width of image in input bits |Start Raster Graphics at current position |9,645 bytes of a Group 4 image |End Raster Graphics
All lines of data must be the same length. If they are not, zeroes (0) must be added to attain the same length. Note: If the uncompressed image extends beyond the logical page dimensions or beyond the raster width specified in the Raster Width command (ESC*r#S), the image is clipped at print time.
Additional Compression Modes

When the compression mode is 1008 (Lexmark Adaptive), TIFF word and doubleword can be printed using compression scan modes 254 and 255 respectively. This compression method sends a raster image as a block of raster data.
2-85
PCL
Macros
When creating a macro, first assign it an ID number. If this number is identical to an existing macro ID in RAM, the old macro is deleted when you specify the Macro Control Start Definition. Next, start the macro definition, send the contents of the macro, and stop the macro definition. Note: Although a macro may be called or executed from within another macro (nesting), a macro cannot be defined within another macro definition. Each macro must be defined separately. Example: This example creates a macro to print the Wigit Corp. logo, then calls the logo macro in the body of a letter.
&f1Y &f0X ESC &a+72H ESC (8U ESC(s1p18v0s3b4101T W ESC &a-21.6H ESC(s12v1S igit ESC &a+72H ESC(s18v0S C ESC (s12v1S orp. ESC&a+72H ESC &f1X ESC &f10X ... ... From: ESC&f1y3X ... Thank you for ... ESC&f1y3X ...
ESC ESC
|Set the macro ID to 1 |Start the macro definition |Relative move right 1/10 inch (+72/720th) |Select Roman-8 symbol set |Select CG Times 18 point bold |Print W |Relative move left 0.03 inch |Select (CG Times) 12 point (bold) italic |Print igit |Relative move right 1/10 inch |Select 18 point and turn off italic |Print C |Select 12 point italic |Print orp. |Relative move right 1/10 inch |End of macro definition |Make Macro ID 1 permanent
|Print the header From: |Set the macro ID to 1 and call the macro |Print the letter |Print the closing |Set the macro ID to 1 and call the macro
3-1
PJL
CHAPTER 3: Printer Job Language

Your printer supports complete Printer Job Language (PJL) commands, including certain commands that cause the printer to enter PCL emulation, PostScript emulation, and Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS). To determine which commands your printer supports, see Appendix B: PJL Support on page B-1.
PJL Command Notation

The syntax for each supported PJL command is listed in this chapter. The following character codes are used throughout the chapter to illustrate the syntax of each PJL command. Table 3-1: PJL Command Notation
Character Code <ESC> <LF> <CR> <FF> <HT> <UEL> Description Escape Character Line Feed Character Carriage Return Character Form Feed Character Horizontal Tab Universal Exit Language Hex Code 0x1B 0x0A 0x0D 0x0C 0x09 0x1B 25 2D 31 32 33 34 35 58 Decimal Code 27 10 13 12 9
3-2
PJL
Notes: Parameters enclosed in square brackets ([ ]) are optional and not required for command execution. The PJL interpreter requires uppercase for the @PJL prefix for all PJL commands except the Universal Exit Language (UEL) command. The rest of the PJL command is not case sensitive. The UEL command is case sensitive. All PJL commands except UEL must be terminated with a line feed character (<LF>).
Kernel Commands
UNIVERSAL EXIT LANGUAGE Command
The Universal Exit Language (UEL) command terminates the current printer language and allows dynamic switching into PJL. Syntax:
<ESC>%-12345X
Notes:
If the printer receives this command while in PCL emulation, it performs a Printer Language Reset (ESCE) before exiting PCL emulation. If the printer receives this command while in PostScript emulation, it performs an End-of-Job (EOJ) command before exiting PostScript emulation (Ctrl-D).
The PJL commands must immediately follow the UEL command (that is, the X in the UEL syntax must be immediately followed by the @PJL of the next PJL command).
3-3
PJL
ENTER LANGUAGE Command

This command causes the printer to enter the specified language, such as PCL emulation, PostScript emulation, or PPDS. Syntax:
@PJL ENTER LANGUAGE = language[<CR>]<LF>
Notes:

Example:
language is PCL, PCLXL, PostScript, or PPDS.
You can use uppercase, lowercase, or mixed case. (@PJL must be uppercase; all others can be mixed or lowercase.)
@PJL ENTER LANGUAGE = PostScript[<CR>]<LF>
enters PostScript emulation.
COMMENT Command
This command lets you add descriptive comments to your PJL job. Syntax:
@PJL COMMENT words[<CR>]<LF>
Notes:
When the printer receives this command, it is ignored. The words parameter can be any combination of printable characters, spaces, and horizontal tabs. The COMMENT command is terminated by the line feed character (<LF>).
3-4
PJL
Job Separation Commands

Your printer supports the PJL JOB and EOJ commands. When the printer receives a JOB command, the print timeout is multiplied by 10; when the printer receives a PJL EOJ command, the print timeout is reset to the user default. The Waiting message appears on the printer operator panel display or through MarkVision Professional until an EOJ command is received or until the print timeout expires. Your printer also supports the PASSWORD parameter for the PJL JOB command.
JOB Command
The host computer can use the JOB command to separate print data into various parts or jobs. Specifically, the JOB command signifies to the printer the start of a print job. Use the EOJ command to signify the end of a job. In addition, use the JOB/EOJ pair to accomplish the following:

Syntax:
Provide a job name (the name displays on the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional). Indicate which pages of the job should be printed. Monitor the job status as it prints.
@PJL JOB [NAME = "job name"] [START = first page] [END = last page] [PASSWORD = number][<CR>]<LF>
Notes:
The JOB command should only be used in conjunction with the EOJ command. After receiving a JOB command, the printer does not process a UEL command as a PJL job boundary until it receives the corresponding EOJ. Instead, UELs occurring within a JOB/EOJ pair are processed as printer language resets (for example, PCL ESCE).
3-5
PJL
Parameters:
NAME = "job name"
Use the NAME parameter to assign a character string name to a particular job. The name may be any combination of printable characters, spaces or horizontal tabs up to a maximum of 80 characters, spaces, or tabs. The job name must be enclosed in double quotes, as indicated by the command syntax.
START = first page
Use the START parameter in conjunction with the END parameter to skip the printing of a particular portion of the job. The emulator discards pages of a job until the page specified by this parameter is reached. The first page range is from 1 to 2,147,483,647. Omission of the START parameter causes the printer to start printing with page 1 of the job.
END = last page
Use the END parameter in conjunction with the START parameter to skip the printing of a particular portion of the job. The emulator discards all pages of a job after the last page has been printed. The specification of last page is relative to page 1 of the print job and its range is from 1 to 2,147,483,647. Omission of the END parameter causes the printer to print all pages to the end of the job.
PASSWORD = number
A system administrator can control which jobs, and therefore which users, are allowed to modify the printer default or NVRAM variables by declaring a PJL password. With a PJL password declared, the PASSWORD parameter with the correct PASSWORD number must be specified in order to modify the default printer environment. A PJL JOB command with the correct PASSWORD must be issued before any PJL command can modify an NVRAM setting. The PJL EOJ command terminates the job and disables any further modification of NVRAM. If a PJL password is declared and the wrong PASSWORD number is specified on the PJL JOB command, the printer will delay one half of a second before processing the next command.
3-6
PJL
For detailed information on PJL password protection, see File and Device Protection Commands on page 3-93. Note: Setting a default PJL password disables the use of PJL DEFAULT and INITIALIZE commands. (See DEFAULT Command on page 3-8 and INITIALIZE Command on page 3-11.)
EOJ Command
The EOJ command signifies the end of a print job. Syntax:
@PJL EOJ [NAME = "job name"][<CR>]<LF>
Note: Only use the EOJ command in conjunction with the JOB command. Parameter:
NAME = "job name"
Use the NAME parameter to assign a character string name to a particular job. The name may be any combination of printable characters, spaces, or horizontal tabs up to a maximum of 80 characters, spaces, or tabs. The NAME string may be different from the NAME string specified in the JOB command. The job name must be enclosed in double quotes.
3-7
PJL
Environment Commands and Variables

This section describes the printer environment variables and the PJL commands used to modify or query the variables. Note: The word common applies to those variables common to both your printer and the Hewlett-Packard Companys LaserJet printers. Table 3-2: Environment Variable Categories
Categories Common Variables for Both Printer Languages Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Common Variables for PCL emulation Printer Unique Variables for PCL emulation Common Variables for PostScript emulation Printer Unique Variables for PostScript emulation Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables Beginning on Page ... 3-12 3-19 3-48 3-49 3-51 3-52 3-53
The following commands modify the environment variables, and are described in this section:
DEFAULT SET INITIALIZE RESET
The following commands query the environment variables, and are described in Status Readback Commands on page 3-54.
INQUIRE DINQUIRE INFO ECHO
3-8
PJL
DEFAULT Command
This command modifies the default setting for the specified environment variable and stores the setting in the printer NVRAM. The new setting is activated with the occurrence of the next PJL reset condition. Syntax:
@PJL DEFAULT [command modifier:value] variable=value[<CR>]<LF> [command modifier:value]
The [command modifier:value] parameter specifies the type of PJL variables to be modified. The variables supported are listed in the tables beginning on page 3-12.
A [command modifier:value] parameter is not required for variables listed in the tables Common Variables for Both Printer Languages on page 3-12, and Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages on page 3-19.
LPARM:PCL is used with variables specific to PCL emulation. (See the tables Common Variables for PCL Emulation on page 3-48, and Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation on page 3-49.) LPARM:POSTSCRIPT is used for variables specific to PostScript emulation. (See
the tables Common Variables for PostScript Emulation on page 3-51, and Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation on page 3-52.)
LRESOURCE:"device:filename.filetype" is required for LRESOURCE variables. (See the table Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables on page 3-53.)
Values for "device:filename.filetype" are:

device filename flash, flash1, disk, or disk1 (case insensitive)
A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID for a PCL font, and so on. The filename is case sensitive. An identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5macro for PCL macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets. See Table 3-22: Variables for Flash and Disk File and Password Commands on page 3-87 for a complete list of the supported file types. The filetype is case sensitive.
filetype
3-9
PJL
variable=value
The supported variables and values are listed in the tables beginning on page 3-12. Note: Variables may be modified by the DEFAULT command, except those marked Read Only. Some variables may only be modified using the PJL SET command. These variables cannot be modified using the DEFAULT command. They are marked Set Only.
SET Command
This command modifies the current setting for the specified environment variable. The new setting is active immediately, and remains active until the next occurrence of a PJL reset condition. Use the SET command to modify any currently defined environment variable that cannot be set using the desired printer language. For example, use the PJL SET command to set Print Quality Enhancement Technology (PQET) or Page Protect, which cannot be set within a printer language such as PCL emulation. Syntax:
@PJL SET [command modifier:value] variable=value[<CR>]<LF>
where
[command modifier:value]
The [command modifier:value] parameter specifies the type of PJL variables to be modified. The variables supported are listed in the tables beginning on page 3-12.
A [command modifier:value] is not required for variables listed in the tables Common Variables for Both Printer Languages on page 3-12, and Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages on page 3-19.
LPARM:PCL is used with variables specific to PCL emulation. (See the tables
Common Variables for PCL Emulation on page 3-48, and Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation on page 3-49.)
LPARM:POSTSCRIPT is used for variables specific for PostScript emulation.
(See the tables Common Variables for PostScript Emulation on page 3-51, and Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation on page 3-52.)
3-10
PJL
LRESOURCE:"device:filename.filetype" is required for LRESOURCE
variables. (See Table 3-9: Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables on page 3-53.) Values for "device:filename.filetype" are:
A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID for a PCL font, and so on. The filename is case sensitive. An identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5macro for PCL macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets. See the table beginning on page 3-87 for a complete list of the supported file types. The filetype is case sensitive.
filetype
variable=value
The supported variables and values are listed in the tables beginning on page 3-12. Note: Variables may be modified by the DEFAULT command, except those marked Read Only. Some variables may only be modified using the PJL SET command. These variables cannot be modified using the DEFAULT command. They are marked Set Only.
3-11
PJL
INITIALIZE Command
This command restores both the current and default environment variables to their factory default values and updates the printer NVRAM. This command affects all of the variables listed in Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages on page 3-12 through Table 3-8: Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation on page 3-52, except the following:
All read only variables PASSWORD LANG LRESOURCESAVE LDOWNLOADTARGET LPPDS LHONORINIT LUSDEFAULTS PARALLEL RESOURCESAVE
Note: This command does not affect LRESOURCE variables listed in Table 3-9: Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables on page 3-53. Syntax:
@PJL INITIALIZE[<CR>]<LF>
RESET Command
This command resets the current environment variables to the settings stored in the printer NVRAM. Therefore, any variables modified by the PJL SET command are returned to their default value after execution of the PJL RESET command. Syntax:
@PJL RESET[<CR>]<LF>
3-12
PJL
Common Variables for Both Printer Languages

Note: The word common applies to those variables common to both your printer and the Hewlett-Packard Companys LaserJet printers. The following common variables are supported for both PCL emulation and PostScript emulation, unless otherwise noted. Therefore, the [command modifier:value] parameter should not be specified. To determine which variables your printer supports, see Table B-1: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages on page B-1. Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages
Variable AUTOCONT (DEFAULT only) Function Auto Continue Selections 0, 5 to 255, OFF, ON A value of 0 or OFF indicates Auto Continue is disabled. A value of ON indicates Auto Continue is set to 30. INQUIRE or DINQUIRE on the Auto Continue variable returns a numeric value. Note: If a value greater than 255 is specified by a SET or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to 255. BINDING BITSPERPIXEL Duplex Bind Image Enhancement Technology and Image Enhancement Technology Type LONGEDGE, SHORTEDGE 1, 2, 4, Auto A value of 1 indicates the Image Enhancement Technology setting is set to Off. A value of 2 or 4 indicates the Image Enhancement Technology setting is set to On. INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of Image Enhancement Technology as follows: If Image Enhancement Technology is set to Off, 1 is returned. If Image Enhancement Technology is set to On, 2 or 4 is returned depending on the Image Enhancement Technology Type setting. If Image Enhancement Technology Type is set to On, the numerical value of BITSPERPIXEL is returned. If Image Enhancement Technology Type is set to Auto, a value of 2 or 4 is returned depending on the amount of total memory installed. CLEARABLEWARNINGS (READ only) Auto Continue JOB, ON from operator If Auto Continue is set to On, JOB is returned. panel non-fatal warning messages If Auto Continue is set to Off, ON is returned. Number of copies of each page 1 to 999 Note: If a value greater than 999 is specified by a SET or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to 999. ON LONGEDGE 1 Factory Default 0
COPIES
3-13
PJL
Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)

Variable CPLOCK (DEFAULT only) Function Disables menus Selections ON, OFF ON disables the printer operator panel menus. OFF enables menus. DENSITY Print Darkness 1 to 5 1 = Lightest 2 = Lighter 3 = Normal 4 = Darker 5 = Darkest 2, 3, 4 (Model specific) Factory Default OFF
To determine the default value of your printer, see Table B-1: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages on page B-1. DUPLEX ECONOMODE FORMATTERNUMBER (READ only) Duplex Toner Saver Unique printer identifier ON, OFF ON, OFF The value of the NVRAM serial number field is returned. The NVRAM serial number field is set to the printer serial number. In order to guarantee that a unique identifier exists in this field, the printer writes a random alphanumeric string into this field whenever the critical byte area in NVRAM is re-initialized. FORMLINES Lines per page 1 to 255 Note: If a value greater than 255 is specified by a SET or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to 255. HOLD (SET only) Print and Hold ON, OFF, STORE, PROOF The HOLD variable interacts with the HOLDKEY and HOLDTYPE variables. For more information, see HOLDTYPE on page 3-14. Print and Hold PIN PIN PIN is a text string consisting of exactly four numerals. Only the numerals 1 through 6 are valid. Note: A null ( ) string is an acceptable value and indicates no PIN is specified. The HOLDKEY variable interacts with the HOLD and HOLDTYPE variables. For more information, see HOLDTYPE as follows. NULL (no PIN) 60, 64 (Country specific) OFF OFF Set by printer manufacturer
OFF
HOLDKEY (SET only)
3-14
PJL

Variable HOLDTYPE (SET only) Function Print and Hold Type Selections PUBLIC, PRIVATE The HOLD, HOLDKEY, and HOLDTYPE variables interact with each other as follows: When HOLD is set to On, HOLDKEY is set to a valid PIN, and HOLDTYPE is set to Private, Confidential Print capability is available. When HOLD is set to On, HOLDKEY is set to , and HOLDTYPE is set to Public, Repeat Print capability is available. When HOLD is set to Store, HOLDKEY is set to , and HOLDTYPE is set to Public, Reserve Print capability is available. When HOLD is set to Proof, HOLDKEY is set to , and HOLDTYPE is set to Public, Verify Print capability is available. Print and Hold capabilities are not available with any other possible combination of HOLD, HOLDKEY, and HOLDTYPE settings. IMAGEADAPT (DEFAULT only) INTRAY2 INTRAY3 INTRAY4 INTRAY5 INTRAY1SIZE (SET only) Resolution reduction Tray lock - Tray 2 Tray lock - Tray 3 Tray lock - Tray 4 Tray lock - Tray 5 Tray 1 installed size, default formatting size ON, OFF ON Factory Default PUBLIC
UNLOCKED, LOCKED UNLOCKED, LOCKED UNLOCKED, LOCKED UNLOCKED, LOCKED A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER, JISB4, JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER, LEGAL, LETTER, 11X17, COM10, COM9, MONARCH, DL, C5, B5, OTHERENVELOPE, STATEMENT A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER, JISB4, JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER, LEGAL, LETTER, 11X17, STATEMENT A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER, JISB4, JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER, LEGAL, LETTER, 11X17, STATEMENT A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER, JISB4, JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER, LEGAL, LETTER, 11X17, STATEMENT A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER, JISB4, JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER, LEGAL, LETTER, 11X17, STATEMENT jobname jobname is a text string truncated to 24 characters. Note: A null ( ) string is an acceptable value and indicates no Print and Hold Jobname is specified.
UNLOCKED UNLOCKED UNLOCKED UNLOCKED LETTER, A4 (Country specific)
INTRAY2SIZE (SET only) INTRAY3SIZE (SET only) INTRAY4SIZE (SET only) INTRAY5SIZE (SET only) JOBNAME (SET only)
Tray 2 installed size, default formatting size Tray 3 installed size, default formatting size Tray 4 installed size, default formatting size Tray 5 installed size, default formatting size Print and Hold Jobname
LETTER, A4 (Country specific) LETTER, A4 (Country specific) LETTER, A4 (Country specific) LETTER, A4 (Country specific) NULL (No jobname)
3-15
PJL

Variable JOBOFFSET Function Offset Pages Selections ON, OFF, BETWEENJOBS, BETWEENCOPIES INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of Offset Pages as follows: If Offset Pages is set to Off, OFF is returned. If Offset Pages is set to Between Jobs or Between Copies, ON is returned. Offset refers to stacking entire print jobs or copies of the same print job in two separate groups in an output bin. LANG (DEFAULT only) Default display language DANISH, GERMAN, ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, ITALIAN, DUTCH, NORWEGIAN, SWEDISH, PORTUGUESE, FINNISH, JAPANESE, RUSSIAN, POLISH, HUNGARIAN, TURKISH, CZECH ON, OFF, CONTINUE, STOP A value of ON or CONTINUE indicates the Toner Alarm setting is set Off. The value of OFF or STOP indicates the Toner Alarm setting is Single. INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of the Toner Alarm as follows: If Toner Alarm is set to Off, CONTINUE is returned. If Toner Alarm is set to Single, STOP is returned. If Toner Alarm is set to Continuous, STOP is returned. MANUALFEED (READ only) MEDIATYPE Manual feed selection Default paper source, default formatting size OFF Printer always returns OFF. PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO, GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND, TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS, LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED, ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5, CUSTOMTYPE6, name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of custom print material types. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. MPTRAY (DEFAULT only) ORIENTATION Multipurpose feeder configuration Print orientation CASSETTE, MANUAL, FIRST Sets the configuration of the Multipurpose Feeder. PORTRAIT, LANDSCAPE This variable does not affect PostScript emulation. PORTRAIT CASSETTE PLAIN OFF Country specific Factory Default OFF
LOWTONER (DEFAULT only)
Toner Alarm
ON, CONTINUE (Model specific)
3-16
PJL

Variable OUTBIN Function Output Bin Selections UPPER, LOWER, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Output Bin setting returns: Output Bin setting Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 name PAGEPROTECT Page Protect AUTO, ON A value of ON indicates the Page Protect setting is set On. The value of AUTO indicates the Page Protect setting is set Off. INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of the Page Protect as follows: If Page Protect is set Off, AUTO is returned. If Page Protect is set On, ON is returned. PAPER Default paper source, default formatting size Paper: A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER, JISB4, JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER, LEGAL, LETTER, STATEMENT, 11X17 Envelopes: COM10, COM9, MONARCH, DL, C5, B5, OTHERENVELOPE LETTER, A4 (Country specific) DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name AUTO Factory Default UPPER
3-17
PJL

Variable PARALLEL (DEFAULT only) (Port Specific) Function Parallel Protocol Selections SLOW, FAST A value of SLOW indicates the Parallel Protocol setting is Standard. The value of FAST indicates the Parallel Protocol setting is FASTBYTES. INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of the Parallel Protocol as follows: If Parallel Protocol is set as Standard, SLOW is returned. If Parallel Protocol is set as Fastbytes, FAST is returned. PASSWORD (DEFAULT only) Default password for PJL NVRAM security 0 to 65535 Locks the printer operator panel to keep the user defaults from changing. See your printer documentation for more information. The Default PJL password is 0. If the PJL password is not equal to 0, a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the PASSWORD variable returns ENABLED. If the PJL password is equal to 0, a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the PASSWORD variable returns DISABLED. See the PASSWORD parameter of the JOB command on page 3-5 for more information. PERSONALITY (Port specific) SmartSwitch settings PCL, POSTSCRIPT, AUTO PERSONALITY controls the SmartSwitch settings for the interface link on which the PJL command is received. If AUTO is sent, both PS SmartSwitch and PCL Smartswitch menu settings are set to ON. If PCL is sent, PS SmartSwitch is set to OFF and PCL SmartSwitch is set to ON. If POSTSCRIPT is sent, PCL SmartSwitch is set to OFF and PS SmartSwitch is set to ON. When queried, AUTO is returned if both SmartSwitch settings are ON. If one SmartSwitch setting is OFF, the printer language whose SmartSwitch setting is ON is returned. If both SmartSwitch settings are OFF, the default printer language is returned. POWERSAVE (DEFAULT only) Power Save feature ON, OFF ON enables the power-saving feature. OFF disables the power-saving feature. Note: Some printer models released in the year 2000 or later designated as Energy Star printers cannot have Power Saver disabled. ON AUTO 0 Factory Default FAST
3-18
PJL

Variable POWERSAVETIME (DEFAULT only) Function Power Save time, in minutes Selections 0 to 120 (Model specific) 0 to 240 (Model specific) (0 indicates the Power Saver Time feature is disabled.) The time the printer remains idle before it enters Power Save mode when POWERSAVE is On. Note: If a value greater than 120 or 240 is specified by a SET or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to 120 or 240 based on the printer model. QTY (SET only) Collation Collated Copies (QTY) 0 to 999 Used to request the number of collated copies of a print job. If Collation - Collated Copies (QTY) is not equal to 0, a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE returns the numerical setting for QTY. If Collation - Collated Copies (QTY) is set to Off, a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE returns 0. Note: If a value greater than 999 is specified by a SET or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to 999. REPRINT RESOLUTION RESOURCESAVE (DEFAULT only) Jam Recovery Print Resolution Resource Save ON, OFF, AUTO 300, 600, 1200 ON, OFF, AUTO ON indicates Resource Save is set On. OFF and AUTO indicate Resource Save is set to Off. See Table B-1: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages on page B-1 for the default value of your printer. RET Print Quality Enhancement Technology (PQET) OFF, DARK, MEDIUM, LIGHT, ON If this value is set through PJL, the same value is returned on a PJL inquiry. DARK, MEDIUM, LIGHT, and ON values indicate that PQET is On. OFF indicates PQET is Off. TIMEOUT Print timeout, in seconds 0 to 255 The time the printer remains idle before the job is forced to print. Note: If a value greater than 255 is specified by a SET or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to 255. 90 ON AUTO 600 OFF, AUTO (Model specific) 0 Factory Default 20
3-19
PJL

Variable USERNAME (SET only) Function Print and Hold Username Selections username username is a text string truncated to 24 characters. Note: A null ( ) string is an acceptable value and indicates no Print and Hold Username is specified. WIDEA4 A4 width NO, YES NO indicates the A4 width is 198 mm. YES indicates the A4 width is 203 mm. NO Factory Default NULL (No username)
Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages

The following variables are unique to some Lexmark printers and are supported for both PCL emulation and PostScript emulation. Therefore, the [command modifier:value] parameter should not be specified. To determine which variables your printer supports, see Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages on page B-4. Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages
Variable LACTIVEBINRESET (DEFAULT only) LADVANCEDSTATUS (DEFAULT only) (Port specific) LALARMCONTROL (DEFAULT only) LAUTOCRLF LAUTOLFCR LBLANKPAGES Auto CR after LF Auto LF after CR Blank Pages ON, OFF ON, OFF DONOTPRINT, PRINT Note: Some printers have a fixed value of DONOTPRINT. LBONDLENGTH (DEFAULT only) LBONDLOADING (DEFAULT only) Bond Paper Loading OFF, DUPLEX OFF Bond Length NORMAL, SHORT NORMAL OFF OFF DONOTPRINT Alarm Control Function Active Bin Reset Advanced Status Selections MANUAL, AUTOMATIC Factory Default MANUAL
ON, OFF ON enables parallel bidirectional support. OFF disables parallel bidirectional support. OFF, SINGLE, CONTINUOUS
ON
SINGLE
3-20
PJL
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable LBONDOUTBIN (DEFAULT only) Function Selections Factory Default UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific)
Assign UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, Type/Bin - Bond OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on bond paper. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Bond setting returns: Assign Type/Bin Bond setting Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 name DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name
LBONDTEXTURE (DEFAULT only) LBONDWEIGHT (DEFAULT only) LBWLOCK LCANCEL LCARDSTOCKLENGTH (DEFAULT only) LCARDSTOCKLOADING (DEFAULT only)
Bond Texture
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
ROUGH
Bond Weight
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
NORMAL
Black & White Lock Cancel Control Card Stock Length Card Stock Paper Loading
ON, OFF ON, OFF NORMAL, SHORT
OFF ON NORMAL
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
3-21
PJL
Variable LCARDSTOCKOUTBIN (DEFAULT only) Function Assign Type/Bin Card Stock Selections UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on card stock. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Card Stock setting returns: Assign Type/Bin Card Stock setting Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 name LCARDSTOCKTEXTURE (DEFAULT only) LCARDSTOCKWEIGHT (DEFAULT only) LCOLLATION Card Stock Texture Card Stock Weight Collation Mode DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name NORMAL Factory Default UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific)
NORMAL
ON, OFF If Collation is ON, the pages of the print job are collated. For example, if the job contains three pages and two copies are requested, collated output prints pages 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3. If collation is set to OFF, uncollated output prints pages 1, 1, 2, 2, 3, 3.
OFF
LCOLORCORRECTION
Indicates which color target the printer emulates
NONE, DISPLAY, SWOP, OFF, AUTO, VIVID, DUOTONE, MANUAL See Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages on page B-4 for the default value of your printer. NORMAL, SHORT
AUTO, VIVID (Model specific)
LCOLOREDLENGTH (DEFAULT only)
Colored Paper Length
NORMAL
3-22
PJL
Variable LCOLOREDLOADING (DEFAULT only) LCOLOREDOUTBIN (DEFAULT only) Function Colored Paper Loading Assign Type/Bin Colored Paper Selections OFF, DUPLEX Factory Default OFF
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on colored paper. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Colored Paper setting returns: Assign Type/Bin Colored Paper setting Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 name DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value
UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific)
UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name NORMAL
LCOLOREDTEXTURE (DEFAULT only) LCOLOREDWEIGHT (DEFAULT only) LCOLORMODEL LCUSTOMPAPERUNITS
Colored Paper Texture Colored Paper Weight Color Model Universal Units of Measure Universal Width
NORMAL
CMYK, RGB, BLACK INCHES, MILLIMETERS
RGB, CMYK (Model specific) INCHES, MILLIMETERS (Country specific) 216, 305 mm 8.5, 12 in. (Model and country specific)
LCUSTOMPAPERWIDTH
76 to 915 in increments of 1 mm 3 to 36.01 in increments of 0.01 in. Note: Values are determined to be inches or millimeters based on the LCUSTOMPAPERUNITS setting.
3-23
PJL
Variable LCUSTOMPAPERHEIGHT Function Universal Height Selections 76 to 915 in increments of 1 mm 3 to 36.01 in increments of 0.01 in. Note: Values are determined to be inches or millimeters based on the LCUSTOMPAPERUNITS setting. LCUSTOMPAPERFEED LCUSTOMTYPE1LENGTH (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE1LOADING (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE1MEDIA (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE1NAME (DEFAULT only) Universal Feed Direction Custom Type 1 Length Custom Type 1 Paper Loading Custom Type 1 Media Custom Type 1 Name SHORTEDGE, LONGEDGE NORMAL, SHORT Factory Default 356, 360, 457 mm 14, 14.17, 18 in. (Model and country specific)
SHORTEDGE NORMAL
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
PAPER, COATED, GLOSSY, TRANSPARENCY, LABELS, CARDSTOCK, ENVELOPE, COTTONPAPER "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of print material types. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name.
PAPER
CUSTOMTYPE1
3-24
PJL
Variable LCUSTOMTYPE1OUTBIN (DEFAULT only) Function Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 1 Selections UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on custom type 1 paper. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 1 setting returns: Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 1 setting Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 name LCUSTOMTYPE1TEXTURE (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE1WEIGHT (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE2LENGTH (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE2LOADING (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE2MEDIA (DEFAULT only) Custom Type 1 Texture Custom Type 1 Weight Custom Type 2 Length Custom Type 2 Paper Loading Custom Type 2 Media DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value Factory Default UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific)
NORMAL
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
PAPER, COATED, GLOSSY, TRANSPARENCY, LABELS, CARDSTOCK, ENVELOPE, COTTONPAPER
PAPER
3-25
PJL
Variable LCUSTOMTYPE2NAME (DEFAULT only) Function Custom Type 2 Name Selections "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of print material types. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LCUSTOMTYPE2OUTBIN (DEFAULT only) Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 2 UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on custom type 2 paper. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 2 setting returns: Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 2 setting Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 name LCUSTOMTYPE2TEXTURE (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE2WEIGHT (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE3LENGTH (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE3LOADING (DEFAULT only) Custom Type 2 Texture Custom Type 2 Weight Custom Type 3 Length Custom Type 3 Paper Loading DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific) Factory Default CUSTOMTYPE2
NORMAL
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
3-26
PJL
Variable LCUSTOMTYPE3MEDIA (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE3NAME (DEFAULT only) Function Custom Type 3 Media Custom Type 3 Name Selections PAPER, COATED, GLOSSY, TRANSPARENCY, LABELS, CARDSTOCK, ENVELOPE, COTTONPAPER "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of print material types. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LCUSTOMTYPE3OUTBIN (DEFAULT only) Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 3 UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on custom type 3 paper. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 3 setting returns: Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 3 setting Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 name LCUSTOMTYPE3TEXTURE (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE3WEIGHT (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE4LENGTH (DEFAULT only) Custom Type 3 Texture Custom Type 3 Weight Custom Type 4 Length DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific) Factory Default PAPER
CUSTOMTYPE3
NORMAL
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
3-27
PJL
Variable LCUSTOMTYPE4LOADING (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE4MEDIA (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE4NAME (DEFAULT only) Function Custom Type 4 Paper Loading Custom Type 4 Media Custom Type 4 Name Selections OFF, DUPLEX Factory Default OFF
PAPER
CUSTOMTYPE4
LCUSTOMTYPE4OUTBIN (DEFAULT only)
Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 4
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on custom type 4 paper. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 4 setting returns: Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 4 setting Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 name DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value
LCUSTOMTYPE4TEXTURE (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE4WEIGHT (DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 4 Texture Custom Type 4 Weight
NORMAL
3-28
PJL
Variable LCUSTOMTYPE5LENGTH (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE5LOADING (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE5MEDIA (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE5NAME (DEFAULT only) Function Custom Type 5 Length Custom Type 5 Paper Loading Custom Type 5 Media Custom Type 5 Name Selections NORMAL, SHORT Factory Default NORMAL
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
PAPER
CUSTOMTYPE5
LCUSTOMTYPE5TEXTURE (DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 5 Texture
3-29
PJL
Variable LCUSTOMTYPE5WEIGHT (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE6LENGTH (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE6LOADING (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE6MEDIA (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE6NAME (DEFAULT only) Function Custom Type 5 Weight Custom Type 6 Length Custom Type 6 Paper Loading Custom Type 6 Media Custom Type 6 Name Selections LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY Factory Default NORMAL
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
PAPER
CUSTOMTYPE6
UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name
3-30
PJL
Variable LCUSTOMTYPE6TEXTURE (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE6WEIGHT (DEFAULT only) LDOWNLOADTARGET (SET only) Function Custom Type 6 Texture Custom Type 6 Weight Download Target Selections SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH Factory Default NORMAL
NORMAL
RAM, FLASH, FLASH1, DISK, DISK1 If the device specified as the download target is write or read/write password protected, the download target will not be changed. 0, 3 ... 30, OFF, AUTO DELETE, SAVE
RAM
LDRYTIMEDELAY LDUPLICATEHELDJOBS
Dry Time Delay Delete or Save Print and Hold Jobs Envelope Enhance Envelope Length Assign Type/Bin Envelope
OFF DELETE
LENVELOPEENHANCE (DEFAULT only) LENVELOPELENGTH (DEFAULT only) LENVELOPEOUTBIN (DEFAULT only)
ON, OFF
ON
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on envelopes. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Envelope setting returns: Assign Type/Bin Envelope setting Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 name DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name
3-31
PJL
Variable LENVELOPETEXTURE (DEFAULT only) LENVELOPEWEIGHT (DEFAULT only) LESCCHAR (READ only) (Port specific) LFAXRESOLUTION (SET only) Fax Resolution STANDARD, FINE, SUPERFINE, ULTRAFINE Note: Status Readback commands return a ? when no SET command has modified the LFAXRESOLUTION variable. For more information, see Status Readback Commands on page 3-54. Fax Redial 0 to 14 Note: Status Readback commands return a ? when no SET command has modified the LFAXREDIAL variable. For more information, see Status Readback Commands on page 3-54. Fax Redial Frequency 1 to 200 Note: Status Readback commands return a ? when no SET command has modified the LFAXREDIALFREQUENCY variable. For more information, see Status Readback Commands on page 3-54. PRINT, DONOTPRINT, PRINTERROR Note: Status Readback commands return a ? when no SET command has modified the LFAXTRANSMISSIONLOG variable. For more information, see Status Readback Commands on page 3-54. ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5, CUSTOMTYPE6, name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of print material types. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. LGLOSSYLOADING Glossy Paper Loading OFF, DUPLEX OFF ENVELOPE PRINTERROR 3 5 STANDARD Function Envelope Texture Envelope Weight
ESC Character Substitution
Selections SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
Factory Default NORMAL
NORMAL
0 to 255
27
LFAXREDIAL (SET only)
LFAXREDIALFREQUENCY (SET only)
LFAXTRANSMISSIONLOG (SET only)
Fax Transmission Log
LFEEDERPAPERTYPE
Envelope Feeder Paper Type
3-32
PJL
Variable LGLOSSYOUTPUTBIN Function Assign Type/Bin - Glossy Selections UPPER, LOWER, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on Glossy paper. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Glossy setting returns: Assign Type/Bin Glossy setting Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 name LGLOSSYTEXTURE LGLOSSYWEIGHT LHOLEPUNCHALARM LHOLEPUNCHMODE Glossy Paper Texture Glossy Paper Weight Hole Punch Alarm Hole Punch Mode Honor INIT Signal DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name NORMAL NORMAL OFF 3HOLE (US) 4HOLE (non-US) HONORSIGNAL, DONOTHONORSIGNAL DONOTHONOR SIGNAL Factory Default UPPER
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY OFF, SINGLE, CONTINUOUS 2HOLE, 3HOLE, 4HOLE
LHONORINIT (DEFAULT only) (Port specific) LIMAGEBRIGHTNESS LIMAGECONTRAST LIMAGEENHANCE
Image Brightness Image Contrast Image Enhancement Technology
-100 to 100 -100 to 100 ON, OFF
0 0 OFF
3-33
PJL
Variable LIMAGEENHANCETYPE Function Image Enhancement Technology Type Page Image Orientation Selections 2, 4, AUTO Factory Default 2, 4 (Model specific)
LIMAGEORIENTATION
DONOTROTATE, ROTATEPAPER, ROTATEENVELOPES, ROTATESTAPLED, ROTATESTAPLEDANDENVELOPES, ROTATEALL
DONOTROTATE Note: The factory default is ROTATEPAPER if an optional finisher is installed. OFF
LIMAGESMOOTHING
Image Smoothing for PostScript Envelope feeder installed size, default formatting size Ink Alert
ON, OFF
LINFEEDERSIZE
COM10, COM9, MONARCH, DL, C5, B5, OTHERENVELOPE
COM10, DL (Country specific)
LINKALERT
ON, OFF Displays a printer attendance message when an ink cartridge is low.
OFF
LINMPFEEDERSIZE
Multipurpose feeder installed size, default formatting size
Paper: A3, A3+, A4, A5, JISB4, B5PAPER, JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER, LEGAL, LETTER, STATEMENT, 11X17 Envelopes: COM10, COM9, MONARCH, DL, C5, B5, OTHERENVELOPE ON, OFF, AUTO NORMAL, SHORT
LETTER, A4 (Country specific)
LJAMRECOVERY LLABELSLENGTH (DEFAULT only) LLABELSLOADING (DEFAULT only)
Jam Recovery Labels Length
AUTO NORMAL
Labels Paper Loading
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
3-34
PJL
Variable LLABELSOUTBIN (DEFAULT only) Function Assign Type/Bin Labels Selections UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on labels. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Labels setting returns: Assign Type/Bin Labels setting Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 name LLABELSTEXTURE (DEFAULT only) LLABELSWEIGHT (DEFAULT only) LLASTTRAYRENUMBER LLEFTMARGINOFFSET LLETTERHEADLENGTH (DEFAULT only) LLETTERHEADLOADING (DEFAULT only) Last Tray Renumber Left Margin Offset Letterhead Length Letterhead Paper Loading OFF, TRAY1, TRAY2, TRAY3, TRAY4, TRAY5, MPFEEDER -128 to 127 NORMAL, SHORT OFF 0 NORMAL Labels Weight LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY NORMAL Labels Texture DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name NORMAL Factory Default UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific)
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
3-35
PJL
Variable LLETTERHEADOUTBIN (DEFAULT only) Function Assign Type/Bin Letterhead Selections UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on letterhead paper. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Letterhead setting returns: Assign Type/Bin Letterhead setting Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 name LLETTERHEADTEXTURE (DEFAULT only) LLETTERHEADWEIGHT (DEFAULT only) LMANUALCOLORRGBTEXT LMANUALCOLORRGBGRAPHICS LMANUALCOLORRGBIMAGE LMANUALCOLORCMYKTEXT Letterhead Texture Letterhead Weight Manual Color RGB Text Manual Color RGB Graphics Manual Color RGB Image Manual Color CMYK Text DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name NORMAL Factory Default UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific)
NORMAL
OFF, VIVID, SRGBVIVID, SRGBDISPLAY OFF, VIVID, SRGBVIVID, SRGBDISPLAY OFF, VIVID, SRGBVIVID, SRGBDISPLAY OFF, VIVID, VIVIDCMYK, USCMYK, EUROCMYK
SRGBVIVID SRGBVIVID SRGBDISPLAY USCMYK (US) EUROCMYK (non-US)
LMANUALCOLORCMYKGRAPHICS
Manual Color CMYK Graphics
OFF, VIVID, VIVIDCMYK, USCMYK, EUROCMYK
USCMYK (US) EUROCMYK (non-US)
3-36
PJL
Variable LMANUALCOLORCMYKIMAGE Function Manual Color CMYK Image Selections OFF, VIVID, VIVIDCMYK, USCMYK, EUROCMYK Factory Default USCMYK (US) EUROCMYK (non-US) COM10, COM9, MONARCH, DL, C5, B5, OTHERENVELOPE COM10, DL (Country specific)
LMANUALENVELOPESIZE
Manual Envelope, default formatting size Manual Envelope Type
LMANUALENVELOPETYPE
ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5, CUSTOMTYPE6, name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of custom print material types. The text string is truncated to 24 characters.
ENVELOPE
LMANUALPAPERSIZE
Manual Paper, default formatting size Manual Paper Type
A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, JISB4, JISB5, LEDGER, LEGAL, LETTER, STATEMENT, 11X17 PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO, GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND, TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS, LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED, ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5, CUSTOMTYPE6, "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of print material types. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name.
LETTER, A4 (Country specific) PLAIN, CUSTOMTYPE3 (Model specific)
LMANUALPAPERTYPE
LMPFEEDERPAPERTYPE
Multipurpose Feeder Paper Type
PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO, GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND, TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS, LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED, ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5, CUSTOMTYPE6, "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of print material types. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name.
CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE6 PLAIN (Model specific)
LMULTIPAGEBORDER LMULTIPAGEORDER
Multipage Border Multipage Order
NONE, SOLID HORIZONTAL, VERTICAL, REVHORIZONTAL, REVVERTICAL
NONE HORIZONTAL
3-37
PJL
Variable LMULTIPAGEPRINT LMULTIPAGEVIEW LNPAP (READ only) (Port specific) LOPTIONALOUTBIN1NAME (DEFAULT only) Optional Output Bin 1 Name Function Multipage Printing Multipage View NPA Protocol Setting Selections OFF, 2UP, 3UP, 4UP, 6UP, 9UP, 12UP, 16UP AUTO, SHORTEDGE, LONGEDGE ON, OFF, AUTO This value is reported for the interface link that the command is received. "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LOPTIONALOUTBIN2NAME (DEFAULT only) Optional Output Bin 2 Name "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LOPTIONALOUTBIN3NAME (DEFAULT only) Optional Output Bin 3 Name "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LOPTIONALOUTBIN4NAME (DEFAULT only) Optional Output Bin 4 Name "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LOPTIONALOUTBIN5NAME (DEFAULT only) Optional Output Bin 5 Name "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. OPTIONAL OUTBIN5 OPTIONAL OUTBIN4 OPTIONAL OUTBIN3 OPTIONAL OUTBIN2 OPTIONAL OUTBIN1 Factory Default OFF AUTO AUTO
3-38
PJL
Variable LOPTIONALOUTBIN6NAME (DEFAULT only) Function Optional Output Bin 6 Name Selections "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LOPTIONALOUTBIN7NAME (DEFAULT only) Optional Output Bin 7 Name "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LOPTIONALOUTBIN8NAME (DEFAULT only) Optional Output Bin 8 Name "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LOPTIONALOUTBIN9NAME (DEFAULT only) Optional Output Bin 9 Name "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LOPTIONALOUTBIN10NAME Optional Output Bin 10 Name (DEFAULT only) "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LOUTBINCONFIG (DEFAULT only) Configure Output Bins MAILBOX, LINK, MAILBOXOVERFLOW, LINKOPTIONAL, TYPEASSIGNMENT MAILBOX OPTIONAL OUTBIN10 OPTIONAL OUTBIN9 OPTIONAL OUTBIN8 OPTIONAL OUTBIN7 Factory Default OPTIONAL OUTBIN6
3-39
PJL
Variable LOVERFLOWOUTBIN (DEFAULT only) Function Overflow Bin Selections UPPER, LOWER, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. If an output bin is full, print jobs assigned to that output bin exit to the assigned overflow output bin. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Overflow Bin setting returns: Overflow Bin setting Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 name LOVERFLOWTIMER (DEFAULT only) Overflow Timer, in minutes 0 to 255 A value of 0 (zero) indicates Overflow Timer is set to Disabled. If Overflow Timer is set to Disabled, a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Overflow Timer setting returns zero. If Overflow Timer is set to a numeric value, a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Overflow Timer setting returns that value. LPAGECOUNT (READ only) LPAGEMODE LPAPERSOURCE Print Area Default paper source NORMAL, WHOLEPAGE, FULLPAGE NORMAL Page Count 0 to 999999 0 DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name 0 Factory Default UPPER
TRAY1, TRAY2, TRAY3, TRAY4, TRAY5, FEEDER, TRAY1, TRAY2 MPFEEDER, MANUALPAPER, MANUALENVELOPE (Model specific) Note: If any optional source is specified, but it is not installed, the default paper source is not changed. See Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages on page B-4 for the default value of your printer.
3-40
PJL
Variable LPICTUREGRADE LPLAINLENGTH (DEFAULT only) LPLAINOUTBIN (DEFAULT only) Function PictureGrade Plain Paper Length Assign Type/Bin - Plain Paper Selections ON, OFF NORMAL, SHORT Factory Default ON NORMAL
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on plain paper. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Plain setting returns: Assign Type/Bin Plain setting Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 name DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name
LPLAINTEXTURE (DEFAULT only) LPLAINWEIGHT (DEFAULT only) LPOWERSAVER (DEFAULT only)
Plain Paper Texture Plain Paper Weight Power Saver time, in minutes
NORMAL
NORMAL
0 to 120 (Model specific) 0 to 240 (Model specific) (0 indicates the Power Saver feature is disabled.) Note: If a value outside the possible value range is specified by a SET or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to the closest value within the possible value range. Some printer models released in the year 2000 or later designated as Energy Star printers cannot have Power Saver disabled.
20
3-41
PJL
Variable LPPDS (DEFAULT only) Function Activate Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) printer language Selections ON, OFF Use ON to enable PPDS printer language and OFF to disable PPDS printer language. After this command is processed, the printer performs a Power On Reset (POR) to activate the changes. Note: The following printer settings in NVRAM are changed when PPDS is activated: PCL and PS SmartSwitch settings for each port are turned off. Printer Language is set to PPDS. LPPDSFORMLINES (DEFAULT only) LPPDSLINESPERINCH (DEFAULT only) Lines Per Page (PPDS) Lines Per Inch 1 to 255 64, 68 (Country specific) 6.00 Factory Default OFF
0.25 to 30.00 in increments of 0.25 Note: If a Lines Per Inch setting outside this range is specified, the printer defaults to the closest number in the range.
LPREPRINTEDLENGTH (DEFAULT only) LPREPRINTEDLOADING (DEFAULT only)
Preprinted Paper Length Preprinted Paper Loading
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
3-42
PJL
Variable LPREPRINTEDOUTBIN Function Assign Type/Bin Preprinted Paper Selections UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on preprinted paper. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Preprinted Paper setting returns: Assign Type/Bin Preprinted paper setting Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 name LPREPRINTEDTEXTURE (DEFAULT only) LPREPRINTEDWEIGHT (DEFAULT only) LPRINTBUFFER Preprinted Paper Texture Preprinted Paper Weight Print Buffer control DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value Factory Default UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific)
NORMAL
ON, OFF If ON is selected, Print Buffer displays with the Waiting message. If OFF is selected, Print Buffer does not display with the Waiting message.
ON
LPRINTHEADIDLETIME (SET only) LPRINTERUSAGE
Printhead Idle Time Printer Usage
0 to 15 seconds
MAXSPEED, MAXYIELD
MAXSPEED, MAXYIELD (Model specific) ON
LPRINTMENUSBUTTON (DEFAULT only)
Disable Print Menus from front panel
ON, OFF
3-43
PJL
Variable LPRINTQUALITY Function Print Quality Mode Hole Punch Rear Output Bin Name Selections QUICKPRINT, NORMAL, PRESENTATION, GRAPHICS, IMAGES, 1200IMAGEQ, INKSAVER, NORMAL, BEST ON, OFF "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LREPEATPRINTLIMIT (DEFAULT only) Print and Hold Repeat Print Job Limit 0 to 50 jobs Specifies the number of Repeat Print jobs that can be held in printer memory. If the Repeat Print Job Limit setting is not equal to 0, a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE returns the numerical setting for LREPEATPRINTLIMIT. If Repeat Print Job Limit setting is set to Disabled, a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE returns 0. LRESET Reset Control ON, OFF When the LRESET variable is set to ON, RESET PRINTER is available in the JOB MENU when the printer is in the Busy or Waiting state. This is true for most printers with a printer operator panel. If this variable is set to OFF, RESET PRINTER is not available. LRESOURCESAVE (DEFAULT only) LRIGHTMARGINOFFSET LSCREENING Right Margin Offset Color Screening Selections Indicates where separator sheets are placed within the print job Indicates which source contains the separator sheets -10 to 10 COLORGRADE, IMAGESONLY, IET 0 COLORGRADE Resource Save ON, OFF OFF ON 5 Factory Default NORMAL
LPUNCH LREAROUTBINNAME
OFF REAROUTBIN
LSEPARATORSHEETS
NONE, BETWEENCOPIES, BETWEENJOBS, BETWEENPAGES
NONE
LSEPARATORSOURCE
TRAY1, TRAY2, TRAY3, TRAY4, TRAY5, FEEDER, TRAY1 MPFEEDER, MANUALPAPER, MANUALENVELOPE
3-44
PJL
Variable LSTANDARDOUTBINNAME (DEFAULT only) Function Standard Output Bin Name Selections "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LSTROKEWIDTH PostScript minimum stroke width Staple Job Staples Empty Alarm Staple Priming Bin 1 to 255 The width of a line or a stroke between two points. ON, OFF, AUTO, FRONT, BACK, DUAL, 0, 1, 2 OFF, SINGLE, CONTINUOUS 1 pel or 1/600th inch OFF OFF Factory Default UPPER
LSTAPLE LSTAPLESEMPTYALARM (DEFAULT only) LSTAPLETESTBIN (DEFAULT only)
OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10 TRAY1, TRAY2, TRAY3, TRAY4, TRAY5, MPFEEDER OFF, LETTERA4, STATEMENTA5, 11X17A3, ALLLISTED 0 to 255 A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on LTOPBINROTATE returns the numeric value. -128 to 127 NORMAL, SHORT
OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONAL OUTBIN2 (Model specific) TRAY1
LSTAPLETESTSOURCE (DEFAULT only) LSUBSTITUTESIZE
Staple Priming Source Substitute Size
OFF, LETTERA4, ALLLISTED (Model specific) 0
LTOPBINROTATE (DEFAULT only) LTOPMARGINOFFSET LTRANSPARENCYLENGTH (DEFAULT only)
Top Bin Timeout, in minutes Top Margin Offset Transparency Length
0 NORMAL
3-45
PJL
Variable LTRANSPARENCYOUTBIN (DEFAULT only) Function Assign Type/Bin Transparency Selections UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on transparencies. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Transparency setting returns: Assign Type/Bin DINQUIRE or Transparency setting INQUIRE value Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 name LTRANSPARENCYTEXTURE (DEFAULT only) LTRANSPARENCYWEIGHT (DEFAULT only) LTRAY1SENSEDTYPE PAPER Transparency Texture Transparency Weight Detected Type for Paper Tray 1 Detected Type for Transparency- Tray 1 Detected Type for Paper Tray 2 UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name NORMAL Factory Default UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific)
NORMAL
PLAIN, BOND, GLOSSY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS, PLAIN LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE6 TRANSPARENCY, CUSTOMTYPE5 TRANSPARENCY
LTRAY1SENSEDTYPE TRANSPARENCY LTRAY2SENSEDTYPE PAPER
PLAIN, BOND, GLOSSY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS, PLAIN, LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED, CUSTOMTYPE2 CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE6 TRANSPARENCY
LTRAY2SENSEDTYPE TRANSPARENCY
Detected Type TRANSPARENCY, CUSTOMTYPE5 for Transparency - Tray 2
3-46
PJL
Variable LTRAY3SENSEDTYPE PAPER Function Detected Type for Paper Tray 3 Selections Factory Default
LTRAY3SENSEDTYPE TRANSPARENCY LTRAY4SENSEDTYPE PAPER
Detected Type TRANSPARENCY, CUSTOMTYPE5 for Transparency - Tray 3 Detected Type for Paper Tray 4
LTRAY4SENSEDTYPE TRANSPARENCY LTRAY1AUTOSIZE (DEFAULT only) LTRAY2AUTOSIZE (DEFAULT only) LTRAY3AUTOSIZE (DEFAULT only) LTRAY4AUTOSIZE (DEFAULT only) LTRAY5AUTOSIZE (DEFAULT only) LTRAY1PAPERTYPE
Detected Type TRANSPARENCY, CUSTOMTYPE5 for Transparency - Tray 4 Auto Size Sensing for Tray 1 Auto Size Sensing for Tray 2 Auto Size Sensing for Tray 3 Auto Size Sensing for Tray 4 Auto Size Sensing for Tray 5 Tray 1 Paper Type ON, OFF
ON
ON, OFF
ON
ON, OFF
ON
ON, OFF
ON
ON, OFF
ON
PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO, GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND, TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS, LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED, ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5, CUSTOMTYPE6, "name" name is a text string that is truncated to 24 characters.
PLAIN
3-47
PJL
Variable LTRAY2PAPERTYPE Function Tray 2 Paper Type Selections PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO, GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND, TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS, LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED, ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5, CUSTOMTYPE6, "name" name is a text string that is truncated to 24 characters. See Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages on page B-4 for the default value for your printer. Factory Default PLAIN, CUSTOMTYPE2 (Model specific)
LTRAY3PAPERTYPE
Tray 3 Paper Type
PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO, GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND, TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS, LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED, ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5, CUSTOMTYPE6, "name" name is a text string that is truncated to 24 characters. See Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages on page B-4 for the default value for your printer.
PLAIN, CUSTOMTYPE3 (Model specific)
LTRAY4PAPERTYPE
Tray 4 Paper Type
LTRAY5PAPERTYPE
Tray 5 Paper Type
LTRAY1RENUMBER
Tray 1 Renumber
OFF, TRAY2, TRAY3, TRAY4, TRAY5, MPFEEDER
OFF
3-48
PJL
Variable LTYPE1FONTS Function Enables Type 1 fonts for PCL emulation US/non-US defaults Selections OFF, ON Factory Default ON
LUSDEFAULTS (DEFAULT only)
US, NONUS
US, NONUS (Country specific)
Common Variables for PCL Emulation

Note: The word common applies to those variables common to both your printer and the Hewlett-Packard Companys LaserJet printers. Use these variables only for PCL emulation. The [command modifier:value] parameter should be specified as LPARM:PCL. For example:
@PJL SET LPARM:PCL FONTSOURCE=I<CR><LF>
To determine which variables your printer supports, see Table B-3: Common Variables for PCL Emulation on page B-11. Table 3-5: Common Variables for PCL Emulation
Variable FONTNUMBER FONTSOURCE Function Font Number Font Source Selections 0, 1, .... n I, S, M1, M2, M3, M4, D1 I S M1, M2, M3, M4 D1 Internal font source Permanent download fonts Flash font source Disk font source Factory Default 0 I
All other values default to internal font source. PITCH Default pitch (fixed-pitch fonts) 0.08 to 100 (in increments of 0.01) Note: If an invalid pitch is requested, the printer selects the closest pitch. 1 to 1008 (in increments of 0.25) Note: If an invalid point size is requested, the printer selects the closest point size. If a symbol set is requested that is not resident in the printer, the symbol set is not changed. PC8, PC850 (Country specific) 12.00 10.00
PTSIZE
Default point size (proportional spaced fonts) Symbol set for the default font
SYMSET
3-49
PJL
Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation

The following variables are unique to your printer and are supported in PCL emulation only. The [command modifier:value] parameter should be specified as LPARM:PCL. For example:
@PJL SET LPARM:PCL LBITMAPROUNDING=OFF[<CR>]<LF>
To determine which variables your printer supports, see Table B-4: Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation on page B-12. Table 3-6: Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation
Variable LA4WIDTH LASSIGNFEEDER Function A4 Width in millimeters Tray Renumber Assign Envelope Feeder Selections 198, 203 OFF, 0 to 199 Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT command. OFF, 0 to 199, NONE Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command. LASSIGNMANUALENVELOPE Tray Renumber Assign Manual Envelope OFF, 0 to 199 Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT command. OFF, 0 to 199, NONE Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command. LASSIGNMANUALPAPER Tray Renumber OFF, 0 to 199 Assign Manual Paper Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT command. OFF, 0 to 199, NONE Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command. LASSIGNMPFEEDER Tray Renumber Assign Multipurpose Feeder OFF, 0 to 199 Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT command. OFF, 0 to 199, NONE Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Factory Default 198 OFF
OFF
3-50
PJL
Table 3-6: Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation (Continued)

Variable LASSIGNTRAY1 Function Tray Renumber Assign Tray 1 Selections OFF, 0 to 199 Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT command. OFF, 0 to 199, NONE Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command. LASSIGNTRAY2 Tray Renumber Assign Tray 2 OFF, 0 to 199 Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT command. OFF, 0 to 199, NONE Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command. LASSIGNTRAY3 Tray Renumber Assign Tray 3 OFF, 0 to 199 Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT command. OFF, 0 to 199, NONE Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command. LASSIGNTRAY4 Tray Renumber Assign Tray 4 OFF, 0 to 199 Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT command. OFF, 0 to 199, NONE Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command. LASSIGNTRAY5 Tray Renumber Assign Tray 5 OFF, 0 to 199 Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT command. OFF, 0 to 199, NONE Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command. LBITMAPROUNDING Bitmap Font Partial Pel Rounding ON, OFF Some printers handle partial pel character escapement rounding of bitmap fonts differently. LBITMAPROUNDING offers a way of instructing the printer how to handle partial pel rounding of bitmap fonts. Bitmap rounding is compatible with the HewlettPackard Companys LaserJet printers. LCOLOREXTENSIONS Color Extensions ON, OFF, HPCLJ5 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Factory Default OFF
3-51
PJL
Table 3-6: Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation (Continued)

Variable LFONTCOMPATIBILITY LFONTPRIORITY (SET only) Function Font Compatibility Level Font Priority Search Selections PCL5, PCL6 RESOLUTION, NORESOLUTION When RESOLUTION is specified, your printer is compatible with the Hewlett-Packard Companys LaserJet printers. When NORESOLUTION is specified, font resolution is removed from the font selection priority criteria. Factory Default PCL6 RESOLUTION
Common Variables for PostScript Emulation

Note: The word common applies to those variables common to both your printer and the Hewlett-Packard Companys LaserJet printers. Use these variables only for PostScript emulation. The [command modifier:value] parameter should be specified as LPARM:POSTSCRIPT. For example:
@PJL SET LPARM:POSTSCRIPT JAMRECOVERY=OFF[<CR>]<LF>
To determine which variables your printer supports, see Table B-5: Common Variables for PostScript Emulation on page B-13. Table 3-7: Common Variables for PostScript Emulation
Variable JAMRECOVERY Function Jam Recovery Selections ON, OFF For queries, when the Jam Recovery setting is set to Auto, PJL returns the value of OFF. The remaining two Jam Recovery values, On and Off are returned by PJL as ON and OFF respectively. When PJL is used to set Jam Recovery OFF, the setting is actually set to Auto. When PJL is used to set Jam Recovery ON, the setting is set to ON. Changing this variable also affects PCL emulation. PRTPSERRS Print PS Errors ON, OFF OFF Factory Default OFF
3-52
PJL
Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation

The following variables are unique in some printers and are supported in PostScript emulation only. The [command modifier:value] parameter should be specified as LPARM:POSTSCRIPT. For example:
@PJL SET LPARM:POSTSCRIPT LPICTUREGRADE=ON[<CR>]<LF>
To determine which variables your printer supports, see Table B-6 on page B-13. Table 3-8: Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation
Variable LPICTUREGRADE LPSFONTPRIORITY Function PictureGradeTM Font Priority Selections ON, OFF RESIDENT, FLASHDISK Factory Default ON RESIDENT
Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables

Use the following variables when additional storage devices are installed. The [command modifier:value] parameter of the DEFAULT, INQUIRE, DINQUIRE, and SET commands must be specified as LRESOURCE:"device:filename.filetype". For example:
@PJL DEFAULT LRESOURCE : "device:filename.filetype"LDESCRIPTION="my description"[<CR>]<LF>

A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID for a PCL font, or the actual file name for data, Type 1 fonts, and demo files as shown on the Directory. The filename is case sensitive. The identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5macro for PCL macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets.
filetype
Using the DEFAULT command to modify any of these variables forces a write to flash or disk if resource collection mode is set to On before the command is executed. The DEFAULT command causes a PJL Reset.
3-53
PJL
To determine which variables your printer supports, see Table B-7: Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables on page B-14. Table 3-9: Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables
Variable LDESCRIPTION (DEFAULT only) Function Macro or Symbol Set Description 1 Selections "alphanumeric string" The description is limited to 16 characters and must be enclosed in double quotes. If more than 16 characters are specified by the DEFAULT command, the first 16 characters are used and a PJL parser warning is issued. The DINQUIRE command can be used to query the file description. The description is returned in the response. LRWLOCK (DEFAULT only) Read/Write Lock (password) for an entire device or a particular file on the device 2 "alphanumeric string" This variable can be used with other PJL commands: DEFAULT command The Read/Write password is limited to eight characters. If more than eight characters are specified by the PJL DEFAULT command, the password is truncated and a PJL warning is issued. If a null (" ") password is given, password protection is removed from the specified device or file. DINQUIRE or INQUIRE commands Use these commands to determine if a password has been specified for a device or specific file. The response is one of the following: NOTSET SET EXPIRED The password has not been set or has been reset to zero. The password is defined and active. The password is reset to zero (flash memory only). NOTSET NULL (no password) Factory Default NULL (no description)
The LDECLARE command can be used to temporarily unlock access to a device or particular file. See File and Device Protection Commands on page 3-93 for additional information about using passwords on these devices. LWLOCK (DEFAULT only) Write Lock (password) for an entire device or particular file on the device 2 "alphanumeric string" Same as LRWLOCK, except the password limits write-only access instead of read-write access. NULL (no password)
1 2
The macro or symbol set description is printed in the Description field of the Print Directory listing. To password-protect a device, the command modifier:value should be LRESOURCE :"device:". The colon (:) and double quotes (" ") must be specified.
3-54
PJL
Status Readback Commands

Applications can request configuration and status information from the printer using the Status Readback commands. In addition, the printer can also be instructed to send unsolicited status information back to the host computer when asynchronous events occur, such as a memory error or a paper jam. To determine which commands your printer supports, see Table B-8: Status Readback Commands on page B-14.
DINQUIRE Command
This command is used to query the default setting (NVRAM) of the specified environment variable. Syntax:
@PJL DINQUIRE [command modifier:value] variable[<CR>]<LF>
Response Syntax:
@PJL DINQUIRE [command modifier:value] variable<CR><LF> value<CR><LF> <FF>
where:
[command modifier:value]
The [command modifier:value] parameter specifies the type of PJL variable to be queried. The variables supported are listed in the tables beginning on page 3-12.
3-55
PJL
LRESOURCE:"device:filename.filetype" is required for LRESOURCE vari-
ables. (See the table Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables on page 3-53.) Values for "device:filename.filetype" are:
filetype
variable=value
The supported variables are listed in the tables beginning on page 3-12. This printer returns a ? for inquiries of an unsupported variable, or inquiries of a variable associated with an option that is not installed.
ECHO Command
The ECHO command instructs the printer to return the specified words after the command is parsed. This command provides a method of capturing the status information returned by a specific print job. Syntax:
@PJL ECHO [words][<CR>]<LF>
Response Syntax:
@PJL ECHO [words]<CR><LF> <FF> words parameter
The words parameter must start with a printable character and can consist of a combination of printable characters, spaces, and horizontal tabs.
3-56
PJL
Note: The ECHO command is terminated by the line feed character.
INFO Command
The INFO command is used to query status information from the printer. Table 3-10: INFO Category Parameter Values on page 3-56 lists the categories of information that can be queried. See Status Message Format on page 3-61 for additional information about the messages returned by the INFO STATUS, USTATUS DEVICE, and USTATUS TIMED commands. Syntax:
@PJL INFO category[<CR>]<LF>
Response Syntax:
@PJL INFO category<CR><LF> [one or more lines of printable characters, spaces, or tabs]<CR><LF> <FF> category
Table 3-10 lists the supported categories. Table 3-10: INFO Category Parameter Values
Category Values ID CONFIG MEMORY PAGECOUNT STATUS VARIABLES USTATUS Description Returns the model name or the model number stored in the printer NVRAM. Returns the printer configuration, including paper sources, paper sizes, and installed options. Returns the printer available memory. Returns the printer page count. Returns the printer current status. Returns the printer environment variables and values. Returns the printer unsolicited status variables and values.
3-57
PJL
INFO CONFIG Response Syntax (An Example): @PJL INFO CONFIG<CR><LF> IN TRAYS [2 ENUMERATED]<CR><LF> INTRAY1<CR><LF> INTRAY2<CR><LF> MANUAL FEED<CR><LF> OUT TRAYS [1 ENUMERATED]<CR><LF> UPPER FACEDOWN<CR><LF> PAPERS [13 ENUMERATED]<CR><LF> LETTER<CR><LF> LEGAL<CR><LF> A4<CR><LF> A5<CR><LF> B5PAPER<CR><LF> EXECUTIVE<CR><LF> COM10<CR><LF> COM9<CR><LF> MONARCH<CR><LF> DL<CR><LF> C5<CR><LF> B5<CR><LF> OTHERENVELOPE<CR><LF> LANGUAGES [1 ENUMERATED]<CR><LF> PCL<CR><LF> USTATUS [4 ENUMERATED]<CR><LF> DEVICE<CR><LF> JOB<CR><LF> PAGE<CR><LF> TIMED<CR><LF> FLASH=1048576<CR><LF> DISK=543283200 MEMORY=2097152<CR><LF> DISPLAY LINES=2<CR><LF> SYSTEM FIRMWARE VERSION=250A<CR><LF> ENGINE FIRMWARE VERSION=0<CR><LF> <FF>
3-58
PJL
INQUIRE Command
This command is used to query the current setting of the specified environment variable. Syntax:
@PJL INQUIRE [command modifier:value] variable[<CR>]<LF>
Response Syntax:
@PJL INQUIRE [command modifier:value] variable<CR><LF> value<CR><LF> <FF> [command modifier:value]
The [command modifier:value] parameter specifies the type of PJL variables to be queried. The variables supported are listed in the tables beginning on page 3-12.
LRESOURCE:"device:filename.filetype" is required for LRESOURCE vari-
ables. (See the table Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables on page 3-53.) Values for "device:filename.filetype" are:
filetype
3-59
PJL
variable=value
The supported variables are listed in the tables beginning on page 3-12. This printer returns a ? for inquiries of an unsupported variable, or inquiries of a variable associated with an option that is not installed.
USTATUS Command
This command is used to enable and disable unsolicited status from the printer. Unsolicited status information is sent automatically when an asynchronous event occurs. Table 3-11: USTATUS Unsolicited Status Variable Values on page 3-60 lists the asynchronous information that can be enabled and disabled. Syntax:
@PJL USTATUS ustatus variable=value[<CR>]<LF>
Response Syntax:
@PJL USTATUS ustatus variable<CR><LF> [one or more lines of printable characters, spaces, or tabs]<CR><LF> <FF>
To determine which variables your printer supports, see Table B-9: USTATUS Unsolicited Status Variables on page B-15. See Status Message Format on page 3-61 for additional information about the messages returned by the INFO STATUS, USTATUS DEVICE, and USTATUS TIMED commands.
3-60
PJL
ustatus variable=value
The following values are supported for the ustatus variable=value parameter. Table 3-11: USTATUS Unsolicited Status Variable Values
Ustatus Variable DEVICE Value ON VERBOSE OFF JOB ON Description Enables unsolicited status for device changes. Enables unsolicited status for all device changes. Also enables warnings from the PJL parser. Disables unsolicited status for device changes. Enables unsolicited status for job changes. The printer sends a status message when a job begins and ends. Disables unsolicited status for job changes. Enables unsolicited status for page changes. The printer sends a status message when a printed sheet reaches the standard output bin. Disables unsolicited status for page changes. Enables timed unsolicited status. The printer automatically sends status at a specified time interval. Disables timed unsolicited status.
OFF PAGE ON
OFF TIMED 5 to 300 in seconds 0
USTATUSOFF Command
This command turns off unsolicited status. Unsolicited status may also be turned off by using the USTATUS command on each variable. Syntax:
@PJL USTATUSOFF[<CR>]<LF>
3-61
PJL
Status Message Format

The format of the returned information from the INFO STATUS, USTATUS DEVICE, and USTATUS TIMED commands is described in this section.
Information Messages
Information messages are returned in this form: CODE=status code DISPLAY=display string (in double quotes) ONLINE=online status Table 3-12: PJL Information Messages
Printer State Ready Ready Ready with Ink Low Not Ready In the Menus Printer reset Ready with Toner Low Ready with Toner Low Ready with Toner Low Ready with Toner Low Ready with Toner Low Ready with Toner Low Ready with Toner Low Ready with Toner Low Ready with Replace Toner Ready with Replace PC Kit Ready with Replace Fuser Status Code Display String 10001 10001 10006 10002 10002 10005 10006 10006 10006 10006 10006 10006 10006 10006 10006 10006 10006 Ready RDYMSG 88 Ink Low Not Ready Not Ready Resetting the Printer 88 Toner Low 88 Yellow Toner Low 88 Magenta Toner Low 88 Cyan Toner Low 88 Black Toner Low 88 Color Print Cartridge Low 88 Black Print Cartridge Low 88 Photo Print Cartridge Low Replace Toner Replace PC Kit Replace Fuser Online Status TRUE TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE
x represents an input source code. For more information on input source codes, see Table 3-16: Tray Values on page 3-74. yy represents a size code. For more information on size codes, see Table 3-17: Media Size Values on page 3-74. ww represents the bin code. For more information on bin codes, see Table 3-18: Output Bin Values on page 3-75. Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display message longer than one line shows only the first line of the message.
3-62
PJL
Table 3-12: PJL Information Messages

Printer State Ready with Replace Transfer Power Saver with Ink Low Power Saver mode with Toner Low Power Saver mode with Replace Toner Power Saver mode with Replace PC Kit Power Saver mode with Replace Fuser Power Saver mode with Replace Transfer Canceling Job Busy Waiting Input Source Empty Input Source Missing Output Bin Full Resolution Reduced Power Saver Status Code Display String 10006 10006 10006 10006 10006 10006 10006 10007 10023 10024 11xyy 12xyy 15ww1 35029 35078 Replace Transfer 88 Ink Low 88 Toner Low Replace Toner Replace PC Kit Replace Fuser Replace Transfer Cancelling Job Busy Waiting Tray <source #> Empty Tray <source #> Missing Bin <bin #> Full Res Reduced Powersaver Online Status TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE
x represents an input source code. For more information on input source codes, see Table 3-16: Tray Values on page 3-74. yy represents a size code. For more information on size codes, see Table 3-17: Media Size Values on page 3-74. ww represents the bin code. For more information on bin codes, see Table 3-18: Output Bin Values on page 3-75. Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display message longer than one line shows only the first line of the message.
3-63
PJL
Auto-Continuable Conditions
These status messages are returned independent of the state of the Auto Continue menu item. Auto-continuable messages are returned in this form: CODE=status code DISPLAY=display string (in double quotes) ONLINE=online status To determine which messages your printer supports, see Table B-10: PJL Messages for Auto-Continuable Conditions on page B-15. Table 3-13: PJL Messages for Auto-Continuable Conditions
Printer State Intervention required: PPDS font error Intervention required: insufficient collation area Intervention required: insufficient defragment memory Intervention required: insufficient memory Intervention required: memory full Intervention required: held jobs may not be restored Intervention required: configuration change Intervention required: complex page Intervention required: standard serial error Intervention required: serial option error Intervention required: parallel error Intervention required: network software error Intervention required: standard serial fax connection lost
1
Status Code 30014 30016 30016 30016 30016 30016 30016 30017 30018 30018 30018 30018 30018
Display String 50 PPDS Font Error 37 Insufficient Collation Area 37 Insufficient Defrag Memory 37 Insufficient Memory 38 Memory Full Held Jobs May Not Be Restored 57 Configuration Change 39 Complex Page 54 Standard Serial Error 54 Serial Option 1 Error 54 Parallel Error 54 Std Network Software Error 54 Std Ser Fax Connection Lost
Online Status FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE
x equals the number of the parallel, serial or network port or option installed. Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display string longer than one line shows only the first line of the message.
3-64
PJL
Table 3-13: PJL Messages for Auto-Continuable Conditions (Continued)

Printer State Intervention required: standard serial disabled Intervention required: serial option disabled Intervention required: standard parallel port disabled Intervention required: parallel port disabled Intervention required: parallel port error Intervention required: standard USB port disabled Intervention required: resource save off deficient memory Intervention required: insufficient fax buffer Intervention required: standard parallel ENA connection lost Intervention required: standard parallel port disabled Intervention required: resolution reduced Intervention required: print jobs on disk request Intervention required: printer powered off, disk installed with Print and Hold jobs on the disk Intervention required: short paper Intervention required: flash full Intervention required: disk full Intervention required: defective flash Intervention required: unformatted flash Intervention required: defective disk
1
Status Code 30018 30018 30018 30018 30018 30018 30019 30026 30027 30027 30029 30031 30031
Display String 56 Standard Serial Disabled 56 Serial 1 Port Disabled 56 Standard Parallel Port Disabled 56 Parallel Port Disabled 56 Parallel Port x Disabled 56 Standard USB Port Disabled 35 Res Save Off Deficient Memory 55 Insufficient Fax Buffer 54 Std Par ENA Connection Lost 56 Std Parallel Port Disabled 36 Resolution Reduced Print Jobs on Disk? or Print Jobs on Disk. Go/Stop? Restore Held Jobs. Go/Stop?
Online Status FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE
30034 30035 30035 30036 30036 30036
34 Short Paper 52 Flash Full 62 Disk Full 51 Defective Flash 53 Unformatted Flash 61 Defective Disk
FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE
3-65
PJL

Printer State Intervention required: unformatted disk Intervention required: scheduled maintenance Intervention required: resource save off deficient memory Intervention required: insufficient collation area Intervention required: hole punch box full Intervention required: hole punch box full Intervention required: hole punch box missing Intervention required: staple cartridge missing Intervention required: insert stapler Intervention required: priming failed Intervention required: network x software error Intervention required: serial port x disabled Intervention required: serial option x error Intervention required: serial x fax connection lost Intervention required: USB port disabled Intervention required: parallel x ENA connection lost Intervention required: parallel x port disabled Intervention required: disk operation failed jobs on disk Intervention required: disk operation failed faxes on disk
1
Status Code 30036 30075 30076 30076 30107 30107 30107 30107 30107 30107 30112 30112 30112 30112 30112 30113 30113 32001 32001
Display String 63 Unformatted Disk 80 Scheduled Maintenance 35 Res Save Off Deficient Memory 37 Insufficient Collation Area Empty Hole Punch Box Empty Box M Insert Box M Insert Staple Cartridge Insert Stapler Priming Failed, Retry. Go/Stop? 54 Network x Software Error 56 Serial Port x Disabled 54 Serial Option x Error 54 Ser x Fax Connection Lost 56 USB Port x Disabled 54 Par x ENA Connection Lost 56 Parallel Port x Disabled Operation Failed Jobs on Disk Operation Failed Faxes on Disk
Online Status FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE
3-66
PJL

Printer State Intervention required: flash full Intervention required: disk full Intervention required: disk corrupted Intervention required: too many flash options installed Intervention required: unformatted flash Intervention required: unformatted disk Intervention required: unsupported disk format Intervention required: defective flash Intervention required: defective disk Intervention required: scheduled maintenance Intervention required: scheduled maintenance Intervention required: fuser maintenance Intervention required: fuser maintenance Intervention required: belt maintenance Intervention required: fuser/belt maintenance Intervention required: fuser maintenance Intervention required: belt maintenance Intervention required: fuser/belt maintenance Intervention required: ITU maintenance
1
Status Code 32002 32002 32015 32030 32052 32052 32052 32056 32056 35075 35075 40038 40038 40038 40038 40038 40038 40038 40038
Display String 52 Flash Full 62 Disk Full Disk Corrupted. Reformat? 58 Too Many Flash Options 53 Unformatted Flash 63 Unformatted Disk 64 Unsupported Disk Format 51 Defective Flash 61 Defective Disk 80 Scheduled Maintenance 81 Scheduled Maintenance 80 Fuser Maintenance 80 Fuser Life Warning 80 Belt Life Warning 80 Fuser/Belt Life Warning 80 Fuser Exhausted 80 Belt Exhausted 80 Fuser/Belt Exhausted 83 ITU Maintenance
Online Status FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE
3-67
PJL
Attendance Conditions
Attendance conditions require operator intervention. Attendance messages are returned in this form: CODE=status code DISPLAY=display string (in double quotes) ONLINE=online status To determine which messages your printer supports, see Table B-11: PJL Messages for Attendance Conditions on page B-20. Table 3-14: PJL Message for Attendance Conditions
Printer State Intervention required: insert coating roll Intervention required: insert print unit Intervention required: insert hole punch box Intervention required: insert photoconductor cartridge Intervention required: printer upper door open Intervention required: close toner box cover Intervention required: defective print cartridge or defective ink cartridge Intervention required: unsupported print cartridge Intervention required: unsupported print cartridge Intervention required: unsupported cartridge Intervention required: change cartridge invalid refill Intervention required: cartridge life expired
1
Status Code 40010 40010 40010 40010 40021 40021 40021
Display String
30 Coating Roll Missing 30 XXXX1 Print Unit Missing Insert Hole Punch Box Insert PC Cartridge Cover Open or Close Top Covers or Insert Cartridge or Close Door Close Cover A 31 Defective Print Cartridge 31 Defective Cartridge XXXX 32 Unsupported Print Cartridge 32 Unsupported XXXX Cartridge 32 Unsupported Cartridge Change Cartridge Invalid Refill Cartridge Life Expired XXXX
Online Status FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE
40021 40021 40021 40021 40021
FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE
XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black cartridges, respectively. For this message, the values for XXXX are returned to indicate which ink cartridges are defective. 2 <d> represents a one-letter designator for each door labeled on the printer. 3 <c> represents a one-letter designator for each cover labeled on the printer. Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display string that is returned is truncated to the DISPLAY CHARACTER SIZE returned in INFO CONFIG.
3-68
PJL
Table 3-14: PJL Message for Attendance Conditions (Continued)

Printer State Intervention required: cartridge life warning Intervention required: missing cartridge Intervention required: missing printhead Intervention required: unsupported printhead Intervention required: size sense error Intervention required: open bin exit tray Intervention required: printer cover open Intervention required: open cover Intervention required: deflector open Intervention required: open rear door Intervention required: close front door Intervention required: close side door Intervention required: close finisher door Intervention required: close finisher side door Intervention required: close finisher top cover Intervention required: close door <d> 2 Intervention required: close cover <c> 3 Intervention required: close tray top cover
1
Status Code 40021 40021 40021 40021 40021 40021 40021 40021 40021 40021 40021 40021 40021 40021 40021 40021 40021 40021
Display String
Cartridge Life Warning XXXX 31 Missing Cartridge XXXX 31 Missing Printhead 32 Unsupported Printhead 40 Tray x Size Sense Error 41 Open Bin 1 Exit Tray Close Cover Open Cover Close Deflector G Open Rear Door Close Front Door Close Side Door Close Finisher Door Close Finisher Side Door Close Finisher Top Cover Close Door <d> Close Cover <c> Close Tray x Top Cover
Online Status FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE
3-69
PJL

Printer State Intervention required: print cartridge missing Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: check tray connection Intervention required: install tray x or cancel job Intervention required: envelope feeder detached Intervention required: multipurpose feeder detached Intervention required: install envelope feeder or cancel job Intervention required: reattach output bin Intervention required: reattach bins Intervention required: install bin x or cancel job Intervention required: check finisher installation Intervention required: check mailbox installation Intervention required: tray configuration error Intervention required: input configuration error Intervention required: too many trays attached Intervention required: too many bins attached Intervention required: too many disks installed Intervention required: too many disks installed
1
Status Code 40021 40022 40027 40027 40028 40028 40028 40029 40029 40029 40029 40029 40030 40030 40030 40030 40030 40036
Display String
Insert Print Cartridge 2xx Paper Jam Check Tray <source #> Connection Install Tray x or Cancel Job Reattach Envelope Feeder Reattach MP Feeder Install Env Feed or Cancel Job Reattach Output Bin <bin #> Reattach Bins <bin #x - bin #y> Install Bin x or Cancel Job Check Finisher Installation Check Mailbox Installation 33 Tray x Config Error 58 Input Config Error 58 Too Many Trays Attached 58 Too Many Bins Attached 58 Too Many Disks Installed 58 Too Many Disks Installed
3-70
PJL

Printer State Intervention required: PerfectFinish missing Intervention required: PerfectFinish empty Intervention required: photo developer nearly exhausted Intervention required: photo developer nearly exhausted Intervention required: color photo developer exhausted Intervention required: black photo developer exhausted Intervention required: toner low Intervention required: toner low Intervention required: toner low Intervention required: toner low Intervention required: toner low Intervention required: toner empty Intervention required: toner empty Intervention required: toner empty Intervention required: toner empty Intervention required: toner low Intervention required: toner low Intervention required: toner low
1
Status Code 40037 40037 40038 40038 40038 40038 40038 40038 40038 40038 40038 40038 40038 40038 40038 40038 40038 40038
Display String
31 PerfectFinish Missing 87 PerfectFinish Empty 84 Black Photo Dev Life Warning 84 Color Photo Dev Life Warning 84 All Photo Devs Exhausted 84 Black Photo Dev Exhausted 88 Toner Low 88 Yellow Toner Low 88 Magenta Toner Low 88 Cyan Toner Low 88 Black Toner Low 88 Yellow Toner Empty 88 Cyan Toner Empty 88 Magenta Toner Empty 88 Black Toner Empty 88 Color Print Cartridge Low 88 Black Print Cartridge Low 88 Photo Print Cartridge Low
3-71
PJL

Printer State Intervention required: cartridge low Intervention required: replace photoconductor kit Intervention required: replace photoconductor kit to continue Intervention required: replace toner cartridge Intervention required: replace toner cartridge to continue Intervention required: replace oil coating roll Intervention required: cartridge empty Intervention required: load staples Intervention required: priming failed. retry? Intervention required: OPMSG Intervention required: STMSG Intervention required: replace fuser Intervention required: replace transfer kit Intervention required: incompatible bin x Intervention required: incompatible duplex Intervention required: incompatible tray x Intervention required: incompatible envelope feeder Intervention required: check duplex connection
1
Status Code 40038 40038 40038 40038 40038 40038 40039 40040 40041 40048 40049 40050 40050 40087 40088 40089 40090 40095
Display String
88 Cartridge Low <CMYK> Replace PC Kit Replace PC Kit To Continue Replace Toner Cartridge Replace Toner To Continue Replace Oil Coating Roll 89 Cartridge Empty <CMYK> Load Staples Priming Failed. Retry?
Message specified by OPMSG Message specified by STMSG

Replace Fuser Replace Transfer Kit 59 Incompatible Bin x 59 Incompatible Duplex 59 Incompatible Tray x 59 Incompatible Envelope Feeder Check Duplex Connection
3-72
PJL

Printer State Intervention required: install duplex or cancel job Intervention required: duplex cover open Intervention required: insert duplex option Intervention required: load staples
1
Status Code 40095 40096 40096 40101
Display String
Install Duplex or Cancel Job Close Duplex Door Insert Duplex Option Load Staples
Online Status FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE
Operator Intervention - Paper Handling

When a Load <tray>, Load Manual, or Change <tray> message appears on the printer operator panel display or through MarkVision Professional, a message is returned to the host computer indicating the paper source and size for the prompt. Attendance (operator intervention) messages are returned in this form: CODE=status code DISPLAY=display string (in double quotes) ONLINE=online status The display string is the first line of the message that displays.
3-73
PJL
To determine which messages your printer supports, see Table B-12: PJL Messages for Paper Handling on page B-25. Table 3-15: PJL Messages for Paper Handling
Printer State Intervention required: wrong paper size in tray x Intervention required: wrong paper size manual feed Intervention required: remove paper standard bin Intervention required: remove paper output bin Intervention required: remove paper all output bins Intervention required: remove paper Intervention required: check <source> paper guide Intervention required: incorrect media Intervention required: load request Status Code 30034 30034 40019 40019 40019 40019 4100x 41xyy 41xyy Display String*
34 Wrong Paper Size in Tray x 34 Wrong Paper Size Manual Feed Remove Paper Standard Bin Remove Paper Output Bin <bin #> Remove Paper All Output Bins Remove Paper <linked set bin name> Check <source> Paper Guide 34 Incorrect Media Load <source>... <Custom Type Name> <Custom String> <size> <type> <size> Load Manual <Custom Type Name> <Custom String> <size> <type> <size> Change <source>... <Custom Type Name> <Custom String> <size> <type> <size> Insert Duplex Pages & Press Go. Insert Tray <source #>
Online Status FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE
Intervention required: load manual request
41xyy
FALSE
Intervention required: change request
41xyy
FALSE
Intevention required: insert duplex pages & press Go. Intervention required: insert tray request
412yy 4300x
FALSE FALSE
x represents an input source code. For more information, see Table 3-16: Tray Values on page 3-74. yy represents a media size code. For more information, see Table 3-17: Media Size Values on page 3-74. * See your printer See your printer documentation for more information on printer messages.
3-74
PJL
Table 3-16: Tray Values

X Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Tray Multipurpose Feeder Manual Feed Tray 1 Tray 2 Envelope Feeder Tray 3 Tray 4 Tray 5
Table 3-17: Media Size Values

YY Value 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Media Size Universal Other Envelope Letter Paper Legal Paper A4 Paper Executive Paper 11 x 17 (Ledger) A3 Com 10 Envelope 7 3/4 Envelope (Monarch) C5 Envelope DL Envelope JIS B4 JIS B5 Paper B5 Envelope Custom Media A3+, JB4 Paper (Model specific) JB5 Paper JPostcard JDoublePostcard
3-75
PJL
Table 3-17: Media Size Values

YY Value 20 21 22 90 Media Size A5 Folio Statement Com 9 Envelope
Table 3-18: Output Bin Values

WW Value 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Output Bin Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10
Operator Intervention - Paper Jams

When a <#> Paper Jam message appears on the printer operator panel display or through MarkVision Professional, a message is returned to the host computer indicating the type and location for the prompt. Attendance (operator intervention) messages are returned in this form: CODE=status code DISPLAY=display string (in double quotes) ONLINE=online status
3-76
PJL
To determine which messages your printer supports, see Table B-13 on page B-27. Table 3-19: PJL Messages for Paper Jams
Printer State Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Status Code 4200x 4201x 4202x 4203x 4204x 4205x 4206x 4207x 4208x 4209x 4210x 4211x 4220x 4221x 4222x 4230x 4231x Display String*
200 Paper Jam 201 Paper Jam 202 Paper Jam 203 Paper Jam 204 Paper Jam 205 Paper Jam 206 Paper Jam 207 Paper Jam 208 Paper Jam 209 Paper Jam 210 Paper Jam 211 Paper Jam 220 Paper Jam 221 Paper Jam 222 Paper Jam 230 Paper Jam 231 Paper Jam
Online Status FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE
w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover. The door or cover needs to be opened. x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer. y represents the tray number. z represents the bin number. * See your printer documentation for more information on printer messages.
3-77
PJL
Table 3-19: PJL Messages for Paper Jams (Continued)

Printer State Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Status Code 4232x 4233x 4234x 424yx 4241wy 4242wy 4243w 4244wy 4245w 4246w 4247wy 4248w 4249w 4250w 4250x 4251wy 4251x 4252w Display String*
232 Paper Jam 233 Paper Jam 234 Paper Jam 24y Paper Jam 241 Paper Jam 242 Paper Jam 243 Paper Jam 244 Paper Jam 245 Paper Jam 246 Paper Jam 247 Paper Jam 248 Paper Jam 249 Paper Jam 250 Paper Jam 250 Paper Jam 251 Paper Jam 251 Paper Jam 252 Paper Jam
3-78
PJL

Printer State Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Status Code 4253w 4254wy 4255 4256w 4257w 4258w 4259wy 4260w 4260x 4261w 4261x 427zx 4271 4272 4273 4280x 4280x 4280w Display String*
253 Paper Jam 254 Paper Jam 255 Paper Jam 256 Paper Jam 257 Paper Jam 258 Paper Jam 259 Paper Jam 260 Paper Jam 260 Paper Jam 261 Paper Jam 261 Paper Jam 27z Paper Jam 271 Paper Jam 272 Paper Jam 273 Paper Jam 280 Paper Jam Clear Staple Job from Finisher 280 Paper Jam
3-79
PJL

Printer State Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Status Code 4281w 4281x 4282w 4282x 4283w 4283x 4284w 4284x 4285w 4286w 4287 4288 4289 4290 4291 4292 4293 Display String*
281 Paper Jam 281 Paper Jam 282 Paper Jam 282 Paper Jam 283 Paper Jam 283 Paper Jam 284 Paper Jam 284 Paper Jam 285 Paper Jam 286 Paper Jam 287 Paper Jam 288 Paper Jam 289 Paper Jam 290 Paper Jam 291 Paper Jam 292 Paper Jam 293 Paper Jam
Online Status FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE
3-80
PJL

Printer State Intervention required: paper jam Intervention required: paper jam Status Code 4294 4295 Display String*
294 Paper Jam 295 Paper Jam
Online Status FALSE FALSE
Service Errors
Error Code 50000 is returned for all 9xx Service Errors when the printer can return a status code. To determine whether your printer supports returning service messages, see Table B-14: Service Errors on page B-32.
Device Attendance Commands

To determine which commands your printer supports, see Table B-15: Device Attendance Messages on page B-32.
RDYMSG Command
The RDYMSG command is used to specify a message that appears on the first line of the printer operator panel display or through MarkVision Professional whenever the printer is ONLINE (in the Ready or Busy state). This message displays instead of the Ready or Busy message.
3-81
PJL
Syntax:
@PJL RDYMSG DISPLAY = "message"[<CR>]<LF>
OPMSG Command
When an OPMSG command is received, the message appears and is allotted both lines of the display. The printer is taken OFFLINE. This message, along with the STMSG command, is the lowest priority, so if another intervention occurs, it displays instead. Note: See your printer documentation for information about how to return your printer to the ONLINE state. Once in the ONLINE state, the Ready, Busy, or Waiting message appears on the printer operator panel display or through MarkVision Professional. A printer reset is not available from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional while OPMSG displays. Syntax:
@PJL OPMSG DISPLAY = "message"[<CR>]<LF>
STMSG Command
When a STMSG command is received, the message appears and is allotted both lines of the display. The printer is taken OFFLINE. This message, along with the OPMSG command, is the lowest priority, so if another intervention occurs, it displays instead. Note: See your printer documentation for information about how to return your printer to the ONLINE state. Once in the ONLINE state, the Ready, Busy, or Waiting message appears on the printer operator panel display or through MarkVision Professional. A printer reset is not available from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional while STMSG displays. Syntax:
@PJL STMSG DISPLAY = "message"[<CR>]<LF>
3-82
PJL
Unique PJL Commands

To determine which commands your printer supports, see Table B-16: Lexmark Unique PJL Commands on page B-32.
LBEEP Command
This command causes the printer to beep three times. Syntax:
@PJL LBEEP[<CR>]<LF>
LPORTROTATE Command
This command causes the printer to rotate ports at the next job boundary. The information to rotate ports is specified in the job header. For example, the printer could switch from parallel interface to serial interface between jobs. Syntax:
@PJL LPORTROTATE[<CR>]<LF>
3-83
PJL
LPRINT Commands (Information Pages)

Use these commands to print one of the internal information pages.
@PJL testpage[<CR>]<LF>
The supported testpage values are listed in the following table. Table 3-20: LPRINT testpage Commands
testpage Value LPRINTDIRECTORY LPRINTTESTPAGE LPRINTMENUS LPRINTPCLFONTS LPRINTPSFONTS Description Prints both the flash and disk directory listings. If neither flash memory or a disk is installed, the command is ignored. Prints the test page. Prints the menu settings page. Prints the PCL font listing. Prints the PostScript font listing.
For example, to print a menu settings page: Syntax:

@PJL LPRINTMENUS[<CR>]<LF>
LESCAPECHAR Command
This command modifies the code point of the escape character for the host computer specified by the PORT parameter. The escape character is mapped to code point 0x1B for each host interface port. Syntax:
@PJL LESCAPECHAR CHAR=byte PORT=port [<CR>]<LF> CHAR parameter
The byte value for the CHAR parameter is the code point of the ASCII character used for the escape character. For example, at the factory, the printer uses 0x1B (character <Esc>) for the escape character. If CHAR = 65 is specified with this command, the printer uses 0x41 (character A) as the escape character for the host interface port specified via the PORT parameter.
3-84
PJL
PORT parameter
The following ports are valid parameters for LESCAPECHAR:
INA INA1 INA2 INA3 LOCALTALK1 LOCALTALK2 LOCALTALK3 PARALLEL PARALLEL1 PARALLEL2 PARALLEL 3 USB USB1 USB2 USB3 SERIAL SERIAL1 SERIAL2 SERIAL3 IR IR1 IR2 IR3
3-85
PJL
LFAX PHONENUMBER Command

This command tells the printer that the output resulting from the current job is being sent to the fax processing device instead of to the printer. The current job is printed and is not sent to the fax processing device if one of the following occurs:

Syntax:
The printer is not configured for fax send capability The command is received with a command that selects an interpreter that does not support formatting functionality for sending faxes
@PJL LFAX PHONENUMBER=number [STATIONID=station name][<CR>]<LF> PHONENUMBER=number
The PHONENUMBER parameter is a text string up to 60 characters long. If an unsupported character is supplied in the PHONENUMBER parameter, the entire LFAX PHONENUMBER command is ignored. Table 3-21: LFAX PHONENUMBER number Values
Character 0-9 * # A-D ! W @ & , (comma) ^
1
Description DTMF digits 0 to 9 DTMF1 character * DTMF1 character # DTMF1 characters A, B, C, and D Flash Wait for dial tone Wait for silence Wait for credit card tone Pause Toggles between tone and pulse modes
1
DTMF, Dual Tone Multi-Frequency, is the system used by touch-tone telephones which assigns a specific frequency, or tone, to each key so it can easily be identified by a microprocessor.
[STATIONID=station name]
The STATIONID parameter specifies a station name that is sent to the receiving fax machine to indicate the origin of an incoming fax. The station name is a text string which is truncated to 20 characters. A null value ( ) indicates no station ID is specified. If no station name is specified, the default station name of the printer is used.
3-86
PJL
LDOWNLOADTARGET Command
This command specifies which device is the target for downloaded files. The target can be RAM, flash, or disk. Syntax:
@PJL SET LDOWNLOADTARGET=variable [<CR>]<LF>
File Commands for Flash or Disk

Use the following commands to manage resources on flash and disk devices:

Syntax:
LOPENFILE LCLOSEFILE LREADFILE LWRITEFILE LRUNFILE LRENAMEFILE LDELETEFILE LFORMAT LDEFRAG
@PJL LOPENFILE DEVICE=filedevice FILENAME=fname ACCESS=accesstype [<CR>]<LF>
See Chapter 6: Flash Memory and Disk for more information.
3-87
PJL
Table 3-22 lists the parameters used with most of the commands. Additional parameters are noted in the description of each command. Table 3-22: Variables for Flash and Disk File and Password Commands
Parameter Syntax ACCESS = accesstype Description One of the following access types must be specified when a file is opened:
accesstype
RO WO RW AP
Open for read only. The file must already exist on the specified device. Create a new file. If the file already exists, its contents will be discarded and a new file will be created. Open for reading and writing. The file must already exist. Open for reading and writing, and position the file pointer to the end of the file. The file must already exist.
Access types are case sensitive. The LREADFILE command is ignored if the file was not opened with an accesstype of RO, RW, or AP. The LWRITEFILE command is ignored if the file was not opened with an accesstype of WO, RW, or AP.
bytecount
LENGTH = bytecount
The amount of data in bytes to be read or written. The parameter is optional for both the LREADFILE and LWRITEFILE commands. If the LENGTH parameter is omitted from the LREADFILE command, bytecount is assumed to be equal to the entire file beginning at the START location. If the LENGTH parameter is omitted from the LWRITEFILE command, an @PJL END DATA command must be placed at the end of the data. All data up to @ in @PJL END DATA is written to the file. Note: The LWRITEFILE command requires that either the LENGTH parameter or the @PJL END DATA command be specified, but not both. If the LENGTH is greater than the file size on a LREADFILE command, it is assumed to be the entire file beginning at the START location.
3-88
PJL
Table 3-22: Variables for Flash and Disk File and Password Commands (Continued)
Parameter Syntax DEVICE = filedevice Description File storage media. Case insensitive.
filedevice
flash flash1 disk disk1 rom

The rom value is used for the LRUNFILE command only. Note: The command is ignored if the device is not installed.
flashdevice DEVICE = flashdevice
File storage media.
flash flash1 filename

FILENAME = "fname" OLDFILENAME = "fname" NEWFILENAME = "fname" Fname is comprised of a filename, a unique identifier for a file, and a filetype, which specifies the type of file. The format is filename.filetype. The filename must be one of the following:
macro ID symbol set ID font ID actual filename
PCL macros PCL symbol sets PCL fonts data, Type 1 fonts, demo files (case sensitive)
The filetype must be one of the following:
t1 sFnt5 bFnt5 MAC5 data type1 demo p5scalable p5bitmap p5macro p5symset ppdsbm xlmacro
PostScript font PCL scalable font PCL bitmap font PCL macro User Data PostScript font Demo PCL scalable font PCL bitmap font PCL macro PCL symbol set PPDS bitmap font PCL XL user stream
All fname specifications must be enclosed in quotation marks and cannot exceed 127 characters. If the file is password-protected, the password must be provided in order to unlock the file. For additional information about passwords, see File and Device Protection Commands on page 3-93.
3-89
PJL
Table 3-22: Variables for Flash and Disk File and Password Commands (Continued)
Parameter Syntax START = location Description The location in the file to begin writing or reading. Use an integer that represents an offset in bytes from the beginning of the file. Optional for both LREADFILE and LWRITEFILE commands. If this parameter is omitted from an LREADFILE command, a location of 0 (beginning of the file) is assumed. If it is omitted from a LWRITEFILE command with an accesstype of RW, a location of 0 is also assumed. If a START location is provided but it is greater than the file size, the LREADFILE command response will contain no file data. Similarly, an LWRITEFILE command with an accesstype of RW functions like an LWRITEFILE command with an accesstype of AP.
location
Note: If PostScript emulation is used to create the file on the device, it may automatically attach a .data extension to the fname. See Filename Extensions on page 6-10 for more information. For example, if "myfile" is downloaded to flash through PostScript emulation, the fname on the PJL commands is "myfile.data".
LOPENFILE Command
Use this command to open a file on a storage device. Syntax:
@PJL LOPENFILE DEVICE = filedevice FILENAME = "fname" ACCESS = accesstype[<CR>]<LF>
LCLOSEFILE Command
Use this command to close a file on a storage device. The command is ignored if the file doesnt exist on the device or if the file is not open. Syntax:
@PJL LCLOSEFILE DEVICE = filedevice FILENAME = "fname"[<CR>]<LF>
3-90
PJL
LREADFILE Command
Use this command to read data from a file on a storage device. Syntax:
@PJL LREADFILE DEVICE = filedevice FILENAME = "fname" [START = location] [LENGTH = bytecount][<CR>]<LF>
Response Syntax:
@PJL LREADFILE DEVICE = filedevice FILENAME = "fname" START = location LENGTH = bytecount<CR><LF> <requested data from the file>@PJL END DATA<CR><LF><FF>
Notes:
The file must be closed using the LCLOSEFILE command once all operations are complete. The command is ignored if the file doesnt exist on the device or has not already been opened with LOPENFILE with an accesstype of RO, RW, or AP. If the START = location parameter is omitted, location 0 (beginning of the file) is assumed. If a START location is provided but it is greater than the file size, the response will contain no file data. If the LENGTH parameter is omitted, bytecount is assumed to be equal to the entire file beginning at the START location. If the LENGTH is greater than the file size on a LREADFILE command, it is assumed to be the entire file beginning at the START location.
3-91
PJL
LWRITEFILE Command
Use this command to write data to a file on a storage device. Syntax:
@PJL LWRITEFILE DEVICE = filedevice FILENAME = "fname" [START = location] [LENGTH = bytecount][<CR>]<LF><data> [@PJL END DATA][<CR>]<LF>
Notes:
The file must be closed using the LCLOSEFILE command once all operations are complete. The command is ignored if the file doesnt exist on the device. The command is ignored if the file isnt already open with a write accesstype. If START = location is omitted on a file with an accesstype of RW, location 0 is assumed. If START = location is greater than file size and the accesstype is RW, it positions the file pointer at the end of the file. If the LENGTH is omitted from a LWRITEFILE command, an @PJL END DATA must be placed at the end of the data. All data up to @ in @PJL END DATA is written to the file. The command requires either the LENGTH parameter or the @PJL END DATA be specified, but not both.
LRUNFILE Command
Use this command to load and execute a file on a storage device. For example, use this command to run the resident demo file or a demo file stored on flash or disk. Syntax:
@PJL LRUNFILE DEVICE = filedevice FILENAME = "fname"[<CR>]<LF>
3-92
PJL
LRENAMEFILE Command
Use this command to rename a file on a storage device. The command is ignored if the filename specified as OLDFILENAME doesnt exist on the device, or if the filename specified as NEWFILENAME already exists on the device. Syntax:
@PJL LRENAMEFILE DEVICE = filedevice OLDFILENAME = "fname" NEWFILENAME = "fname"[<CR>]<LF>
LDELETEFILE Command
Use this command to delete a file on a storage device. The command is ignored if the file doesnt exist on the device. Syntax:
@PJL LDELETEFILE DEVICE = filedevice FILENAME = "fname"[<CR>]<LF>
LFORMAT Command
Use this command to format a device for storage. Syntax:
@PJL LFORMAT DEVICE = filedevice[<CR>]<LF>
LDEFRAG Command
Use this command to recover storage space on a flash device. Syntax:
@PJL LDEFRAG DEVICE = flashdevice[<CR>]<LF>
3-93
PJL
File and Device Protection Commands

The following information applies to password protection.
You can set both read/write and write passwords for a resource. If both passwords are set, the read/write password has precedence over the write password. If you attempt to password-protect a non-existing resource, the PJL interpreter will return a warning (CODE = 25001). If a resource has already been password protected, the resource must be unlocked before you can specify a different password for that resource. Several restrictions with passwords apply to flash due to the nature of the technology: You can create/change passwords for the whole flash multiple times, but each change uses up free space in the flash that can only be recovered by reformatting the whole flash. You can create passwords for individual resources on the flash only once. You can also delete this password once. If this is done, you must recreate the resource before using the password feature again.
Protecting a File or Device

Use the DEFAULT command to set a password on the entire flash or disk or on an individual macro or font in flash.
Password Protection for a File

LRWLOCK with DEFAULT specified locks a file or device for reading and writing. LWLOCK with DEFAULT specified locks a file or device for writing only.
3-94
PJL
Syntax:
@PJL DEFAULT LRESOURCE:"device:filename.filetype" LRWLOCK="password"[<CR>]<LF> @PJL DEFAULT LRESOURCE:"device:filename.filetype" LWLOCK="password"[<CR>]<LF>
The filename used depends on whether you wish to put a password on a font or a macro. The filename for a font is a five digit ID from the print directory page (add zeros to the left of the ID to fill the five digits) followed by a three digit instance number. The first time a font is downloaded after a flash has been formatted, the instance number is 0. Filetypes are described under filename in Table 3-9: Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables on page 3-53. For example, to write password protect a PCL emulation bitmapped font (filetype of p5bitmap) with an ID of 127, which has not been downloaded since flash was formatted: @PJL DEFAULT LRESOURCE:"flash:00127000.p5bitmap" LWLOCK="password"[<CR>]<LF> To password protect a macro, the filename is the ID taken from the print directory page, followed by the filetype. For example, to read/write password protect a PCL emulation macro (filetype is p5macro) saved to flash with an ID of 1023: @PJL DEFAULT LRESOURCE:"flash:1023.p5macro" LRWLOCK="password"[<CR>]<LF> Note: If the filename is incorrect, the printer applies the password to the entire device.
Password for an Entire Device

If you want to set a password on a device, not just a single file, omit the filename. LRWLOCK with DEFAULT specified locks a device for reading and writing. LWLOCK with DEFAULT specified locks a device for writing only. Syntax:
@PJL DEFAULT LRESOURCE:"device:" LRWLOCK="password"[<CR>]<LF> @PJL DEFAULT LRESOURCE:"device:" LWLOCK="password"[<CR>]<LF>
3-95
PJL
Unlocking a Protected File or Device

Use the LDECLARE command to specify a password so a protected file or device may be accessed or unlocked. The LDECLARE command is only allowed within a JOB/ EOJ combination. LRWLOCK with LDECLARE specified unlocks a file or device for reading and writing. LWLOCK with LDECLARE specified unlocks a file or device for writing only. The file or device must be re-locked using the LDELETEPASSWORD command after the job is completed. The file or device is not automatically re-locked with the EOJ command. Syntax:
@PJL LDECLARE LRESOURCE : "device:filename.filetype" LRWLOCK = "password"[<CR>]<LF> @PJL LDECLARE LRESOURCE : "device:filename.filetype" LWLOCK = "password"[<CR>]<LF> LRESOURCE : "device:filename.filetype"

A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID for a PCL font, or the actual file name for data, Type 1 fonts, and demo files as shown on the Directory. The filename is case sensitive. An identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5macro for PCL macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets. See the table beginning on page 3-87 for a complete list of the supported file types. The filetype is case sensitive.
filetype
LRWLOCK = "password" or LWLOCK = "password"
See Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables on page 3-52 for information about values for LRWLOCK = "password" and LWLOCK = "password" parameters. Note: This should be the same password that was defined in the DEFAULT command. See Password Protection for a File on page 3-93 and Password for an Entire Device on page 3-94 for examples.
3-96
PJL
Re-Locking a Protected File or Device

Use the LDELETEPASSWORD command to re-lock a password-protected file or device that has been unlocked using the LDECLARE command. If an LRESOURCE is not specified, all unlocked files or devices are re-locked. Syntax:
@PJL LDELETEPASSWORD [LRESOURCE : "device:filename.filetype"][<CR>]<LF> LRESOURCE : "device:filename.filetype"

A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID for a PCL font, or the actual file name for data, Type 1 fonts, and demo files as shown on the Directory. The filename is case sensitive. An identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5macro for PCL macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets. See the table beginning on page 3-87 for a complete list of the supported filetypes. The filetype is case sensitive.
filetype
3-97
PJL
Unlocking a Protected File or Device for the Current Job

The file or device unlocked by the execution of this command is automatically re-locked upon execution of the EOJ command or by a printer language change. Syntax:
@PJL LDECLARE LRESOURCE : "device:filename.filetype" LRWLOCKJ = "password"[<CR>]<LF> @PJL LDECLARE LRESOURCE : "device:filename.filetype" LWLOCKJ = "password"[<CR>]<LF> LRESOURCE : "device:filename.filetype"

A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID for a PCL font, or the actual file name for data, Type 1 fonts, and demo files as shown on the Directory. The filename is case sensitive. An identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5macro for PCL macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets. See the table beginning on page 3-87 for a complete list of the supported file types. The filetype is case sensitive.
filetype
LRWLOCK = "password" or LWLOCK = "password" Parameters
See Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables on page 3-52 for information about values for LRWLOCK = "password" and LWLOCK = "password" parameters.
3-98
PJL
Recovering Lost Passwords

Use the LQUERYSEED and LBYPASSPASSWORD commands to recover lost passwords. Syntax:
@PJL LQUERYSEED[<CR>]<LF> @PJL LBYPASSPASSWORD KEY = "key"[<CR>]<LF>
Use the following steps to retrieve lost passwords:
Send the LQUERYSEED command to the printer by one of the host computer interfaces. This command causes a value, the seed, to display on the printer operator panel, through MarkVision Professional or, if there isnt an LCD panel, to print on the Menu Settings Page. The value of the seed determines the key.
Obtain the key from the Lexmark Customer Support Center. You must have the seed value.
Send the @PJL LBYPASSPASSWORD command to the printer by any port. If the correct key is specified, a modified version of the directory is produced. The directory indicates the appropriate passwords for the flash or disk.
4-1
PostScript
CHAPTER 4: PostScript Emulation

This section explains PostScript emulation supplemental operators in detail. For more information, refer to the PostScript Language Reference Manual (Third Edition) by Adobe Systems, Inc. To determine which commands your printer supports, see Appendix C: PostScript Support on page C-1.
Selecting PostScript Emulation

Using SmartSwitch
When SmartSwitch is enabled for both printer languages on an interface, the printer automatically switches to the printer language being sent by your software program. The printer is shipped with SmartSwitch enabled for both printer languages and all interfaces. The printer examines all print jobs and switches dynamically between PostScript emulation and PCL emulation.
Using the Operator Panel or MarkVision Professional

You may select PostScript emulation from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. To disable the automatic switching and have all input interpreted as PostScript language, turn PCL SmartSwitch Off and set the printer language default to PostScript emulation. See your printer documentation for information on changing menu settings.
4-2
PostScript
Using Your Software Program

To select PostScript emulation, use the ENTER LANGUAGE command, which is a Printer Job Language (PJL) command. For more information, see ENTER LANGUAGE Command on page 3-3. See Printer Job Language on page 3-1 for information about syntax and the use of PJL. Warning: When you change printer languages, you may lose all previously downloaded fonts and macros, unless Resource Save is set to On or the resources are stored in flash memory or on disk. Table 4-1: Paper Sizes Supported
Supported Not Supported Paper Sizes Printer Models E238, E240, E240n, E340, and E342n E120, and E120n
Literal Name letter legal JIS b52 a4 executivepage a5

1
Size (mm) 215.9 x 279.4 215.9 x 355.6 182.0 x 257.0 210.0 x 297.0 184.2 x 266.7 148.0 x 210.0 257 x 364 297 x 420 328 x 453 279.4 x 431.8 431.8 x 279.4 216 x 330
Size (inches) 8.5 x 11.0 8.5 x 14.0 7.17 x 10.1 8.27 x 11.7 7.25 x 10.5 5.83 x 8.27 10.12 x 14.33 11.7 x 16.54 12.91 x 17.83 11 x 17 17 x 11 8.5 x 13 5.5 x 8.5 8.5 x 14.0 11.7 x 17
Size (points) 612 x 792 612 x 1008 516 x 729 595 x 842 522 x 756 419 x 595 729 x 1032 842 x 1191 930 x 1284 792 x 1224 1224 x 792 612 x 936 396 x 612 612 x 1020 842 x 1224
b4 a3 a3+ 11x17 ledger folio statement custom custom

1B5 2
140 x 216 215.9 x 355.6 297 x 431.8
is a Japanese Industry Standard (JIS) paper size. The same B5 designation is used by JIS and International Standards Organization (ISO) for different paper sizes. 2 The Lexmark E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn do not support Statement with duplex. The 550-sheet tray support statement.
E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn
4-3
PostScript
Table 4-1: Paper Sizes Supported (Continued)

Supported Not Supported Paper Sizes Printer Models E238, E240, E240n, E340, and E342n E120, and E120n
Literal Name custom custom

1B5
Size (mm) 320 x 559 297 x 914
Size (inches) 12.6 x 22 11.7 x 36
Size (points) 908 x 1584 842 x 2592
is a Japanese Industry Standard (JIS) paper size. The same B5 designation is used by JIS and International Standards Organization (ISO) for different paper sizes. 2 The Lexmark E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn do not support Statement with duplex. The 550-sheet tray support statement.
currentuniversalsize
currentuniversalsize integer integer integer (string)
queries the current settings for the Universal paper size. Three integers and one string are returned on the stack: Universal Width Universal Height Universal Feed Direction Custom Universal Prompt String Error: stackoverflow
E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn
4-4
PostScript
ignoresize
ignoresize integer
queries whether or not text is being oriented based on page size. An integer value is returned on the stack:
0 1 2
perform automatic orientation of text based on page size treat the page size as an envelope treat the page size as paper
Error: stackoverflow
setignoresize
integer setignoresize
overrides the automatic page orientation selected by the printer to support custom media sizes. This operator determines whether or not to adjust the text based on the page size.
integer value may be: 0 1 2
perform automatic orientation of text based on page size (default) treat the page size as an envelope treat the page size as paper
A value set by this operator takes effect on a subsequent setpagedevice only if PageSize Policy is set to 7. Errors: rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
4-5
PostScript
setuniversalsize
integer integer integer (string) setuniversalsize
changes the current settings for the Universal paper size. Each parameter on the stack indicates: Universal Width minimum to maximum width in points Universal Height minimum to maximum height in points Universal Feed Direction 0 short edge 1 long edge Custom Universal Prompt String String must be 16 characters or less. Error: rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
Paper Tray Support

When the printer receives one of the operators listed in Table 4-2: Tray Selected with Tray Operators on page 4-7, it performs the actions listed as follows. This paper tray selection process ends as soon as a suitable paper source is chosen and paper is fed from this tray.
The printer checks the value of manualfeed in statusdict and the ManualFeed page device parameter. If either one is true, the printer sends a message to load the requested size in the manual feed tray or multipurpose feeder. The PageSize Policy is set to 0 by means of setpagedevice. The printer checks the paper size loaded in the current active source to determine if it matches the requested size. If the sizes match, the paper is fed from the active source. Note: The current active tray is the last source that was selected from the printer operator panel or by the printer language.
If the requested size and the size loaded in the active source do not match, the sources are searched in the order defined by the Priority array in the InputAttributes dictionary in the pagedevice dictionary.
4-6
PostScript
If the requested media size is not found by the previous search, the following search order is used: Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Multipurpose Feeder Tray 4 Tray 5
If the requested size cannot be located in any automatic source, a configurationerror is issued and the job is flushed.
For printers that support automatic duplexing:
Automatic duplexing is not supported for custom-size paper or for envelopes in the multipurpose feeder. Automatic duplexing is supported from the multipurpose feeder for all other papers. If the paper source is changed before the back side of a duplexed page prints, a blank back page prints, the paper source changes, and the information for the back side of the page is printed on the front side of a page sent from the new paper source.
When these operators are used, it is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence:
<< /PageSize [x y] /ImagingBBox null /Policies << /PageSize 0>> >> setpagedevice
where x y are the PageSize in points.
4-7
PostScript
Table 4-2: Tray Selected with Tray Operators

Supported Not Supported E120, E120n Printer Models E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn E238, E240, E240n, E340, and E342n
Operator a3tray a4tray a5tray b4tray b5tray customtray executivetray foliotray ledgertray legaltray lettertray statementtray 11x17tray
Tray Selected (Corresponding image size is set) tray with A3-size paper tray with A4-size paper tray with A5-size paper tray with B4-size paper tray with B5-size paper tray with custom-size paper tray with executive-size paper tray with folio-size paper tray with ledger-size paper tray with legal-size paper tray with letter-size paper tray with statement-size paper tray with 11 x 17-size paper
4-8
PostScript
manualfeed
/manualfeed boolean def
in statusdict indicates if a manual feed source has been selected. The boolean value can be:
true false
prints from a manual feed source (default) prints from an automatic feed source
This boolean key can be redefined to affect manual feed for the current job. If the value of the manualfeed operator or the ManualFeed page device parameter is true when showpage or copypage is executed, the page is fed manually. If both have a value of false when showpage or copypage is executed, the page is fed from an automatic source. These two values are independent of each other. Note: If manualfeed is redefined between printing the front and back page of a duplexed page, the information for the front and back pages is printed on the same page. Error: stackoverflow
papertray
papertray integer
queries the paper tray that is currently selected. An integer is returned on the stack indicating which paper tray is currently in use. Valid integers are:
0 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9
Tray 1 Tray 2 Multipurpose Feeder or Envelope Feeder Manual Paper Manual Envelope Tray 3 Multipurpose Feeder Tray 4 Tray 5
4-9
PostScript
setpapertray
integer setpapertray
changes the active paper source for the next page through the end of job by setting the PageSize entry in the page device to the size loaded in the selected source and by setting MediaPosition to the selected source. This operator executes a setpagedevice. The PageSize Policy page device parameter is not altered by this operator. Use the following integers to set the paper tray:
0 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9
Tray 1 Tray 2 Multipurpose Feeder or Envelope Feeder Manual Paper Manual Envelope Tray 3 Multipurpose Feeder Tray 4 Tray 5
Notes: If the Manual Paper or Manual Envelope source is selected, the ManualFeed page device parameter is set to true. A rangecheck error is returned if a paper source that is not installed is selected. If a setpapertray operator is issued for the back of a duplexed page, the printer ejects a blank back page, changes the paper source, and prints the information for the back side of the page on the front side of a page from the new paper source. The setting returns to the user default setting for the Paper Source menu item at the end of the print job. Errors: rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
4-10
PostScript
Envelope Size Support

The literal names in Table 4-3 are also supported as operators in userdict. These operators change the image size, but do not change the active paper source. Therefore, when these operators are used, part of the image may be clipped. When these literal names are used as operators, it is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence. The following example uses a 3.875 x 7.5 envelope.
<</Policies <</PageSize 7>> /PageSize [279 540]>> >>setpagedevice
Table 4-3: Envelope Sizes Supported

Supported Not Supported Envelope Sizes E120 and E120n Printer Models E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n E250d, e250dn, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn
Literal Name 3.875x7.5envelope 3.875x8.875envelope 4.125x9.5envelope 110x220envelope 162x229envelope 176x250envelope otherenvelope1 otherenvelope
1
Size (mm) 98.4 x 190.5 98.4 x 225.4 104.8 x 241.3 110 x 220 162 x 229 176 x 250 Other Other
Size (inches) 3.875 x 7.5 3.875 x 8.875 4.125 x 9.5 4.33 x 8.66 6.38 x 9.01 6.93 x 9.84
Size (points) [279 540] [279 639] [297 684] [312 624] [459 649] [499 708] [612 996] [841 842]
For other envelopes, the page is formatted to 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless a size is specified by your software program.
4-11
PostScript
The literal names in Table 4-4 are supported as PostScript emulation compatible operators. Table 4-4: Literal Names Supported
Supported Not Supported Literal Names Printer Models E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn
Literal Name monarcenvelope com10envelope dlenvelope c5envelope b5envelope
Compatible Literal Name 3.875x7.5envelope 4.125x9.5envelope 110x220envelope 162x229envelope 176x250envelope
Note: Duplexing is not supported on any envelope size. If duplex printing is requested and one of the envelope size operators is sent to the printer, duplexing is suspended until a paper size is requested that is supported for duplex printing.
E238, E240, E240n, E340, and E342n
E120 and E120n
4-12
PostScript
Envelope Tray Support

If manualfeed in statusdict and the ManualFeed page device parameter are false when the printer receives one of the envelopetray operators listed in Table 4-5: Envelopetray Operator Selections on page 4-13, the printer:
Sets the PageSize Policy to 0. Checks the active source to see if it matches the requested envelope size. If the sizes match, the envelope is fed from the active source. Note: The active source is the last source selected from the printer operator panel or data stream.
If the requested size and the size loaded in the active source do not match, the sources are searched in the order defined by the Priority array in the InputAttributes dictionary in the pagedevice dictionary. If the requested media size is not found by the previous search, the following search order is used: Envelope Feeder Multipurpose Feeder
If the requested size and type are not available from any automatic source, you are prompted to load the requested envelope size and type in the manual feed source. If the size is still not available, a configurationerror is issued and the print job is flushed.
If manualfeed or ManualFeed is true, the printer prompts you to load the requested size manually. If no manual feed exists on the printer, a rangecheck error message is generated. The envelope tray the printer selects when it receives an envelopetray operator is listed in Table 4-5. These operators are equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence: <</PageSize [x y] /ImagingBBox null /Policies<</PageSize 0>> >> setpagedevice where x y are the PageSize in points.
4-13
PostScript
Table 4-5: Envelopetray Operator Selections

Supported Not Supported Tray Operators E120 and E120n Printer Models E250d, E250dn, E240n, E340, and E450dn E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn
Operator 110x220envelopetray dlenvelopetray 162x229envelopetray c5envelopetray 176x250envelopetray b5envelopetray 3.875x7.5envelopetray monarcenvelopetray 3.875x8.875envelopetray 4.125x9.5envelopetray com10envelopetray otherenvelopetray
Tray Selected (Corresponding image size is set) tray with 110 x 220 size envelopes tray with 110 x 220 size envelopes tray with 162 x 229 size envelopes tray with 162 x 229 size envelopes tray with 176 x 250 size envelopes tray with 176 x 250 size envelopes tray with 3.875 x 7.5 size envelopes tray with 3.875 x 7.5 size envelopes tray with 3.875 x 8.875 size envelopes tray with 4.125 x 9.5 size envelopes tray with 4.125 x 9.5 size envelopes tray with other size envelopes
4-14
PostScript
Supplemental Operator Summary

To determine which operators your printer supports, see Table C-1 on page C-1.
appletalktype
appletalktype (string)
in statusdict, this string reflects the current value of the LocalTalkType device parameter from the %LocalTalk% device. The default string is LaserWriter. To change the type portion (appletalktype) of the AppleTalk network name and redefine the string, execute the following: /appletalktype (string) def When you redefine a string inside the normal server loop, it is reset to the default value at the end of the print job. When you define it outside the normal server loop, it is reset to the default value when the printer is switched to a printer language other than PostScript emulation or when a power-on reset occurs. Errors: rangecheck, stackoverflow, typecheck
buildtime
buildtime integer
returns the BuildTime system parameter, which is a timestamp that identifies the specific build of the PostScript emulation interpreter. Error: stackoverflow
byteorder
byteorder boolean
returns a boolean on the stack with the same value as the system parameter ByteOrder. Indicates the printer microprocessor native byte order. The boolean values indicate:
true false
low-order byte first high-order byte first
4-15
PostScript
checkpassword
integer checkpassword or (string) checkpassword
checks the passwords for both the SystemParamsPassword system parameter and the StartJobPassword system parameter stored in the printer. If the integer form is used, the integer is converted into a string before the password check occurs. A boolean is returned on the stack to indicate if the specified password matches either password. The boolean value can be:
true false
correct password incorrect password
After the boolean is returned, the printer waits 1 second before it continues processing. Errors: stackunderflow, typecheck Note: The password is defined as a 4-byte number.
currentfilenameextend
currentfilenameextend boolean
returns a boolean on the stack to indicate whether the extension should be automatically added to any filename. The boolean value is either:
true false
adds the extension does not add the extension
See Filename Extensions on page 6-10. Error: stackoverflow
currentmanualduplexmode
integer currentmanualduplexmode
queries the current value of the manual duplex mode. An integer is returned on the stack:
0 1 2
current job manual duplex mode is no manual duplex current job manual duplex mode is printing first sides of job current job manual duplex mode is printing second sides of job
4-16
PostScript
defaulttimeouts
defaulttimeouts job manualfeed wait
queries the user default settings of all timeouts. Three integers are returned on the stack: JobTimeout system parameter 0 disabled (default) 15...65535 seconds ManualFeedTimeout page device parameter 0 disabled 1...65535 seconds (default is device dependent) To find the default for your printer, see Table C-2 on page C-4. WaitTimeout system parameter 0 disabled 15...65535 seconds (default is 40 seconds) Error: stackoverflow
deletefile
filename deletefile
deletes the specified file from the disk. This operator is in systemdict. Errors: invalidfileaccess, ioerror, stackunderflow, typecheck, undefinedfilename Note: An undefinedfilename error occurs if the file does not exist.
4-17
PostScript
devcontrol
string integer devcontrol boolean
allows a host computer utility to manage resources on the flash or disk. It requires a string device name parameter, an integer command name parameter, and two command argument parameters. The device control operator performs a specified command on the specified device. The return values on the stack indicate:
true false
the command is successful the command is unsuccessful and returns an error code
Table 4-6: devcontrol Operator Parameters

Integer Command Name Parameter 1 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 19 20 20 21 22 23 24 27 Argument Parameter null null file null filename description password null password null filename password filename password password null password null filename password filename password null null null null devicename password filename password devicename null filename null null null null null null null null null file null Description Park disk heads Make contiguous flash file Set description of file Set device read/write password Set device write password Set file read/write password Set file write password Declare device read/write password Declare device write password Declare file read/write password Declare file write password Reset device password list Reset file password list Get device password Get file password Determine if device password is properly declared Determine if file password is properly declared Scan for bad block Abort bad block scan Quick bad block scan Flush the disk cache Be quiet when writing to disk
4-18
PostScript
Table 4-7: Unsuccessful devcontrol Parameter Error Codes

Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Meaning File system access has not been initialized Could not allocate file descriptor Some invalid argument was passed No such device Invalid access to file requested Argument too large (filename, buffer) Invalid file descriptor or filename Catch all error or device error Unable to allocate memory for buffer, data structure Device busy Device not currently mounted Attempt to perform illegal IO operation No space to update or create file Major change in file system for findnext() to function properly Corrupted file system on device Device already mounted Could not initialize file system Device not mounted No file entry located Bad file system on device Password required Aborted by callback
Errors: invalidaccess, rangecheck, typecheck
devdismount
device devdismount
dismounts the specified device by setting the Mounted device parameter for the specified device to false. This operator is in systemdict. Errors: invalidaccess, stackunderflow, undefinedfilename Note: An undefinedfilename error occurs when an invalid device name is used.
4-19
PostScript
devforall
proc scratchstring devforall
executes the specified proc procedure for each storage device after pushing a substring on the stack that is the portion of the scratch string containing the device name. This operator is in systemdict. Errors: invalidaccess, rangecheck, stackoverflow, stackunderflow, typecheck, undefined
devformat
devicename pages action devformat
formats (erases all data from) the specified device. This operator is in systemdict.
pages
Sets the LogicalSize device parameter for the specified device: 0 entire device is formatted 1,2,3 an ioerror occurs
action 1 is added to the action argument. The result is used for the
InitializeAction device parameter for the same device. A devformat on a flash device formats the entire device regardless of the LogicalSize specified. Errors: invalidaccess, ioerror, limitcheck, rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck, undefined, undefinedfilename Note: An invalidaccess error occurs if devformat is not executed through exitserver or startjob.
4-20
PostScript
devmount
device devmount boolean
sets the Mounted device parameter for the specified device to true. It also returns the value of the Mounted device parameter for the specified device. This operator is in systemdict. The boolean values indicate:
true false
device successfully mounted, or was already mounted device not mounted
If a device with the specified device name is not installed, an undefinedfilename error occurs. This operator may change the search order. See Device Search Order on page 6-12. Errors: invalidaccess, stackunderflow, undefinedfilename
devstatus
devicename devstatus false or devicename devstatus searchable writeable hasnames mounted removable searchorder free size true
returns on the stack the status of a specified device. This operator is in systemdict. A value of false is returned if the device is not present. If the device is present, five boolean values and three integers (see the following description) followed by a value of true are returned. The five boolean values are:
searchable true, if the device is included in the search order and is to be searched for
the file operators that do not specify a device name. Same as the value of the Searchable device parameter from the specified IODevice.
writeable true, if the device can be written to. This value is the same as the Writeable
device parameter from the specified IODevice.

hasnames true, if the device supports named files. This value is the same as the
HasNames device parameter from the specified IODevice.
4-21
PostScript
mounted true, if the device is mounted. This value is the same as the Mounted
device parameter from the specified IODevice.

removable true, if the device is removable and must be mounted before it is referenced. This value is the same as the Removable device parameter from the specified IODevice.
The three integers are:

searchorder
The position in the search order. This value is the same as the SearchOrder device parameter from the specified IODevice.
free
The number of free bytes on the device. This value is the same as the Free device parameter from the specified IODevice.
size
The total number of bytes on the device. This value is the same as the LogicalSize device parameter from the specified IODevice. Error: typecheck
diskonline
diskonline boolean
returns the value of the Writeable device parameter (which is a boolean) for the %disk1% IODevice. This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence: (%disk1%) currentdevparams /Writeable get Error: stackoverflow
4-22
PostScript
diskstatus
diskstatus free logicalsize
returns on the stack the following two integers: Number of pages that are free on the optional disk. The value of the Free device parameter from the %disk1% IODevice. Total number of pages (1024 bytes) that are on the optional disk. The value of the LogicalSize device parameter from the %disk1% IODevice. This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence:
(%disk1%) currentdevparams dup /Free get exch /LogicalSize get
displayoperatormsg
(string) displayoperatormsg
sets a custom paper message. The string parameter is used as a prompt string when a page prints. The string value can be any string up to 16 characters. The string is cleared at the end of a print job. Errors: stackunderflow, typecheck
doidlefonts
doidlefonts false
returns a constant boolean value of false. Error: stackoverflow
4-23
PostScript
dojamrecovery
dojamrecovery boolean
queries the user default setting of the Jam Recovery menu item. A boolean value is returned on the stack:
true false
reprint jammed page (Jam Recovery is set to On) (default) do not reprint jammed page (Jam Recovery is set to Off)
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence: currentpagedevice /ExitJamRecovery get Error: stackoverflow
doprinterrors
doprinterrors boolean
returns a boolean with the same value as the system parameter DoPrintErrors. It also indicates the current value of the Print PS Error printer setting. The DoPrintErrors system parameter must be present for the doprinterrors operator to be present. Error: stackoverflow
doret
doret integer
returns the PQET setting for the current print job. An integer value is returned on the stack:
0 1
Off On
Note: For printers that do not support PQET, doret returns a 0. This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence:
currentpagedevice /PostRenderingEnhanceDetails get /REValue get
4-24
PostScript
dostartpage
dostartpage boolean
returns a boolean with the same value as the system parameter DoStartPage. The DoStartPage system parameter must be present for the compatibility operator dostartpage to be present. Error: stackoverflow
dosysstart
dosysstart boolean
returns the current value of the StartupMode system parameter. A boolean value is returned:
true false
StartupMode set to 1 or 11 StartupMode other than 1 or 11
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence: currentsystemsparams /StartupMode get Error: stackoverflow
duplexer
duplexer boolean
queries if a duplex unit is installed. A boolean value is returned on the stack:

true false
duplex unit is installed duplex unit is not installed
Note: For printers that do not support duplexing, this value is always false. Error: stackoverflow
4-25
PostScript
duplexmode
duplexmode boolean
queries the current value for the Duplex page device parameter.
true false
printing mode is duplex printing mode is simplex
Note: For printers that do not support duplexing, this value is always false. This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence: currentpagedevice /Duplex get Error: stackoverflow
enginesync
enginesync boolean
indicates if the printer waits for the last page of a job to print before returning a Ctrl-D to the host computer. Error: stackoverflow
4-26
PostScript
file
filename access file file
creates a file object with specified filename and access. The access values are:
r w a r+ w+ a+
open the file for reading only create a file if one does not already exist, or truncate and overwrite it if it does exist. File is opened for writing only. create a file if one does not already exist or append it if it does exist. File is opened for writing only. open the file for reading and writing. An undefinedfilename error occurs if the file does not exist. create a file if it does not already exist, or truncate and overwrite if it does exist. File is opened for reading and writing. create a file if it does not exist or append it if it does exist. File is opened for reading and writing.
This operator is in systemdict. Errors: invalidfileaccess, ioerror, limitcheck, stackunderflow, typecheck, undefinedfilename Note: An undefinedfilename error occurs if the file does not exist.
filenameforall
pattern proc scratchstring filenameforall
lists all the files with names that match a specified pattern string, copies the filename for each of these files into a specified scratch string, and calls a specified proc procedure. This operator is in systemdict. Errors: ioerror, stackoverflow, stackunderflow, typecheck
fileposition
file fileposition position
indicates the current position on an open file. This operator is in systemdict. Errors: ioerror, stackunderflow, typecheck, undefinedfilename Note: An undefinedfilename error occurs if the file does not exist.
4-27
PostScript
firstside
firstside boolean
indicates whether the current imaging area is on the front side of the page.
true false
front side is currently being imaged back side is currently being imaged
fontnonzerowinding
boolean fontnonzerowinding
sets the winding rule for Type 1 fonts. No query operation is performed since the winding rule is reset to true at the beginning of each print job. The boolean value can be:
true false
non-zero winding used by the interpreter even or odd winding rule used by interpreter
hardwareiomode
hardwareiomode boolean
queries the user default setting of the Parallel Protocol menu item. This operator returns the value of the Parallel Protocol, either Standard or Fastbytes. An integer value is returned on the stack:
1 2
Parallel Fastbytes Off (Standard) Parallel Fastbytes On (Fastbytes)
idlefonts
idlefonts mark
supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019, 4029, and 4039. It is parsed and returns a mark on the stack. Error: stackoverflow
4-28
PostScript
ignoresize
See page 4-4.
initializedisk
pages action initializedisk
initializes the disk with the page count and action as integer arguments. The arguments set the (%disk1%) IO device parameters as follows: LogicalSize parameter is set to pages. If a value of 0 is set as pages, the entire disk is formatted. If a value of 1, 2, or 3 is set as pages, an ioerror is generated. InitializeAction parameter is set to action plus 1. Errors: invalidaccess, ioerror, rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
jobname
jobname (string)
identifies each print job selection. This string in statusdict queries and changes the current setting of the JobName user parameter. Originally, jobname is set to null. To query jobname: jobname or
currentuserparams /JobName get.
A string indicating the job name is returned on the stack. To change jobname: /jobname (string) def or
<< /JobName (string) >> setuserparams
where string is the new job name. Error: stackoverflow
4-29
PostScript
jobsource
jobsource (string)
indicates the current value of the CurInputDevice system parameter. A string is returned on the stack indicating the job source. Valid values are: %LocalTalk% %SerialA% %SerialB% %SerialC% %SerialD% %ParallelA% %ParallelB% %ParallelC% %ParallelD% %IR_A% %IR_B% %IR_C% %IR_D% %USB_A% %USB_B% %USB_C% %USB_D% %EtherTalkB% %EtherTalkC% %EtherTalkD% %TokenTalkB% %TokenTalkC% %TokenTalkD% %LexLinkB% %LexLinkC% %LexLinkD% %PrintServerB% %PrintServerC% %PrintServerD% %RemotePrinterB% %RemotePrinterC% %RemotePrinterD% %AppSocketB% %AppSocketC% %AppSocketD%
4-30
PostScript
%LPR_B% %LPR_C% %LPR_D% %UnknownDevice% This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence: currentsystemparams /CurInputDevice get Error: stackoverflow
jobtimeout
jobtimeout integer
queries the current user default setting for the JobTimeout parameter. An integer is returned on the stack: disabled 15...65355 seconds
0
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence: currentuserparams /JobTimeout get Error: stackoverflow
manualfeed
See page 4-8.
4-31
PostScript
manualfeedtimeout
/manualfeedtimeout integer def
is an integer key in statusdict that works with the ManualFeedTimeout page device parameter to determine the manualfeed timeout for a given page. If during a print job, manualfeedtimeout is defined as an integer value in statusdict, that value is used instead of the ManualFeedTimeout page device parameter. The value of the ManualFeedTimeout page device parameter and manualfeedtimeout key in statusdict are independent of each other; the value of one does not affect the value of the other. disabled 1...65355 seconds
0
An undefined error results if manualfeedtimeout is queried before the value is set. Errors: stackoverflow, undefined
newsheet
newsheet
causes the current page to start on the front side of a new sheet. Error: none
pagecount
pagecount integer
queries the value of the PageCount system parameter. An integer is returned on the stack indicating the current page count. This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence: currentsystemparams /PageCount get Error: stackoverflow
4-32
PostScript
pagesprinted
- pagesprinted
queries the number of pages of the current job submitted by the PostScript interpreter to the printer. Error: stackoverflow
papertray
See page 4-8.
printername
(string) printername (substring)
returns the value of the PrinterName system parameter that is defined by the setprintername operator. The value of the string defines the printer name. A maximum of 32 characters are returned on the stack. This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence: currentsystemparams /PrinterName get Errors: rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
product
product (string)
queries the name of the product that is defined in statusdict. A string is returned on the stack indicating the name of the product. The product string in systemdict cannot be changed. To change this product string in statusdict: /product (string) def Error: stackoverflow
4-33
PostScript
PS2fonts
- PS2fonts
redefines the following PostScript resident fonts to match the character designs and metrics defined in PostScript Level 2. The font names in parentheses are the equivalent PostScript 3 font names for the associated PostScript Level 2 names.
Antique Olive Antique Olive Bold Antique Olive Italic Letter Gothic Letter Gothic Bold Letter Gothic Italic Marigold Univers Bold (Letter Gothic Slanted) (Antique Olive Roman)
Error: none
PS3fonts
- PS3fonts
restores the font compatibility to PostScript 3. Error: none
quiet
quiet integer
queries the PowerSave page device parameter. An integer is returned on the stack:
0
Power Saver is Off
1 to 120 or 1 to 240 (Model specific)
Number of minutes elapsed after last page prints before Power Saver is invoked. Power Saver reduces power consumption when the printer is idle. When quiet is enabled, it takes longer to print the first page after the printer has been idle.
4-34
PostScript
Note: Some printer models released in the year 2000 or later designated as Energy Star printers cannot have Power Saver disabled. This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence: currentpagedevice /PowerSave get Error: stackoverflow
ramsize
ramsize integer
queries the current setting of the RamSize system parameter. An integer is returned on the stack showing total RAM in bytes. This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence: currentsystemparams /RamSize get Error: stackoverflow
realformat
realformat boolean
returns a boolean with the same value as the RealFormat system parameter. It indicates the printer microprocessor native real number representation. A query determines if the printer real number representation matches the application real number representation and compensates if necessary. Error: stackoverflow
renamefile
oldfilename newfilename renamefile
renames the oldfilename to the newfilename. This operator is in systemdict. Errors: invalidfileaccess, ioerror, stackunderflow, typecheck, undefinedfilename Note: An undefinedfilename error occurs if the file does not exist.
4-35
PostScript
resolution
resolution integer
queries the resolution for the current print job. An integer is returned on the stack: 300 dpi is set to On 600 600 dpi is set to On 1200 1200 dpi is set to On
300
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence: currentpagedevice /HWResolution get 0 get Error: stackoverflow
revision
revision integer
queries the Revision system parameter. An integer is returned on the stack to indicate the revision level. Error: stackoverflow
4-36
PostScript
sccbatch
channel sccbatch baud option
returns the user default settings for serial communication parameters.

channel has the following valid integer values: 9 25
If only one serial interface port is available on the printer, both 9 and 25 return the same values. Baud and option values are returned on the stack.
baud returns the value of the Baud menu item. option returns an 8 bit value as defined in the following illustration:
7
Stop Bits
3
Flow Control
1
Parity
Data Style
Stop Bits This bit is always set to zero. Data Style

01 11
7 data bits 8 data bits
Flow Control
000 001 101 110 111
XON/XOFF DTR/DSR DTR XON/XOFF/DTR XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR
Parity
00 01 10 11
ignore odd even none
Errors: rangecheck, stackoverflow, stackunderflow, typecheck
4-37
PostScript
sccinteractive
channel sccinteractive baud options
provided for parsing compatibility purposes. A value of 0 is returned. Errors: invalidaccess, rangecheck, stackoverflow, stackunderflow, typecheck
setcoverpage
boolean setcoverpage
specifies a cover page for a fax job. The default value is false. The boolean values indicate:
true false
the current page that is processing is moved to the first page of the current fax job the current page that is processing is unaffected
Errors: stackunderflow, typecheck
setdefaulttimeouts
job manualfeed wait setdefaulttimeouts
changes the values for all timeouts. Valid values are: JobTimeout system parameter disabled 15...65355 seconds
0
ManualFeedTimeout page device parameter

0
disabled
1...65355 seconds
WaitTimeout system parameter disabled 15...65355 seconds

0
Errors: invalidaccess, rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
4-38
PostScript
setdoidlefonts
boolean setdoidlefonts
is parsed and discarded. A boolean value is required. Errors: stackunderflow, typecheck
setdojamrecovery
boolean setdojamrecovery
changes the user default setting of the Jam Recovery menu item. The changes are not effective until the end of the print job. The boolean values indicate:
true false
reprint jammed page (Jam Recovery is set to On) do not reprint jammed page (Jam Recovery is set to Off or Auto [model dependent])
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence: %Go into exitserver or startjob context << /ExitJamRecovery boolean >> setpagedevice Errors: invalidaccess, stackunderflow, typecheck
setdoprinterrors
boolean setdoprinterrors
sets the system parameter DoPrintErrors to the value of boolean. It also indicates the current value of the Print PS Error printer setting. The DoPrintErrors system parameter must be present for the setdoprinterrors operator to be present. The boolean values indicate:
true false Print PS Error is set to On Print PS Error is set to Off
Errors: invalidaccess, stackunderflow, typecheck
4-39
PostScript
setdoret
integer setdoret
changes the PQET setting for the next page through the end of the print job. The integer values allowed are:
0 1 2 3 4
turn PQET Off turn PQET On turn PQET On turn PQET On turn PQET On
The value you select for PQET returns to the user default setting when the print job is finished. This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence: <<//PostRenderingEnhanceDetails << /REValue integer >> >> setpagedevice Errors: rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
setdostartpage
boolean setdostartpage
sets the DoStartPage system parameter to the value of boolean. The DoStartPage system parameter must be present for the setdostartpage operator to be present. For more information, see DoStartPage on page 4-68. Errors: invalidaccess, stackunderflow, typecheck
4-40
PostScript
setdosysstart
boolean setdosysstart
modifies the value of the StartupMode system parameter.

true false
StartupMode set to 1 StartupMode set to 0 (default)
If true, the printer executes a Sys/Start file from flash or disk when the PostScript emulation interpreter is initialized. If no flash or disk is installed, no action occurs. If a Sys/Start file is on both flash and disk, the search order for the devices determines which one is executed. If false, the printer does not execute a Sys/Start file. Errors: invalidaccess, stackunderflow, typecheck
setduplexmode
boolean setduplexmode
sets the value of the Duplex page device parameter for the current print job. sets printing mode to duplex false sets printing mode to simplex At the start of the next print job, the value is reset to the user default setting.
true
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence: << /Duplex boolean >> setpagedevice Errors: configurationerror, stackunderflow, typecheck Notes: If simplex printing is requested between the front side and back side of a sheet, a blank back side is printed and information for the back side is printed on the front side of the next sheet. For printers that do not support duplexing, this value is always set to false.
4-41
PostScript
setenginesync
boolean setenginesync
changes the setting that indicates whether the printer waits for the last page of a job to print before returning a Ctrl-D to the host computer. The boolean values indicate:
true false
printer waits for the last page of the job to print printer does not wait for the last page of the job to print
Errors: invalidaccess, stackunderflow, typecheck
setethernetaddress
string setethernetaddress
sets the EthernetAddress parameter in the EtherTalk communication parameter set. The EthernetAddress parameter is the Ethernet address of the Ethernet internal print server (also called an internal network adapter or INA). The string value can be any string up to 17 characters. Errors: stackunderflow, typecheck
setfilenameextend
boolean setfilenameextend
sets whether the extension should be automatically added to any filename.

true false
adds the extension does not add the extension
The default setting is true. See Filename Extensions on page 6-10. Errors: stackunderflow, typecheck
4-42
PostScript
setfileposition
file position setfileposition
moves the read pointer in an open file to the new specified file position. This is defined as the number of bytes from the start of the file. The next read operation starts at the new file position. This operator is in systemdict. Errors: ioerror, stackunderflow, typecheck, undefinedfilename Note: An undefinedfilename error occurs if the file does not exist.
sethardwareiomode
integer sethardwareiomode
is parsed and discarded. In addition, one integer is removed from the stack. It supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019, 4029, and 4039. Errors: invalidaccess, stackunderflow, typecheck
setidlefonts
mark... setildefonts
supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019, 4029, and 4039. It is parsed and pulls items from the stack until a mark is reached. Error: unmatchedmark
setignoresize
See page 4-4.
4-43
PostScript
setjobtimeout
integer setjobtimeout
changes the value of the JobTimeout user parameter for the next page through the end of the print job. Valid integers are: disabled 15...65355 seconds
0
The value returns to the JobTimeout system parameter setting at the end of the print job. This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence: <</JobTimeout integer >> setuserparams Errors: rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
setmanualduplexmode
int setmanualduplexmode
changes the current jobs setting of manualduplexmode. Valid int values are:
0 1 2
no manual duplexing printing the first sides of the job printing the second sides of the job.
When printing second sides of the job is specified, a load manual duplex side 2 operator intervention condition will occur after the last page of the first sides is printed, and prior to the first page of the second sides being printed. While printing the second sides the printers available paper sources are restricted to the automatic tray (tray1) and the manual paper feeder for the remainder of the job or until the manual duplex mode value is changed. Error: stackunderflow, typecheck
setpapertray
See page 4-9.
4-44
PostScript
setprintername
string setprintername
changes the PrinterName system parameter to the value of the string. The string value can be any string up to 32 characters. This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence: << /PrinterName (string) >> setsystemparams Errors: invalidaccess, limitcheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
setquiet
integer setquiet
changes the user default setting of the PowerSave page device parameter. The following integers are valid: Power Saver Off 1 to 120 or 1 to 240 (Model specific) Number of minutes elapsed after last page prints before Power Saver is invoked.
0
Any changes made by this operator are not active until the end of the print job. Note: Some printer models released in the year 2000 or later designated as Energy Star printers cannot have Power Saver disabled. This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence: %Go into exitserver or startjob context << /PowerSave integer >> setpagedevice Errors: rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
4-45
PostScript
setresolution
integer setresolution
changes the resolution for the current print job and discards unprinted data. See your printer documentation for a list of supported resolutions. The following integers are valid:
300 600 1200
300 dpi is set to On 600 dpi is set to On 1200 dpi is set to On
Notes: For some printers, the resolution value returns to the user default setting for the Print Resolution menu item at the end of the print job. The printer waits for the paper path to clear before changing the resolution. If the resolution is changed for the back side of a duplexed sheet, the printer ejects a blank back page, changes the resolution, and prints the information for the page where the resolution was changed on the front side of the next sheet. This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence: << /HWResolution [xres yres] >> setpagedevice where xres = yres. Errors: rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
setsccbatch
integer integer integer setsccbatch
supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019, 4029, and 4039. It is parsed, and three integers are removed from the stack and discarded. Error: stackunderflow
4-46
PostScript
setsccinteractive
channel baud options setsccinteractive
supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019, 4029, and 4039. It is parsed, and three integers are removed from the stack and discarded. Errors: invalidaccess, rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
setsoftwareiomode
integer setsoftwareiomode
supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019, 4029, and 4039. It is parsed, and an integer is removed from the stack and discarded. This command validates that the integer value provided is an Adobe-supported value of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 100, and then discards the operator and value. Errors: stackunderflow, typecheck, invalidaccess, rangecheck
settumble
boolean settumble
sets the value of the Tumble page device parameter for the current print job.
true false
sets the tumble setting to short-edge binding (back side of the duplexed page prints upside down in relation to the front side) sets the tumble setting to long-edge binding (back side of the duplexed page prints in the same orientation as the front) (default)
No error is generated if a duplex unit is not installed. Notes: At the start of the next print job, the setting for tumble is reset to the user default setting for the Duplex Bind menu item. If tumble is changed between the printing of a front and back side of a duplexed sheet, a blank back side is not ejected. This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence: << /Tumble boolean >> setpagedevice Errors: stackunderflow, typecheck
4-47
PostScript
setuserdiskpercent
integer setuserdiskpercent
removes an integer from the stack and discards it. Errors: stackunderflow, rangecheck, invalidaccess, typecheck
softwareiomode
softwareiomode 0
supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019, 4029, and 4039. It is parsed and returns a 0 (zero, Binary Mode Off) on the stack. Software IO mode defines the data stream you are using. Errors: stackoverflow, stackunderflow
tumble
tumble boolean
returns the current value of the Tumble page device parameter. the back side of the duplexed page prints upside down in relation to the front side (short-edge binding) false the back side of the duplexed page prints in the same orientation as the front side (long-edge binding) (default)
true
Note: No error is generated if a duplex unit is not installed. This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence: currentpagedevice /Tumble get Errors: stackunderflow, stackoverflow
4-48
PostScript
userdiskpercent
userdiskpercent 0
returns a 0 (zero) on the stack. Errors: stackoverflow, invalidaccess
waittimeout
waittimeout integer
queries the current value for the WaitTimeout user parameter. An integer is returned on the stack: disabled 15...65355 seconds
0
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence: currentuserparams /WaitTimeout get Error: stackoverflow
4-49
PostScript
Page Device Parameters

In addition to the page device parameters described in Section 4.11 of the PostScript Language Reference Manual (Third Edition) by Adobe Systems, Inc., the following page device parameters are used by setpagedevice and currentpagedevice. Certain parameters, such as Policies, Priority, and ManualFeed are listed here since more information about the parameters is given in Table 4-8 than in the PostScript Language Reference Manual (Third Edition) by Adobe Systems, Inc. To determine which parameters and default values your printer supports, see Table C-2 on page C-4.
Table 4-8: Page Device Parameters

Key BeginPage Collate Type procedure boolean Definition Executes at the beginning of each page and returns an integer which indicates how many times showpage has been invoked. Indicates if the printer is set to collate multi-copy print jobs. If a print job consists of three pages and two copies are requested, then the collated output is 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3. The non-collated output is 1, 1, 2, 2, 3, 3. DeferredMediaSelection boolean Determines if the printer uses the printers own internal algorithms or Adobe PostScript algorithms to select print media. The following values are supported: True False DeviceRenderingInfo dictionary Uses the printers algorithms Uses Adobe PostScript algorithms (default)
Specifies the following unique printer rendering parameters: Screening, TonerSaver, PictureGrade, ImageEnhancement, PrintDarkness, AutoMediaType, EdgeToEdge, DefaultPoliciesPageSize, SubstituteSize, Type, ColorCorrection, ImageBrightness, ImageContrast, and PrintQuality. Screening controls which halftone dictionary is installed at the beginning of each print job. The value is set at the start of a job according to the print quality settings selected from the printer operator panel. The following names are valid: ColorGrade PictureGrade IET IETImagesOnly 600 dpi printing 300 dpi, 600 dpi, or 1200 dpi printing with PictureGrade On 1200 Image Quality printing or 2400 Print Quality 1200 Image Quality printing for images; 600 dpi printing for text and graphics or maps to IET and sets Print Quality to either 1200 Image Quality or 2400 Print Quality IETPictureGrade 1200 Image Quality printing with PictureGrade On None 300 dpi or 600 dpi printing with PictureGrade Off
4-50
PostScript
Table 4-8: Page Device Parameters (Continued)

Key DeviceRenderingInfo (continued) Type dictionary Definition TonerSaver is a boolean that controls the Toner Saver feature. True False Notes: A PostScript job can override the effect of Screening by using sethalftone, setscreen, or setcolorscreen operators, unless Screening is set to IET or IETPictureGrade. A PostScript job can enter or exit IET or PictureGrade using the Screening parameter in a setpagedevice call. This does not change the user default printer settings for print quality, which are read and used by the interpreter for the next print job unless the setpagedevice is issued in a startjob context. If Screening is set to IET or IETPictureGrade, TonerSaver is set to False. This is true for all models except the Optra C710, Optra M410, Optra T family, and Optra W810. PictureGrade is an integer that provides compatibility with previous Lexmark printer drivers. PictureGrade works in conjunction with Screening. If Screening is set to None or PictureGrade, the values for PictureGrade affect Screening in the following way: 0 1 Changes Screening to None Changes Screening to PictureGrade Starts the printer toner saver mechanism Stops the printer toner saver mechanism
If Screening is set to IET or IETPictureGrade, the values for PictureGrade affect Screening in the following way: 0 1 Changes Screening to IET Changes Screening to IETPictureGrade
For more information on Screening, see page 4-49. ImageEnhancement is an integer that provides compatibility with previous Lexmark printer drivers. ImageEnhancement works in conjunction with Screening. If Screening is set to None or IET, the values for ImageEnhancement affect Screening in the following way: 0 1 Changes Screening to None Changes Screening to IET
If Screening is set to PictureGrade or IETPictureGrade, the values for ImageEnhancement affect Screening in the following way: 0 1 Changes Screening to PictureGrade Changes Screening to IETPictureGrade
For more information on Screening, see page 4-49. PrintDarkness specifies the value of the Print Darkness printer setting. Legal values are: 1 2 3 4 5 Lightest Lighter Normal Darker Darkest
4-51
PostScript

Key DeviceRenderingInfo (continued) Type dictionary Definition AutoMediaType is a boolean that controls the MediaType entries in the InputAttributes dictionary in the pagedevice dictionary. True MediaType entries in the InputAttributes dictionaries cannot be modified by the user. The values are confined to values known by the printer operating system. MediaType entries in the InputAttributes dictionaries can be modified by the user.
False
EdgeToEdge is a boolean which determines if there should be an unprintable area on the page. True False Print to the edge of the paper. Do not print to the edge of the paper (default).
DefaultPoliciesPageSize is an integer which equals the PageSize parameter in the Policies dictionary unless PageSize is set to 23; in that case, DefaultPoliciesPageSize equals the PageSize parameter value before it was set to 23 or equals 0 if the PageSize parameter is initialized to 23. For more information on PageSize, see page 4-59. SubstituteSize allows for the substitution of A4- and Letter-size print materials, and A3- and 11x17 inch-size print materials for each other when one size is not installed. Note: For size substitution to occur, the substituted print material and the requested print material must be of the same paper type. The following values are supported: /Off /A4-Letter No size substitution is performed. If A4 is requested but not installed and Letter is installed, Letter is substituted for A4. Or, if Letter is requested but not installed and A4 is installed, A4 is substituted for Letter. If A3 is requested but not installed and 11x17 is installed, 11x17 is substituted for A3. Or, if 11x17 is requested but not installed and A3 is installed, A3 is substituted for 11x17.
/A3-11x17
/All Both size substitutions are permitted. Note: When the size substitution occurs, the page is scaled to the size of the requested print material. The DefaultPoliciesPageSize value is used as the effective policy when: The SubstituteSize parameter is not set to /Off and a size substitution cannot be performed. The PageSize parameter in the Policies dictionary is set to 23. Notes: If SubstituteSize is set to /Off, the effective policy is the value of PageSize. If SubstituteSize is not set to /Off and a size substitution is possible, the effective policy is 3.
4-52
PostScript

Key DeviceRenderingInfo (continued) Type dictionary Definition Type is a constant value. To find the value of Type for your printer, see Table C-2 on page C-4. ColorCorrection is a null, string, or name object that controls the appearance of colors. The value is determined by the user default setting in the Color Correction menu item. The following values are supported: -null/Display /Vivid ImageBrightness is an integer that controls the brightness of images. The following values are supported: -100 ... 100 0 (default) ImageContrast is an integer that controls the contrast of images. The following values are supported: -100 ... 100 0 (default) PrintQuality is an integer that controls the print quality settings. The following values are supported: 0 1 2 3 Duplex boolean Quick Print Normal Presentation 1200 Image Q
Indicates if printed pages are duplexed (printed on both sides of the page) or simplexed (printed on one side of the page). True False Print duplex mode Print simplex mode (default)
EndPage
procedure
Executes at the end of each printed page to indicate if the contents of raster memory should be printed. EndPage gets two integer arguments through the operand stack: one is a count of the previous showpage executions and the other is the code that indicates the execution condition. The code is 0 (zero) if it is called from showpage, 1 if it is called from copypage, and 2 if it is called during device deactivation. The procedure must return a boolean value.
ExitJamRecovery
boolean
Indicates the setting of the Jam Recovery menu item. True False
Jam Recovery is set to On. Jam Recovery is set to Off or Auto (model specific).
HWResolution
integer
Indicates the resolution of the printer (in pixels per inch) along the x and y dimensions of the device space. x and y are always equal. The following resolutions are supported: 300 dpi 600 dpi 1200 dpi
4-53
PostScript

Key ImagingBBox Type array or null Definition Defines a rectangle that lies within the boundaries of the page specified by PageSize. ImagingBBox may be either a value of null or an array of four numbers. A value of null indicates the bounding box is the largest imageable area possible for a given page size. InputAttributes dictionary Contains information about the various installed input sources. There is a numeric key, which is a dictionary, for each installed input source. Input sources The numeric keys are: Key 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Source Tray 1 Tray 2 Envelope feeder Tray 3 Multipurpose feeder Tray 4 Tray 5
The entries in each input source dictionary describe the media that is currently available in the source. The allowable keys in each source dictionary are: PageSize MediaColor MediaType (See AutoMediaType on page 4-51.) MediaWeight MatchAll InputLocation Read only string which indicates the physical tray corresponding to the source.
4-54
PostScript

Key InputAttributes (continued) Type dictionary Definition Mode is a key within the InputAttributes dictionary, and its value is a name that determines the mapping of the physical input sources to the input sources listed in InputAttributes. The allowable values are: /Default /Optra Printers default source assignment Specifies the following ordering used in InputAttributes: 0 - Tray 1 1 - Tray 2 2 - Envelope Feeder 1 or Multipurpose feeder 3 - Tray 3 4 - Multipurpose feeder 5 - Tray 4 6 - Tray 5 7 - Feeder 2 Specifies the following ordering used by the HewlettPackard Companys printers: 0 - Tray 1 1 - Tray 2 2 - Envelope Feeder 1 or Multipurpose feeder 3 - Multipurpose feeder (see Note) 4 - Tray 3 5 - Tray 4 6 - Tray 5 7 - Feeder 2
/HPLJFamily1
Note: Values 3 and 4 for the Hewlett Packard Companys LaserJet printers are switched relative to the /Optra values 3 and 4. Priority is an array of integers that describes the order in which the input sources are searched. The first integer represents the highest priority source and so on. If no array exists or none of the matching sources is in the array, then the priority order is arbitrary. Install Jog procedure integer Installs device dependent parameters into the graphics state. This procedure can modify any parameter in the graphics state. Specifies which Offset Pages setting is used. The following values are supported: 0 1 2 3 Offset Pages is disabled. Offset Pages is disabled. Offset Pages is set to Between Jobs. Offset Pages is set to Between Copies.
Offset refers to stacking entire print jobs or copies of the same print job in two separate groups in an output bin.
4-55
PostScript

Key ManualFeed Type boolean Definition Indicates if the current (or active) source is a manual source. The following values are supported: True False Manual feed Automatic feed
If ManualFeed is set to True, and a change is made to PageSize, MediaWeight, MediaColor, or MediaType parameters, no matching occurs. It is assumed that the correct page is fed. Note: ManualFeed is initialized at the start of each print job according to the default paper source set by the operator panel menus or through PJL. If the default paper source is a manual source, ManualFeed is set to True. If the default paper source is not a manual paper source, ManualFeed is set to False. ManualFeedTimeout integer Indicates the amount of time that the printer waits for you to manually load a sheet of paper.
infinite wait or no timeout
If the timeout expires, a timeout error is generated. This is initialized at the start of each PostScript emulation job to the value of the Feed Timeout menu item value. MediaColor MediaPosition string name or null integer Specifies the color of the current media. Specifies the tray to select, if possible, whether it is the best match or not. Policies may be consulted to determine the selection. For example, assume there is legal-size paper in Tray 1 and letter-size paper in all the other trays, and the Policy for the PageSize page device parameter is 1. The command << /PageSize [612 1008]/MediaPosition 1 >> setpagedevice selects Tray 2 even though Tray 1 is a perfect match, because the PageSize Policy of 1 allows the PageSize to be ignored. MediaType MediaWeight NumCopies Nup string name or null integer or null integer or null boolean Indicates the type of the current media. The value of the string is arbitrary and may describe any attribute not already defined by size, color, or weight. Specifies the weight of the current media in g/m2. The value is either null or a number. Specifies the number of copies of each page that should be printed. If the value is null, the current value of #copies determines the number of copies to print. Determines if Nup is On or Off. Use the Nup function to print multiple page images on a single page, where the value of N refers to the number of pages. For example, 2-Up means two page images are printed on one page. True False Nup is On and the NupDetails parameters are active. Nup is Off.
For some printers, the value of Nup is set through the Multipage Printing menu item. For more information about multipage printing (Nup), see your printer documentation.
4-56
PostScript

Key NupDetails Type dictionary Definition Describes the specific actions performed when the Nup function is active. Rows is an integer that specifies the number of rows to print on a portrait-oriented page. Columns is an integer that specifies the number of columns to print on a portraitoriented page. Rows and Columns are limited to these values: Rows 2 3 2 3 3 4 4 Columns 1 1 2 2 3 3 4
Orientation specifies the orientation of the individual Nup pages on the printed page. Supported values are: 0 1 Portrait Landscape
Orientation determines the positioning of multiple page images on pages printed using NupDetails. You may choose one of four different orders. The positioning of page images depends on whether they are sent to the printer as portrait or landscape images. The following examples show the result of using each setting on a 2-row, 2-column page: Horizontal Landscape Portrait
Page 2 Page 4 Page Page 2 1 Page Page 4 3
Vertical Landscape Portrait

Page 3 Page 1 Page 3 Page 1 Page 4 Page 4 Page 2 Page 2 Page Page 3 1 Page Page 4 2
Reverse Horizontal Landscape Portrait

Page 1 Page 3 Page Page 1 2 Page Page 3 4
Page 1
Page 3
Reverse Vertical Landscape Portrait

Page Page 1 3 Page Page 2 4
Page 2
Page 4
4-57
PostScript

Key NupDetails (continued) Type dictionary Definition Border specifies the type of border to draw around the individual Nup pages. Supported values are: 0 1 No border A solid black line
Order is an integer that specifies how the Nup pages are placed on the printed page. Supported values are as follows, with first the value, the orientation, and the description: 0 1 2 3 H The first page is placed at the upper left corner of the printed page and subsequent pages are placed across and then down. V The first page is placed at the upper left corner of the printed page and subsequent pages are placed down and then across. RH The first page is placed at the upper right corner of the printed page and subsequent pages are placed across and then down. RV The first page is placed at the upper right corner of the printed page and subsequent pages are placed down and then across.
Type is a constant value. To find the value of Type for your printer, see Table C-2 on page C-4. LandscapeOverride is a boolean which specifies the orientation of Nup pages. Supported values are: Orientation is specified by the PageSize parameter. Orientation is assumed to be Landscape regardless of the orientation specified by the PageSize parameter. Note: The PostScript emulation interpreter has to know the orientation of Nup pages to position the pages correctly on a hostpage. However, during the translation process, many landscape pages are created in portrait orientation by using the PageSize parameter. Then, the page is rotated to create the appearance of landscape orientation. When this happens, the PostScript emulation interpreter cannot place the Nup page correctly on the hostpage unless the PageSize parameter is set correctly. False True
4-58
PostScript

Key OutputAttributes Type dictionary Definition Contains information about the output bin targets. There is a numeric key, which is a dictionary, for each installed output bin. OutputType and OutputLocation are the allowable keys in each output dictionary. OutputType is used in the search algorithm to determine which output bin is used as the exit path. The numeric keys are: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Standard Output Bin or Top Output Bin Optional Output Bin 1 or Rear Output Bin Optional Output Bin 2 Optional Output Bin 3 Optional Output Bin 4 Optional Output Bin 5 Optional Output Bin 6 Optional Output Bin 7 Optional Output Bin 8 Optional Output Bin 9 Optional Output Bin 10
OutputType fields can be assigned strings to specify the output destination. For example: << /OutputAttributes << 0 << /OutputType (Standard Bin) >> >> >> setpagedevice << /OutputAttributes << 1 << /OutputType (Optional Output Bin 1 Exit) >> >> >> setpagedevice For more information, see OutputType on page 4-58. OutputLocation key is a read-only string that represents the name of the associated destination. The OutputAttributes dictionary contains a Priority Array. If an OutputType string does not match, the priority array is searched in order for a valid output bin. The initial value of the priority array is set at the beginning of a job and is equal to the value of the menu item for OutputBin. The array can be changed using this setpagedevice operator: << /OutputAttributes << /Priority [ 1 0 ] >> >> setpagedevice This command gives the Optional Output Bin 1 (1) a higher priority than the Standard Bin (0). Once the command is issued, if no match is found for the OutputType string, the paper exits into the standard output bin. OutputPage boolean Specifies if pages are actually printed. Supported values are: True False OutputType string Job is processed as usual (default). No page is printed, but all other job processing occurs.
Specifies the output bin destination for the current page. If the destination is not null, setpagedevice compares it with the OutputType values in the OutputAttributes dictionary during the search algorithm. If a match is found, this output bin is the target output for the current page. Assigns or names a page device by using a string parameter. This is used by the findcolorrendering operator.
PageDeviceName
string name or null
4-59
PostScript

Key PageSize Type array Definition Specifies the size (width and height) of the current page in 1/72 inch units. A value of [0 0] is assumed to be the lower left corner of the physical page and [width height] is the upper right corner. Uses entries to describe the actions to perform when a particular function cannot be completed. The entries are as follows: PageSize is an integer that specifies what recovery action to use when PageSize cannot be matched with any available media (paper, envelope, or other print materials). The actions are: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Generate a configurationerror. (default) Ignore the requested PageSize. Interact with a human operator or print manager. Select the next larger or smaller available media and adjust the page to fit. Select the next larger available media and adjust the page to fit. Select the next larger or smaller available media, but do not adjust the page. Select the next larger available media, but do not adjust the page. Disable media selection. Implement the requested PageSize on the previously selected media without making adjustments. The way the image is positioned on the media is printer-dependent and may result in part of the image being clipped. If the SubstituteSize parameter from the DeviceRenderingInfo dictionary is set to Off, the effective policy executed is the value of the DefaultPageSizePolicy key in the DeviceRenderingInfo dictionary. If the SubstituteSize parameter from the DeviceRenderingInfo dictionary is set to a value other than Off and an installed source has installed media which may be substituted for the requested media, the effective policy executed is 3. If the SubstituteSize parameter from the DeviceRenderingInfo dictionary is set to a value other than Off and a media substitution cannot be made, the effective policy executed is the value of the DefaultPageSizePolicy key in the DeviceRenderingInfo dictionary.
Policies
dictionary
23
PolicyNotFound is an integer that specifies which recovery action to use when a requested feature other than PageSize cannot be matched with any key in the Policies dictionary. The actions are: 0 Generate a configurationerror. 1 Ignore the requested feature (default). 2 Interact with a person or print manager. PolicyReport is a procedure that is called when a successful setpagedevice is finished. The procedure consults policies to process unsatisfied feature requests if needed. Default value is {pop}. PostRenderingEnhance boolean Always True to indicate that PostRenderingEnhanceDetails is enabled.
4-60
PostScript

Key PostRenderingEnhance Details Type dictionary Definition Describes enhancements that are made to the output after the page has been held in memory. REValue is an integer that specifies the current value of the PQET menu item. Supported values are: 0 1 to 4
PQET is Off. PQET is On (default is 1).
Type is a constant value. To find the value of Type for your printer, see PostRenderingEnhanceDetails on page C-8. PowerSave integer A value of 1120 or 1240 (model specific) indicates the number of minutes that elapses after the last page prints and before the Power Saver feature is invoked. A value of 0 (zero) indicates the Power Saver feature is turned Off on some printer models. Note: Some printer models released in the year 2000 or later designated as Energy Star printers cannot have Power Saver disabled. This value is initialized at the start of each PostScript emulation job to the value of the Power Saver menu item. Note: This parameter can only be modified within a system administration job. ProcessColorModel name or string Specifies the color model to use for rendering process colors in the printer. Supported values are: DeviceGray DeviceRGB DeviceCMYK DeviceCMY Punch integer Requests holes to be punched in the output page. The format for setting the Punch key is: <</Punch n>> setpagedevice where n is one of the following values: 0 3 SlipSheet integer Do not punch holes in the output page. Punch holes in the output page.
Specifies where blank separator sheets should be inserted in the output. Supported values are: 0 1 2 3 Do not insert separator sheets. Insert a separator sheet at device deactivation. Insert a separator sheet at the end of the print job. Insert a separator sheet at the end of each set in a multicopy job. If Collate is set to True, a set consists of one copy of each page of the document. For example, if a print job is five pages long, a set is one copy of pages one to five. If Collate is set to False, a set is all the copies of a single page of the job. For example, if a print job is three copies of a five page job, a set is three copies of the first page. Insert a separator sheet after each showpage or copypage.
4-61
PostScript

Key SlipSheetDetails Type dictionary Definition Specifies the following two unique separator sheet parameters: SlipSheetSource and Type. SlipSheetSource is an integer type parameter which identifies the source used for separator sheets. Supported values are: Null 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Use current source (default) Tray 1 Tray 2 Envelope Feeder Tray 3 Multipurpose feeder Tray 4 Tray 5
The key is found in the DeviceRenderingInfo dictionary within pagedevice. It can be altered using a setpagedevice operator. /SlipSheetDetails << /Type 96 /SlipSheetSource n>> >> setpagedevice Type is a constant value. To find the value of Type for your printer, see Table C-2 on page C-4. Staple integer Specifies whether to staple the current print job. Supported values are: 0 1 2 3 4 Do not staple the print job. Staple each set in the front position. Staple each set in the rear position. Staple each set according to the Auto setting. Staple each set in the dual position.
The format for setting the Staple key is: <</Staple n>> setpagedevice TraySwitch boolean Indicates tray linking is always active. When the media in one input source is depleted, other input sources are searched to determine if the same media can be found in another source. If another source is found, the alternate source is selected. The media in both input sources must be the same size and type for tray linking to occur.
4-62
PostScript

Key Tumble Type boolean Definition Indicates the orientation of the second side of a duplexed page with respect to the first side. Supported values are: True False UniversalDetails dictionary Causes pages to print as if they are to be bound across the top of the page (image is rotated 180 on the back side of the page) Causes pages to print as if they are to be side bound (as in a book)
Controls the variable Universal paper size feature. The entries are as follows: Type is a constant value. To find the value of Type for your printer, see Table C-2 on page C-4. PageSize is an array of two numbers (real or integer) that defines the x and y values (in points) for Universal. Orientation is an integer that defines how the Universal paper will be fed through the printer. Supported values are: 0 1 Paper is fed short edge first. Paper is fed long edge first.
Prompt defines a string to be displayed on the operator panel when the printer prompts a user to load Universal.
4-63
PostScript
Interpreter Parameters
This section describes the PostScript emulation interpreter parameters. There are three types of interpreter parameters:
User parameters System parameters Device parameters
To determine which parameters your printer supports, see Appendix C: PostScript Support on page C-1.
User Parameters
The following user parameters are used by setuserparams and currentuserparams. If a value is requested that is not within the range for the requested parameter, the minimum (or maximum) value is used. If a setuserparams value does not match the type of the specified parameter, a typecheck error occurs. If a parameter is not supported by the printer, it is ignored. An attempt to change the value of a read-only parameter has no effect on the parameter. To determine which parameters your printer supports, see Table C-3 on page C-9.
Table 4-9: PostScript Emulation User Parameters

Key AccurateScreens CollatedCopies Type boolean integer Definition Controls whether the accurate screen algorithm is used during subsequent executions of the setscreen and setcolorscreen operators. Requests the number of collated copies to print for the job. The CollatedCopies parameter must be set before the first page of the job has been sent. If CollatedCopies is set to zero, the parameter has no effect on the job. If CollatedCopies is set to a number other than zero, the value of #copies and of the NumCopies and Collate pagedevice parameters are ignored for the job. Legal values: Any integer between 0 and 999, inclusive.
4-64
PostScript
Table 4-9: PostScript Emulation User Parameters (Continued)

Key HalftoneMode Type integer Definition Affects the results of subsequent halftone setting operators such as setscreen, setcolorscreen, and sethalftone. The HalftoneMode parameter has no effect on the current halftone. Legal values: 0 1 Normal mode of operation. The operators setscreen, setcolorscreen, and sethalftone are not affected. Execution of setscreen, setcolorscreen, or sethalftone causes a default screen to be used rather than the screen given by the job. The default screen depends on the current resolution and parameters in the DeviceRenderingInfo dictionary in the pagedevice dictionary that is in affect at the time the halftone operator is executed. Not supported. HalftoneMode is set to 1.
2 IdiomRegnition boolean Legal values: True False JobName string
Procedure substitution is enabled during execution of the bind operator. Idiom recognition is disabled.
Name of the current job for status responses. Legal values: Any alphanumeric characters in the ASCII printable range (X'20' through X'FE') excluding the characters ; and ]. Maximum length is 80 characters (characters beyond 80 characters are truncated).
JobTimeout
integer
Number of seconds a print job executes before it is terminated and a PostScript emulation timeout error is generated. Set to 0 to disable job timeout. JobTimeout is initialized to the value of the JobTimeout system parameter at the beginning of each job. Legal value: Any non-negative integer.
MaxDictStack
integer
Maximum elements in a dictionary stack. Legal value: Any integer between 40 and 255, inclusive.
MaxExecStack
integer
Maximum elements in the execution stack. Legal value: Any integer greater than or equal to 75.
MaxFontItem
integer
Maximum number of bytes occupied by the pixel array of a single character in the font cache. There is an upper limit dependent on the MaxFontCache system parameter and the amount of printer memory. Legal values: Any non-negative integer.
MaxFormItem
integer
Maximum number of bytes occupied by a single cached form. Legal value: Any integer between zero and half of RamSize.
MaxLocalVM
integer
Maximum bytes occupied by values in local VM. Legal value: Any integer greater than or equal to 76800 or the amount of local VM currently in use plus a small margin.
4-65
PostScript
Table 4-9: PostScript Emulation User Parameters (Continued)

Key MaxOpStack Type integer Definition Maximum elements in the operand stack. Legal value: Any integer greater than or equal to 75. MaxPatternItem integer Maximum bytes occupied by a single cached pattern. Legal value: Any integer between zero and half of RamSize. MaxScreenItem integer Maximum bytes occupied by a single halftone screen. Legal value: Any non-negative integer. MaxSuperScreen integer Establishes an upper limit for the number of pixels in the supercell. Supercells affect Type 1 and Type 2 halftones. If MaxSuperScreen is set to zero, the use of supercells is prevented. Legal value: Any integer between zero and half of RamSize. MaxUPathItem integer Maximum bytes occupied by a single user path. Legal value: Any integer between zero and half of RamSize. MinFontCompress PageCount integer integer (Read-only) This value is always the value of MAXINTEGER. (Read-only) This value is a running sum of the number of pages submitted by the PostScript interpreter to the print engine for printing. Note: This value is reset to 0 (zero) during PostScript initialization. Since PostScript initialization by the printer cannot be known, we recommend querying the value of PageCount at the beginning of a job and at the end of a job, and then calculating the difference to determine how many pages are submitted to the printer for a specific job. This parameter is not valid for tracking pages between jobs. UseOldcopypage boolean Legal values: True False VMReclaim integer Legal values: 0 -1 -2 VMThreshold integer Enables automatic garbage collection Disables automatic garbage collection for local Virtual Memory (VM) Disables automatic garbage collection for both local and global VM Indicates the copypage command is processed as defined in the PostScript Level 2 description. Indicates the copypage command is processed as defined in the PostScript 3 description.
Frequency of automatic garbage collection, which occurs when the specified number of bytes have been allocated since the previous collection. Legal value: Any integer from 8192 to 500000, inclusive.
WaitTimeout
integer
Number of seconds the interpreter waits to receive additional characters from the host before it terminates the current print job by executing a PostScript emulation timeout error. A value of 0 indicates an infinite timeout. WaitTimeout is initialized to the value of the WaitTimeout system parameter at the beginning of each print job. Legal value: Any non-negative integer.
4-66
PostScript
System Parameters
The setsystemparams operator sets the values of the specified system parameters. This operator requires a password if one is set. The currentsystemparams operator returns a dictionary of the current values of the system parameters. Values supplied to setsystemparams that are outside the range or limits for the specified integer parameter do not cause rangecheck or limitcheck errors. An appropriate value is used. For example, if you set JobTimeout to 14, it is actually set to 15, and no error is generated. The exceptions are noted in Table 4-10. Values supplied to setsystemparams that do not match the type of the specified parameter cause typecheck errors. Parameters that are not supported by the printer are ignored. An attempt to change the value of a read-only parameter has no effect on the parameter. Write-only parameters are not returned by currentsystemparams. To determine which parameters your printer supports, see Table C-4 on page C-10.
Table 4-10: PostScript Emulation System Parameters

Key BuildTime ByteOrder Type integer boolean Definition (Read-only) Timestamp identifying the specific build of the PostScript emulation interpreter. (Read-only) Native (preferred) order of multiple-byte numbers in binary encoded tokens.
False True
CurDisplayList CurFontCache CurFormCache
1 2
high-order first low-order first
integer integer integer
(Read-only) This value is always zero. (Read-only) Bytes currently occupied by the font cache. (Read-only) Bytes currently occupied by the form cache.
These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 2016. These parameters are available with the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010. 3 These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
4-67
PostScript
Table 4-10: PostScript Emulation System Parameters (Continued)

Key CurInputDevice Type string Definition (Read-only) The name of the communications device corresponding to the current input file for the PostScript emulation program which is currently executing. Possible values are: %LocalTalkA% %LocalTalkB% %LocalTalkC% %LocalTalkD% %SerialA% %SerialB% %SerialC% %SerialD% %ParallelA% %ParallelB% %ParallelC% %ParallelD% %IR_A% %IR_B% %IR_C% %IR_D% %EtherTalkB% %EtherTalkC% %EtherTalkD% %TokenTalkB% %TokenTalkC% CurOutlineCache CurOutputDevice integer string %TokenTalkD% %LexLinkB% %LexLinkC% %LexLinkD% %PrintServerB% %PrintServerC% %PrintServerD% %RemotePrinterB% %RemotePrinterC% %RemotePrinterD% %AppSocketB% %AppSocketC% %AppSocketD% %LPR_B% %LPR_C% %LPR_D% %UnknownDevice% %USB_A% %USB_B% %USB_C% %USB_D%
(Read-only) This value is always zero. (Read-only) The name of the communications device corresponding to the current output file for the PostScript emulation program which is currently executing. This string is the same as CurInputDevice. (Read-only) Bytes currently occupied by the pattern cache. (Read-only) This value is always zero. (Read-only) This value is always zero. (Read-only) Bytes currently occupied by the user path cache. This bit field allows precompiled PostScript procedures to be selectively disabled. These precompiled procedures speed the execution time of some application-generated print jobs by substituting PostScript procedures in the jobs ProcSet with fast functions that are built into the printer firmware.
CurPatternCache CurScreenStorage CurSourceList CurUPathCache DisableFastProcs
integer integer integer integer integer
1 2
4-68
PostScript

Key DoPrintErrors Type boolean Definition Specifies whether to print an error page using a built-in error handler when a PostScript emulation error occurs. True False DoStartPage EnableExtraFonts
1
Print PS Error user default value is set to On. Print PS Error user default value is set to Off.
boolean boolean
(Read only) Always returns False. True All 75 resident fonts are enabled. False Original 39 PostScript fonts are available. Note: Changes to this parameter take effect when PostScript is restarted. (Read-only) Specifies the version of the boot code. (Read-only) Specifies the version of the engine code. (Read-only) Maximum speed of the print engine in pages per minute. Indicates or modifies the Resource Save user default value. True Resource Save user default value is set to On. False Resource Save user default value is set to Off. Note: When a job changes this parameter from False to True, all interpreter tasks such as PostScript and PCL are terminated and restarted at the end of the current job.
EngineBoot1 EngineCode
1
string string integer boolean
EngineSpeed1 EnvironmentSave2
FactoryDefaults
boolean
If set to True and the printer is then immediately powered off, all non-volatile parameters revert to factory default values at the next power-on. The print job that sets FactoryDefaults to True must be the last job executed before power-off; otherwise, the request is ignored. The address at which a fatal system software error occurred. It is stored in this parameter before execution is stopped. It is also transmitted to the host over the communications channel. Specifies the location in the file system for font resource files. (Read-only) The version of the font read-only memory (ROM). Specifies the location in the file system for resource files. Concatenated to the GenericResourceDir and the category name. It is followed by the resource name to get the external location of the resource. Example: If GenericResourceDir and GenericResourcePathSep were (Resource/) and (/), respectively, the LexmarkLogo resource of the Pattern category would be in Resource/Pattern/LexmarkLogo.
FatalErrorAddress
integer
FontResourceDir FontVersion
1
string string string string
GenericResourceDir GenericResourcePathSep
1 2
4-69
PostScript

Key InstalledRam Type integer Definition (Read-only) Indicated, in bytes, the total amount of installed printer memory (RAM) in the system. Note: InstalledRam should not be confused with RamSize which is the amount of memory (RAM) available to the formatting interpreters and the graphics engine. JobTimeout integer The value in seconds to which the user parameter JobTimeout is initialized at the beginning of each print job. If you set the system parameter JobTimeout to a negative value, it is ignored and the previous setting of JobTimeout is used. A value of 0 (zero) indicates that the timeout is infinite. If you set a number between 1 and 14, 15 is set. Legal values: x = 0, 15 <= x <= 65355 languagelevel integer The value of languagelevel integer in systemdict always matches the value of this system parameter. If set to 2, the printer will behave as though /UseOldcopypage and /UseOldfonts are both true (regardless of their actual values). The latter two parameters will return their actual values when queried. Legal Values: 2, 3 MaxDisplayAndSourceList2 MaxDisplayList MaxFontCache MaxFormCache integer integer integer integer (Read-only) This value is always the same value as InstalledRam. (Read-only) See Table C-4 on page C-10 for the default value of your printer. (Read-only) See Table C-4 on page C-10 for the default value of your printer. Maximum bytes occupied by the form cache. Legal value: Any non-negative integer. MaxImageBuffer MaxOutlineCache MaxPatternCache
2
(Read-only) See Table C-4 on page C-10 for the default value of your printer. (Read-only) See Table C-4 on page C-10 for the default value of your printer. Maximum bytes occupied by the pattern cache. Legal value: Any non-negative integer.
MaxPermanentVM
(Read-only) See Table C-4 on page C-10 for the default value of your printer. (Read-only) See Table C-4 on page C-10 for the default value of your printer. (Read-only) See Table C-4 on page C-10 for the default value of your printer.
MaxRasterMemory MaxScreenStorage
1 2
4-70
PostScript

Key MaxSourceList MaxUPathCache Type integer integer Definition (Read-only) See Table C-4 on page C-10 for the default value of your printer. Maximum bytes occupied by the user path cache. Legal value: Any non-negative integer. PageCount PanelCode1 PrinterCode
1
integer string string string
(Read-only) Total number of pages that have been printed. (Read-only) Version of the operator panel code. (Read-only) Firmware version of the printer controller card. Initialized from the printer name stored in NVRAM (the default name of the printer). If this parameter is set to a zero length string, the PrinterName is set to the value of the product string in statusdict. Legal value: Any string of 32 or fewer non-null characters.
PrinterName
RamSize RealFormat Revision SearchBuiltinFontsFirst1 SerialNumber1 StartJobPassword
integer string integer boolean string string
(Read-only) Total amount of memory (in bytes) installed in the printer. (Read-only) Preferred representation for real numbers in binary encoded tokens. (Read-only) The current revision level of the machinedependent portion of PostScript emulation. Controls the device search order the interpreter uses to locate fonts. (Read-only) Serial number of your printer. (Write-only) Controls the ability of the startjob operator to alter initial Virtual Memory (VM). Legal value: Any integer or string of 32 or fewer non-null characters. An integer is converted to a string.
StartupMode
integer
Controls the system start file (Sys/Start) during PostScript emulation initialization. Also, controls the job start file (Job/ Start) before each print job. 0 1 10 11 Disable use of Sys/Start file and Job/Start file. Sys/Start file executes (if present on disk or flash). Job/Start file executes before each user job. Both files run (a combination of 1 and 10).
Legal Values: 0 <= x <= 255. Values other than the four listed are equivalent to 0. Note: If both flash and disk have a Sys/Start file and Job/Start file, the value of the SearchOrder for the two devices determines which file is executed. StaticRamSize1
1 2
integer
(Read-only) Amount of static memory (in bytes) on the controller board.
4-71
PostScript

Key SystemParamsPassword Type string Definition (Write-only) Controls the ability of setsystemparams to change the values of system parameters and setdevparams to change the values of device parameters. Legal value: Any integer or string of 32 or fewer non-null characters. An integer is converted to a string. UseOldcopypage3 boolean True indicates the copypage command is processed as defined in PostScript Level 2 description. False indicates the copypage command is processed as defined in PostScript 3 description. True redefines the following PostScript resident fonts to match the character designs and metrics defined in PostScript Level 2. The font names in parentheses are the equivalent PostScript 3 font names for the associated PostScript Level 2 names. Antique Olive Antique Olive Bold Antique Olive Italic Letter Gothic Letter Gothic Bold Letter Gothic Italic Marigold Univers Bold (Antique Olive Roman)
UseOldFonts3
boolean
(Letter Gothic Slanted)
False restores the font compatibility to PostScript 3. ValidNV boolean (Read-only) Indicates if non-volatile memory is currently used to store persistent parameters. If this memory is found defective during system initialization, factory defaults are used. If further testing reveals this memory is defective, it is not used and ValidNV is False. Otherwise, ValidNV is True. The value, in seconds, to which the user parameter WaitTimeout is initialized at the beginning of each print job. Negative values are ignored and the previous setting is used. A value of zero indicates an infinite timeout. If you select a number between 1 and 14, 15 is set. Legal values: x = 0, 15 <= x <= 65355
1 2
WaitTimeout
integer
4-72
PostScript
Device Parameters
The currentdevparams operator returns a dictionary of the current values of the system parameters. The setdevparams operator sets the values of the specified device parameters.
This operator requires a password if one is set. Values supplied to setdevparams that are outside the range or limits for the specified integer parameter do not cause rangecheck or limitcheck errors. The appropriate value is used. Values supplied to setdevparams that do not match the type of the specified parameter cause typecheck errors. If a parameter name is not known, an undefined error occurs. An attempt to change the value of a read-only parameter has no effect on the parameter. To specify the parameters for a specific communications channel, use the appropriate suffix. For example, the serial channels are: %SerialA% %SerialB% %SerialC% %SerialD%
For some printers, no A channel exists. If %Serial% is specified, it refers to the channel where the print job is sent. For additional information on flash memory and disk, see Chapter 6: Flash Memory and Disk on page 6-1. To determine which devices your printer supports, see Table C-5 on page C-13. To determine which device parameters your printer supports, see Table C-6 on page C-15.
4-73
PostScript
Table 4-11: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters

Key Type Definition
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %Parallel%, %ParallelA%, %ParallelB%, %ParallelC%, %ParallelD% (%Parallel_NV% and %Parallel_Pending% contain the same parameters) DelayedOutputClose boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are: True False An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs finish printing. An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port. Enabled boolean (Read-only) Supported values are: True False Filtering name Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed. Supported values are: InterpreterBased None Handshake HasNames Interpreter integer boolean name (Read-only) Always returns a value of 2. (Read-only) Always returns False. (Read-only) Supported values are: PostScript AutoSelect PCL PPDS On boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data. Supported values are: True False OutputDevice PCLSmartSwitch string boolean (Read-only) Supported values are: True False
PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Data is sent and processed Data is lost
For more information, see Using SmartSwitch on page 2-1. PortLocation string (Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set. Supported values are: Standard Port Option Slot 1 Option Slot 2 Option Slot 3 Option Slot 4
4-74
PostScript
Table 4-11: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)

Key PSSmartSwitch Type boolean Definition Supported values are: True False PS SmartSwitch is set to On. PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
For more information, see Using SmartSwitch on page 4-1. Type name (Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %Serial%, %SerialA%, %SerialB%, %SerialC%, %SerialD% (%Serial_NV% and %Serial_Pending% contain the same parameters) Baud CheckParity integer boolean Returns the value of the Baud menu item. (Read-only) Designates whether parity checking is done on the incoming data. Supported values are: True False DataBits DelayedOutputClose integer boolean
Parity menu item set to Even or Odd. Parity menu item set to None or Ignore.
Returns the value of the Data Bits menu item. Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are: True False An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs finish printing. An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port. Enabled boolean (Read-only) Supported values are: True False Filtering name Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed. Supported values are: InterpreterBased None FlowControl name Designates the serial flow control method between the host computer and the device. Returns a value corresponding to the Serial Protocol menu item. Supported values are: Dtr DtrDsr XonXoff XonXoffDtr XonXoffDtrDsr HasNames HonorDSR boolean boolean (Read-only) Always returns False. Serial - Honor DSR. Supported values are: True False Honor DSR is set to On. Honor DSR is set to Off.
4-75
PostScript

Key Interpreter Type name Definition (Read-only) Supported values are: PostScript AutoSelect PCL PPDS On boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data. Supported values are: True False Parity name Data is sent and processed. Data is lost.
Designates the parity to be used between the host computer and the device. Returns the value of the Parity menu item. Supported values are: Even Odd None Ignore If Parity is set to Ignore, CheckParity is set to False and Parity becomes Even.
PCLSmartSwitch
boolean
Supported values are: True False PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
For more information, see Using SmartSwitch on page 2-1. PortLocation string (Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set. Supported values are: Standard Port Option Slot 1 Option Slot 2 Option Slot 3 PSSmartSwitch boolean Supported values are: True False PS SmartSwitch is set to On. PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
For more information, see Using SmartSwitch on page 4-1. RobustXon boolean Supported values are: True False SerialMode name RobustXon is set to On. RobustXon is set to Off.
Designates the serial communication configuration: RS232C or RS422. Returns the value of the Serial RS-232/RS-422 menu item. Supported values are: RS232 RS422 Returns RS232 on a printer that is attached with a cable that does not support RS-422.
4-76
PostScript

Key StopBits Type integer Definition (Read-only) Supported values are: 1 2 Type name (Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %LocalTalk%, %LocalTalkA%, %LocalTalkB%, %LocalTalkC%, %LocalTalkD% (%LocalTalk_NV% and %LocalTalk_Pending% contain the same parameters) DelayedOutputClose boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are: True False An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs finish printing. An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port. Enabled boolean (Read-only) Supported values are: True False Filtering name Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed. Supported values are: InterpreterBased None HasNames Interpreter boolean name (Read-only) Always returns False. (Read-only) Supported values are: PostScript AutoSelect PCL PPDS LocalTalkType string The type of the AppleTalk network entity name. This parameter also sets the Type parameter to the same value. The new value is returned by the appletalktype compatibility operator. Legal value: Any string of 32 or fewer non-null characters. Default value is LaserWriter. Note: Setting this variable does not affect the value for other physical internal print servers. The statusdict string appletalktype is correct for the current job port. NodeID On integer boolean (Read-only) Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data. Supported values are: True False Data is sent and processed. Data is lost.
4-77
PostScript

Key PCLSmartSwitch Type boolean Definition Supported values are: True False PCL SmartSwitch is On. PCL SmartSwitch is Off.
For more information, see Using SmartSwitch on page 2-1. PortLocation string (Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set. Supported values are: Standard Port Option Slot 1 Option Slot 2 Option Slot 3 PSSmartSwitch boolean Supported values are: True False PS SmartSwitch is On. PS SmartSwitch is Off.
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %EtherTalk%, %EtherTalkA%, %EtherTalkB%, %EtherTalkC%, %EtherTalkD% (%EtherTalk_NV% and %EtherTalk_Pending% contain the same parameters) DelayedOutputClose boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are: True False An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs finish printing. An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port. Enabled boolean (Read-only) Supported values are: True False EthernetAddress string (Read only) The Ethernet address of the Ethernet internal print server. Legal value: Any string of 17 or fewer non-null characters. EtherTalkType string The type of the EtherTalk interface entity name. This parameter also sets the LocalTalkType parameter to the same value. The new value is returned by the appletalktype compatibility operator. Legal value: Any string of 32 or fewer non-null characters. Default value is LaserWriter. Note: Setting this variable does not affect the value for other physical internal print servers. The statusdict string appletalktype is correct for the current job port. EtherTalkZone string The zone of the EtherTalk interface entity name. EtherTalkZone is read/write only to RAM. There is no NVRAM variable for EtherTalkZone. Legal value: Any string of 32 or fewer non-null characters.
4-78
PostScript

Key Filtering Type name Definition Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed. Supported values are: InterpreterBased None HasNames Interpreter boolean name (Read-only) Always returns False. (Read-only) Supported values are: PostScript AutoSelect PCL PPDS NodeID On integer boolean (Read-only) Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data. Supported values are: True False PCLSmartSwitch boolean Data is sent and processed. Data is lost.
Supported values are: True False PCL SmartSwitch is On. PCL SmartSwitch is Off.
For more information, see Using SmartSwitch on page 2-1. PortLocation string (Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set. Supported values are: Standard Port Option Slot 1 Option Slot 2 Option Slot 3 PSSmartSwitch boolean Supported values are: True False PS SmartSwitch is On. PS SmartSwitch is Off.
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %IR%, %IR_A%, %IR_B%, %IR_C%, %IR_D% (%IR_NV% and %IR_Pending% contain the same parameters) DelayedOutputClose boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are: True False An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs finish printing. An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port.
4-79
PostScript

Key Enabled Type boolean Definition (Read-only) Supported values are: True False Filtering name Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed. Supported values are: InterpreterBased None HasNames Interpreter boolean name (Read-only) Always returns False. (Read-only) Supported values are: PostScript AutoSelect PCL PPDS On boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data. Supported values are: True False PCLSmartSwitch boolean Data is sent and processed. Data is lost.
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %USB%, %USB_A%, %USB_B%, %USB_C%, %USB_D% (%USB_NV% and %USB_Pending% contain the same parameters) DelayedOutputClose boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are: True False An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs finish printing. An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
4-80
PostScript

Key Enabled Type boolean Definition (Read-only) Supported values are: True False Filtering name Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed. Supported values are: InterpreterBased None HasNames Interpreter boolean name (Read-only) Always returns False. (Read-only) Supported values are: PostScript AutoSelect PCL PPDS On boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data. Supported values are: True False PCLSmartSwitch boolean Data is sent and processed. Data is lost.
For more information, see Using SmartSwitch on page 2-1. PortLocation string (Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set. Supported values are: Standard Port Option Slot 1, 2, and 3 (Model specific) PSSmartSwitch boolean Supported values are: True False PS SmartSwitch is set to On. PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %TokenTalk%, %TokenTalkA%, %TokenTalkB%, %TokenTalkC%, %TokenTalkD% (%TokenTalk_NV% and %TokenTalk_Pending% contain the same parameters) Address Bridging string name (Read-only) (Read-only) Adaptive
4-81
PostScript

Key DelayedOutputClose Type boolean Definition Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are: True False An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs finish printing. An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port. Enabled boolean (Read-only) Supported values are: True False Filtering name Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed. Supported values are: InterpreterBased None HasNames Interpreter boolean name (Read-only) Always returns False. (Read-only) Supported values are: PostScript AutoSelect PCL PPDS NodeID On integer boolean (Read-only) Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data. Supported values are: True False PCLSmartSwitch boolean Data is sent and processed. Data is lost.
For more information, see Using SmartSwitch on page 4-1.
4-82
PostScript

Key TokenTalkType Type string Definition Setting this variable does not affect the value of other physical internal print servers. Note: The statusdict string appletalktype is correct for the current job port. Type Zone name string (Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications. Returns the value identified when the printer makes connection to the network at power on.
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %AppSocket%, %AppSocketA%, %AppSocketB%, %AppSocketC%, %AppSocketD% (%AppSocket_NV% and %AppSocket_Pending% contain the same parameters) DelayedOutputClose boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are: True False An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs finish printing. An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port. Enabled boolean (Read-only) Supported values are: True False Filtering name Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed. Supported values are: InterpreterBased None HasNames Interpreter boolean name (Read-only) Always returns False. (Read-only) Supported values are: PostScript AutoSelect PCL PPDS On boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data. Supported values are: True False PortLocation string Data is sent and processed. Data is lost.
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set. Supported values are: Standard Port Option Slot 1 Option Slot 2 Option Slot 3
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
4-83
PostScript

Key Type Definition
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %RemotePrinter%, %RemotePrinterA%, %RemotePrinterB%, %RemotePrinterC%, %RemotePrinterD% (%RemotePrinter_NV% and %RemotePrinter_Pending% contain the same parameters) DelayedOutputClose boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are: True False An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs finish printing. An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port. Enabled boolean (Read-only) Supported values are: True False Filtering name Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed. Supported values are: InterpreterBased None Note: Setting this variable changes the value of the corresponding %PrintServer% device. HasNames Interpreter boolean name (Read-only) Always returns False. (Read-only) Supported values are: PostScript AutoSelect PCL PPDS On boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data. Supported values are: True False PortLocation string Data is sent and processed. Data is lost.
Type
name
4-84
PostScript

Key Type Definition
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %PrintServer%, %PrintServerA%, %PrintServerB%, %PrintServerC%, %PrintServerD% (%PrintServer_NV% and %PrintServer_Pending% contain the same parameters) DelayedOutputClose boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are: True False An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs finish printing. An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port. Enabled boolean (Read-only) Supported values are: True False Filtering name Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed. Supported values are: InterpreterBased None Note: Setting this variable changes the value of the corresponding %RemotePrinter% device. HasNames Interpreter boolean name (Read-only) Always returns False. (Read-only) Supported values are: PostScript AutoSelect PCL PPDS On boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data. Supported values are: True False PortLocation string Data is sent and processed. Data is lost.
Type
name
4-85
PostScript

Key Type Definition
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %LPR%, %LPR_A%, %LPR_B%, %LPR_C%, %LPR_D% (%LPR_NV% and %LPR_Pending% contain the same parameters) Enabled boolean (Read-only) Supported values are: True False Filtering name Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed. Supported values are: InterpreterBased None HasNames Interpreter boolean name (Read-only) Always returns False. (Read-only) Supported values are: PostScript AutoSelect PCL PPDS On boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data. Supported values are: True False PortLocation string Data is sent and processed. Data is lost.
Type
name
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %LexLink%, %LexLinkA%, %LexLinkB%, %LexLinkC%, %LexLinkD% (%LexLink_NV% and %LexLink_Pending% contain the same parameters) DelayedOutputClose boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are: True False An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs finish printing. An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port. Enabled boolean (Read-only) Supported values are: True False
4-86
PostScript

Key HasNames Interpreter Type boolean name Definition (Read-only) Always returns False. (Read-only) Supported values are: PostScript AutoSelect PCL PPDS On boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data. Supported values are: True False PortLocation string Data is sent and processed. Data is lost.
Type
name
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %IP%, %IP_A%, %IP_B%, %IP_C%, %IP_D% GatewayAddress IPAddress IPAddressDynamic string string boolean (Read-only) (Read-only) (Read-only) Supported values are: True False NetworkMask On string boolean (Read-only) Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data. Supported values are: True False Physical PortLocation string string (Read-only) (Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set. Supported values are: Standard Port Option Slot 1 Option Slot 2 Option Slot 3 Type name (Read-only) Always returns the value of /Parameters. Data is sent and processed. Data is lost.
4-87
PostScript

Key Type Definition
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %EthernetPhysical%, %EthernetPhysicalA%, %EthernetPhysicalB%, %EthernetPhysicalC%, %EthernetPhysicalD% EthernetAddress On string boolean (Read-only) Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data. Supported values are: True False PortLocation string Data is sent and processed. Data is lost.
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Parameters.
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %TokenRingPhysical%, %TokenRingPhysicalA%, %TokenRingPhysicalB%, %TokenRingPhysicalC%, %TokenRingPhysicalD% Address On string boolean (Read-only) Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data. Supported values are: True False PortLocation string Data is sent and processed. Data is lost.
Speed
integer
Supported values are: 4 16
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Parameters.
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %Engine% BSizeStandard name (Read-only) Value of JIS
4-88
PostScript

Key Darkness Type real Definition Print Darkness and Toner Saver Setting Designates the print darkness and toner saver setting (model specific). Legal value: Any non-negative real number from 0.0 to 1.0, inclusive. For queries, the Print Darkness setting is returned as a real value: Print Darkness Setting Lightest Lighter Normal Darker Darkest Lightest Lighter Normal Darker Darkest Toner Saver Setting Value On On On On On Off Off Off Off Off Darkness Value Returned 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
When the Darkness value is changed, the following ranges determine the Print Darkness and Toner Saver setting values: Darkness Value 0.0 <=value<=0.15 0.15 <=value<=0.25 0.25 <=value<=0.35 0.35 <=value<=0.45 0.45 <=value<=0.55 0.55 <=value<=0.65 0.65 <=value<=0.75 0.75 <=value<=0.85 0.85 <=value<=0.95 0.95 <=value<=1.0 Print Darkness Setting Designates the print darkness (model specific). Legal value: Any non-negative real number from 0.0 to 1.0, inclusive. For queries, the Print Darkness setting is returned as a real value: 0.1 0.3 0.5 0.7 0.9 Lightest Lighter Normal Darker Darkest Print Darkness Setting Value Lightest Lighter Normal Darker Darkest Lightest Lighter Normal Darker Darkest Toner Saver Setting Value On On On On On Off Off Off Off Off
When the Darkness value is modified, the following ranges are used to determine the Print Darkness setting: 0.0 - 0.2 >0.2 - 0.4 >0.4 - 0.6 >0.6 - 0.8 >0.8 - 1.0 Lightest Lighter Normal Darker Darkest
4-89
PostScript

Key PageCount TimeToStandby Type integer integer Definition (Read-only) Page Count Power Saver. Supported values are: 0 to 120, in minutes Type name (Read-only) Always returns the value of /Parameters.
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %Console% Language Type name name Display Language (Read-only) Always returns the value of /Parameters.
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %Calendar%, %CalendarA%, %CalendarB%, %CalendarC%, %CalendarD% Day Hour Minute Month Running Second Type Year DateTime DayOfWeekLong DayOfWeekNum DayOfWeekShort integer integer integer integer boolean integer name integer string string integer string Date and Time in the format: YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM Long day name (for example, "Wednesday") Supported values are: 06 (0=Sunday) Short day name (for example, "Wed") Supported values are: 131 Supported values are: 023 Supported values are: 059 Supported values are: 112 Signifies whether time is available for this device. Supported values are: 059 (Read-only) Value of /Parameters
Device Parameters for the IODevice Device %disk1% BlockSize Free integer integer (Read-only) (Read-only) Indicates the amount of free space available (in pages) on the disk. Valid only if the disk is mounted (mounted is set to True). A value of 0 (zero) indicates that either the disk is not mounted or is full. (Read-only) Indicates if the disk supports named files. Valid only if the disk is mounted (mounted is set to True). If the disk is not mounted, the parameter has a value of False.
HasNames
boolean
4-90
PostScript

Key InitializeAction Type integer Definition Specifies an action for initializing the disk. Supported values are: Indicates no action; the value returned when the parameter is read. Indicates that the current file system (if any) should be deleted and a new one of LogicalSize created (the disk is assumed to have been formatted already). The disk must first be mounted; otherwise, an ioerror results. 2 Reformats the entire disk before creating a new file system of size LogicalSize. 3 (or greater) has the same effect as the value 2 and also tests the disk x - 2 times. Note: The current file system refers to /FileSystem. See Type as follows for more information. LogicalSize integer Specifies the size of the file system to be created and is as an argument by InitializeAction. If 0 (zero), InitializeAction uses the size of the entire disk. When queried, indicates the current size of the file system on the device (in pages). A value of 0 indicates that the device is not mounted. If set with a certain value and the device is reformatted, a query returns the value that was set. If queried before the disk is reformatted, a different value from the one set may be returned because it may return the current size. If set to 1, 2, or 3, an ioerror occurs. Legal value: Any non-negative integer, including 0. The value must be less than or equal to the value of PhysicalSize. If set to a value greater than PhysicalSize, or less than zero, a rangecheck error occurs. Mounted boolean True False System attempts to mount the disk. System attempts to dismount the disk. 0 1
A device must contain a valid file system to mount successfully. When a device is mounted, it is known to the system and is readable. To verify if the device is currently mounted, query this parameter immediately after setting it. PhysicalSize Removable Searchable SearchOrder integer boolean boolean integer (Read-only) Indicates the size of the disk (in pages). Valid only when the disk is mounted. A value of 0 (zero) indicates that the device is not mounted. (Read-only) Indicates if the drive supports removable disks. Always returns False. (Read-only) Indicates if the disk participates in searches in the file system operations that specify a filename without specifying a device. (Read-only) If the Searchable parameter is True, indicates the priority assigned to the disk when searching for a file and no device has been specified. A lower integer indicates a higher priority. If the Searchable parameter is False, this value is ignored. (Read-only) Always returns the value of /FileSystem. (Read-only) Indicates if the files on the disk can be opened for write access. If the disk is write protected, this parameter is a constant equal to False. When the disk is not mounted, this parameter indicates if the drive supports writeable media.
Type Writeable
name boolean
Device Parameters for the IODevice %flash1% BlockSize Free integer integer (Read-only) (Read-only) Indicates the amount of free space available (in pages) on the flash. Valid if the flash is mounted (mounted is set to True). A value of 0 (zero) indicates that either the flash is not mounted or is full.
4-91
PostScript

Key HasNames InitializeAction Type boolean integer Definition (Read-only) Indicates if the flash parameter is only valid when flash is mounted (mounted is set to True). If flash is not mounted, the parameter has a value of False. Specifies an action for initializing flash: 0 1 Indicates no action; the value is returned when the parameter is read. Indicates that the current file system should be deleted and a new one of PhysicalSize created (the flash must be formatted already). The flash must first be mounted; otherwise, an ioerror results. Reformats the entire flash before creating a new file system of PhysicalSize (or greater) has the same effect as the value 2 and also tests the flash x 2 times
2 3
Legal value: Any non-negative integer. LogicalSize integer This parameter is not used for InitializeAction. InitializeAction always formats to PhysicalSize, regardless of what is specified in LogicalSize. A query returns the current size (in pages) of the file system on the device. A value of 0 (zero) indicates that the device is not mounted. Legal value: Any non-negative integer, including 0 (zero). The value of LogicalSize must be less than or equal to the value of PhysicalSize. A rangecheck error occurs if you try to set a larger value or set the value to 0 (zero). Mounted boolean True False System attempts to mount the flash. System attempts to dismount the flash.
When a device is mounted, it becomes known to the system and is readable, depending on the nature of the device. A device must contain a valid file system or it will not mount successfully. To verify if the device is currently mounted, query this parameter immediately after setting it. PhysicalSize Removable Searchable SearchOrder integer boolean boolean integer (Read-only) Indicates the size of the flash (in pages) for a flash that is mounted. A value of 0 indicates that the device is not mounted. (Read-only) Indicates if the drive supports removable flash. (Read-only) Indicates if the flash participates in searches in file system operations that specify a filename without specifying a device. (Read-only) If the Searchable parameter is True, indicates the priority at which the flash is searched for a file in operations where no device has been specified. A lower integer indicates a high priority. If the Searchable parameter is False, the value of this integer has no meaning. (Read-only) This constant always returns the value of /FileSystem. (Read-only) Indicates if the files on the flash can be opened for write access. A writeprotected flash returns False. When the flash is not mounted, this parameter indicates if the device supports writeable media.
Type Writeable
name boolean
4-92
PostScript

Key Type Definition
Device Parameters for the IODevice %rom% BlockSize Free integer integer (Read-only) (Read-only) Indicates the amount (in pages) of free space available in ROM. Valid only if the ROM is mounted (mounted is set to True). A value of 0 (zero) indicates that either the ROM is not mounted or it is full. (Read-only) Indicates if ROM supports named files. Valid only if ROM is mounted (mounted is set to True). If ROM is not mounted, this parameter has a value of False. (Read-only) Always returns a value of 0 (zero), which indicates no action. (Read-only) True False System attempts to mount the ROM. System attempts to dismount the ROM.
HasNames InitializeAction LogicalSize Mounted
boolean integer integer boolean
When a device is mounted, it becomes known to the system and is readable, depending on the nature of the device. A device must contain a valid file system or it will not mount successfully. To verify if the device is currently mounted, query this parameter immediately after setting it. If the ROM device is dismounted, unpredictable results occur. PhysicalSize integer (Read-only) Indicates the size of the ROM (in pages) that is mounted. A value of 0 (zero) indicates that the device is not mounted. This parameter is only valid when ROM is mounted. (Read-only) Always False. (Read-only) Indicates if ROM participates in searches in file system operations that specify a filename without specifying a device. (Read-only) If the Searchable parameter is True, indicates the priority assigned to the ROM when searching for a file and no device has been specified. A lower integer indicates a higher priority. If the Searchable parameter is False, the value of this integer has no meaning. (Read-only) Always returns the value of /FileSystem. (Read-only) Indicates if the files on the ROM can be opened for write access. Always False.
Removable Searchable SearchOrder
boolean boolean integer
Type Writeable
name boolean
4-93
PostScript
Status and Error Messages

Printers return PostScript emulation error messages and status information to the computer through any active interface. To send information to the computer through the parallel interface, configure the interface as bidirectional.
Tagged Binary Not Active

Your printer responds and processes a Ctrl+T (x'14') command as a status query when:
The PostScript emulation interpreter is processing a print job. The printer is idle and the PostScript emulation interpreter is the selected interpreter.
Your printer responds and processes a Ctrl+T (x'14') command as normal data and not a status query when:
Another interpreter is processing a print job. The printer is idle and another interpreter is the selected interpreter.
Notes: Status queries cannot be received while the printer is in an error state. Your printer always selects the PostScript emulation interpreter and processes a Ctrl+T (x'14') command as a status query when data is received through the LocalTalk interface.
Tagged Binary Active

When Tagged Binary is active, your printer always responds to a Ctrl+T (x'14') command as a status query and selects the PostScript emulation interpreter to process the current print job. Tagged Binary mode is immediately exited at the end of the print job. Note: Status queries cannot be received while the printer is in an error state.
4-94
PostScript
Status Messages
Your printer responds to a Ctrl+T (x'14') status query on an interface by sending a one-line status message back to the host computer over the same interface. If the status query is received between print jobs and the printer is idle with no error conditions, an idle response is returned to the host computer. Status messages are bracketed by the characters %%[ and ]%%, so the computer software can extract them from other data generated by the current print job. They follow a standard syntax, consisting of one or more key-value pairs, separated by semicolons. For example:
%%[ job: Project Report; status: busy; source: Parallel ]%%
The following table lists the possible keys and value descriptions. To determine which status message keys your printer supports, see Table C-7 on page C-23.
Table 4-12: Status Message Keys and Value Descriptions

Key job status Value Description The name of the print job, as stored in the JobName entry in statusdict. This field is omitted if the current print job has no defined JobName. Printer activity at the time the message is sent: Idle Busy Waiting Initializing Not ready source No job in progress Executing a PostScript emulation program and/or printing pages I/O wait in mid-job During startup Printer menus display or Not Ready displays.
Source of the job the server is executing: Serial Parallel Network USB LocalTalk Infrared Internal This field is omitted if the server is idle.
5-1
Languages
CHAPTER 5: Switching Languages

Your printer may support both PCL emulation and PostScript emulation. See your printer documentation for more information. This chapter describes ways to switch printer languages and explains when you may want to choose one method over another. SmartSwitch is provided with the printer to switch languages. Other methods of switching languages are:
PJL ENTER LANGUAGE command Sniffing
SmartSwitch
The SmartSwitch feature lets the printer switch to either PCL emulation or PostScript emulation for each interface (parallel, serial, USB, or network). Your printer is shipped from the factory with SmartSwitch set to On for all languages and all interfaces. Consequently, the printer examines all print jobs coming into all its interfaces and switches between PostScript emulation and PCL emulation dynamically. If a software program explicitly tells the printer which language to use by a PJL command, the printer always accepts and uses that explicit command, regardless of how SmartSwitch has been set from the printer operator panel. If a software program does not explicitly tell the printer which language to use, the printer examines the incoming data stream and selects the language.
5-2
Languages
Setting SmartSwitch for Different Interfaces

You can customize your printer so that particular print jobs are sent to particular interfaces. For example, you may want to send all PostScript emulation jobs to the network interface and all PCL emulation jobs to the parallel interface. You can do so by choosing different languages for each interface from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional and setting the selected language to On for the interface you want. See your printer documentation for more information. If you have turned off a particular language for an interface, but then decide to send a job to that interface using that language, you must begin the job with a PJL command to override the settings you made from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. For example, if you set PCL emulation to Off for the serial interface and later decide to send a job in that language through that interface, you must preface the job with a PJL command to override the Off setting. Be sure to end the job with a Universal Exit Language (UEL) command, which is described on page 3-2.
Printer Job Language

For details on Printer Job Language (PJL) and the PJL ENTER LANGUAGE command, see ENTER LANGUAGE Command on page 3-3.
5-3
Languages
Sniffing
Sniffing is:
Enabled when any End-of-Job point occurs. Disabled when a SIC or PJL command within a valid printer language is received.
The printer examines the received data stream, attempts to determine the type of data stream, and automatically switches to the proper language. The printer examines the active printer language and decides when an End-of-Job point occurs. End-of-Job points are:
SIC command UEL command Print timeout Wait timeout PostScript timeout due to erasing the contents of an internal link Ctrl+D in PostScript or tagged binary INIT* Network Protocol Alliance Protocol job boundary
6-1
Memory
CHAPTER 6: Flash Memory and Disk

Flash memory and disk devices are used to store permanent fonts, macros, and symbol sets. The disk device is also used to buffer print jobs, collate large jobs, and store job statistics. Unlike RAM memory, these devices retain the following information when the printer is powered off, or when the printer switches languages:
PCL emulation permanent bitmapped and scalable fonts PCL emulation permanent macros PCL emulation symbol sets PostScript Type 1 fonts Files created using the PostScript emulation file operators Demonstration files
Some printers have connectors that let you install optional flash memory or a disk device; other printers may offer one or the other of these devices as a standard feature. See your printer documentation for more information. When first installed in the printer, the flash memory or disk may be unformatted. You must format the device before you download resources. A message displays on the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional if the device is unformatted. Warning: When you format flash memory or a disk, all information currently stored on the device is lost. If flash memory or a disk becomes full while downloading resources, a message displays on the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. The file being downloaded is not saved unless room is available to store the entire file.
6-2
Memory
Resource Data Collection (Download Target)

Use the Resource Data Collection (Download Target) mode to save the following information to flash memory or disk:
Permanent bitmapped and scalable fonts for PCL emulation Permanent macros for PCL emulation macros Permanent symbol sets for PCL emulation Type 1 fonts for PostScript emulation Other PostScript resources
Resource Data Collection can be turned On and Off by using:
The operator panel menus to select Download Target. The MarkVision Professional printer utility. You can also download resources to flash memory and disk or format the flash memory or disk using this printer utility. A PJL command (see LDOWNLOADTARGET on page 3-30 and LDOWNLOADTARGET Command on page 3-86).
The download target (the destination for the resource data collection) may be RAM (the default), flash memory, or disk. If you store resources (fonts, macros, or symbol sets) in RAM, the resources can be lost if the printer is reset or if the printer language changes while Resource Save is set to Off. In each case, the resources must be downloaded again. By storing resources on flash memory or disk, the resources become permanent in the printer.
6-3
Memory
Storing Resources on Flash Memory or Disk

Complete the following steps to download resources to flash memory or disk using the printer operator panel, MarkVision Professional, or a PJL command.
Set the download target to flash memory or disk. Resource Data Collection mode is enabled to the device selected.
Download the resources to flash memory or disk using PCL emulation or PostScript emulation.
PCL emulation collects and stores the currently defined font, macro, or symbol set information in printer RAM memory. These resources are written to flash memory or disk when Resource Data Collection is disabled (see step 3). Stored resources are also copied to flash memory or disk when a printer language switch occurs. PostScript emulation writes Type 1 fonts or other resources to flash memory or disk after successfully parsing a definefont operator.
Set Download Target to RAM. Resource Data Collection mode is disabled.
Viewing the Contents of Flash Memory and Disk

There are three ways to view the contents of flash memory and disk:
Send the PJL LPRINTDIRECTORY command (see LPRINT Commands (Information Pages) on page 3-83). Select Print Directory from the printer operator panel menus. Use the MarkVision Professional utility.
The directory lists the storage device (flash or disk), the names of the files, and the file size. See page 6-4 for a sample directory.
6-4
Memory
Example of Directory
The Directory that prints appears similar to the one below. An explanation of the parts of the Directory follows the example.
Optional Font Memory Size 1048576 bytes Part Name: FLASH Part Number: (none) Write password protected
ID =========== 1000 1002 1003
Type =================== PCL bitmap font PCL bitmap font PCL scalable font PostScript font User data Demo Unknown file type
Size ======== 32140 52550 254491 134572 1000 1000 1000 10 10
Prot. ======== W
Description ======================== ITClublnGrphBkOb Courier CG Times Courier My Program My Demo My Unknown
248 249
PCL macro PCL macro
R/W mydescription
9 files
476773 bytes used 0 bytes unavailable 571803 bytes free
Optional Font Memory

Expression used to indicate flash memory or disk is installed.
Part Name
Part Name as it is stored in the flash memory card header. If flash memory is formatted by the printer, the part name field is shown as FLASH. The part name field for the disk is not printed.
6-5
Memory
Part Number
Part Number as it is stored in the flash memory card header. If the flash memory is formatted by the printer, the part number field is shown as (none). The part number field for the disk is not printed.
Write Password Protected

Indicates the entire flash memory or disk is write-protected. If the device is read/write protected, "Read/Write password protected" is printed. If the device is write-protected, "Write protected" is printed. If the device is not protected, this line is blank. For more information, see File and Device Protection Commands on page 3-93 and Password Protection on page 6-7.
ID
Valid for PCL emulation macros, fonts, and symbol sets only. The ID must be used when adding a description to a macro or a symbol set. If two files with the same file type have duplicate IDs, the following occurs:
If multiple macros or symbol sets have been created with duplicate download IDs, only the last macro or symbol set is listed. It is the only one that can be selected. On flash memory, the number listed for bytes unavailable includes the unlisted macros and symbol sets. The bytes unavailable field is not applicable for the disk device. PostScript emulation fonts, and files created by PostScript emulation file operators, do not have IDs.
6-6
Memory
Type
File types that can be stored on flash memory or disk have unique extensions. The following file types are recognized by the flash format used on earlier printer models; the name of the file type printed in the directory appears in parenthesis. .t1 (PostScript font) .sFnt5 (PCL scalable font) .bFnt5 (PCL bitmap font) .Mac5 (PCL macro) Except as noted below, file types listed above are recognized by the flash format used in your printer. In addition, the flash format in your printer also recognizes the following formats: .data (user data) - any file written with PostScript operators .type1 (PostScript font) - replaces the earlier .t1 extension .demo (demo) - used for demonstration printouts or forms .p5scalable (PCL scalable font) .p5bitmap (PCL bitmapped font) .p5macro (PCL macro) - replaces the earlier .Mac5 extension .p5symset (PCL symbol set) Usually the PostScript file operators can only read/write files with the extension .data. Use the setfilenameextend operator to read/write other file types, including .demo. Any other file type appears in the list as Unknown File Type. The description column then contains the full filename with the file type (extension).
Size
The size listed for each resource includes the size of the file header.
Prot.
Indicates if the file is password protected. R/W - read/write protection W - write protection If this field is blank, then this resource in flash memory or disk is not password protected. For more information on file protection, see File and Device Protection Commands on page 3-93 and Password Protection on page 6-7.
6-7
Memory
Description
The description field for fonts comes from the font header. The description field for macros or symbol sets is blank unless the description field in the file header is set by the PJL LRESOURCE command. See Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables on page 3-52. The description for macros or symbol sets can be set only once for files stored in flash memory. The description can be set any number of times for macros or symbol sets stored on a disk. The limitation for flash files is due to flash technology. See the LDESCRIPTION variable in Table 3-9: Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables on page 3-53 for more information.
Password Protection
You can password protect either the entire flash memory or disk, or files stored on the flash memory or disk. There are two levels of password protection: Read/Write Ensures that the file or device is protected against reading and writing unless the password has been appropriately specified (applies only to actual file data). Write Ensures that data cannot be changed on a file or device unless the password has been appropriately specified. A Read/Write password takes precedence over a Write password. Each file or device can have a separate password. Write passwords ensure that files cannot be deleted, renamed, or updated and a device cannot be formatted or specified as a download target. Read/Write password protection provides the same protection as Write, but additionally ensures that data cannot be read from the file or device.
6-8
Memory
By using passwords, administrators can ensure data integrity and proper authorization. If flash memory is write password protected, for example, users cannot delete existing files, format the device, or download new files to the device (without first specifying the password). A specific example might be a macro file of an authorizing signature that is stored on flash memory with a Read/Write password. This password ensures that only those authorized can use the signature. All other files (fonts, letterhead, macros) can be unprotected for general use. Passwords are set, declared, retracted, and deleted using the PJL commands or the MarkVision Professional utility. See Protecting a File or Device on page 3-93.
Rewriting the Flash Content

Be aware that once a bit on the flash memory is turned from 1 (binary 1) to 0 (binary 0), it cannot be changed back to binary 1 without a complete flash memory format. As PostScript emulation file operators write data to flash memory, the printer microcode software verifies that none of the bits being set to binary 1 is binary 0. If any attempt is made to change a 0 bit back to 1, a PostScript emulation ioerror occurs. When a device is formatted, all locations are set to binary 1. This is also the reason descriptions and passwords can be set only once for files on flash memory.
6-9
Memory
Accessing Files with PostScript Emulation

File Naming Conventions
For any PostScript emulation operator that requires a filename parameter, the filename can be one of the following: %device%filename Specifically references a file on a particular device. If the filename does not exist on %device%, no other %device% is accessed for a duplicate filename. filename Does not specifically reference a device. The following action occurs:
For the PostScript emulation operator deletefile, only the first device in the search order is checked for filename. For all other PostScript emulation operators, and all other combinations of search order and available devices, each installed %device% is checked in the search order for the existence of filename. The operator acts upon the first filename that it finds.
Device Names
The term device refers to flash memory, disk, or ROM. For PostScript emulation, some of the operators require or return device names. These operators are: deletefile, filenameforall, devforall, devdismount, devmount, devformat, devstatus. The device always begins and optionally ends with a % character. The following are the valid device names:
%rom% %flash% %flash1% %disk% %disk1%
The same filename can exist on more than one device. The device prefix determines the actual file to use. For example, %rom%myfile and %flash%myfile designate, respectively, a file called myfile both on the ROM and on flash memory. The device name distinguishes which file to use.
6-10
Memory
Device names are case sensitive. They must appear exactly as shown. Each device (except the disk) has one synonym. For example, the flash memory can be referred to as %flash% or %flash1%. The name with the 1 is a unique identifier. This system allows for future expansion of multiple flash memory or disk devices. The disk device name provides for multiple physical units and multiple logical units. Thus, %disk1_0% indicates the first physical unit and the first (0) logical partition on the device. Currently, one physical device (for ROM, flash memory, and disk) is supported. The disk supports only the first (0) logical partition.
Filenames
Each file on a device has a unique name to identify the information contained within the file. The name may be up to 127 characters in length. All character codes from X'01' to X'FF' are valid (X'00' is not valid). Filenames are case sensitive: for example, %flash%myfile and %flash%MYFILE indicate different files on the flash memory.
Filename Extensions
By default, all files referenced when using the PostScript emulation file operators are given a .data extension. For example, if the following PostScript emulation command occurs, (%flash%myfile) (w) file the file myfile.data is opened on flash memory. The .data extension is added to:
Enable the Print Directory feature to identify files as PostScript emulation data files. Ensure the integrity of files, such as resource collection files and demonstration files.
However, it is sometimes necessary to access files by their real name through PostScript emulation. For example, you may want to remove old versions of PCL language resource collection fonts (without formatting the entire device). To do this, use the PostScript emulation setfilenameextend operator. This operator is in the statusdict dictionary.
6-11
Memory
The value of this operator adds the extension .data to all filenames referenced when using PostScript emulation file operators. To prevent the .data extension from being added, issue the following PostScript emulation command: statusdict begin false setfilenameextend end To add the .data extension automatically again, issue: statusdict begin true setfilenameextend end The following example shows how to remove a file for the font myfont from the disk. The PostScript emulation resource collection filename is myfont.type1. The PostScript emulation command to remove the file is: statusdict begin false setfilenameextend (%disk%myfont.type1) deletefile true setfilenameextend end For other file types, see page 6-6. Note: We recommend that you enable setfilenameextend as soon as possible after you disable it. For example, the following PostScript emulation commands generate an undefinedfilename error: (%disk%iconimage) (w) file dup (0f0606060686c6ff) writestring closefile statusdict begin false setfilenameextend end (%disk%iconimage) (r) file %%[ Error: undefinedfilename; OffendingCommand: file ]%% This occurs because the filename actually written to disk is iconimage.data. When setfilenameextend is enabled (the default), all PostScript emulation file operators treat filename operands as filename.data; when disabled, they treat filename operands literally. If you receive unexpected undefinedfilename or similar errors, try toggling setfilenameextend and sending your print job again.
6-12
Memory
Device Search Order

If you are using the PostScript emulation operators run, file, renamefile, status or eexec, you do not need to specify the device. If you omit the device name, devices are searched in the default order: disk and then flash memory. If the following PostScript emulation code is encountered, (myfile) (w) file the file on disk is used (since disk occurs before flash memory in the default search order), and files cannot be created in ROM. The operator deletefile searches only the first device in the default search order if a device is not specified. Use the PostScript emulation operators devmount, devdismount to change the order. The default search order is determined by the order the devices are mounted. For example, if you want to place the disk device after the flash memory in the default search order, use the following command sequence: (%disk%) devdismount (%disk%) devmount To change the order so the devices are searched as disk, flash memory, and then ROM, use the following PostScript emulation command sequence:
(%rom%) devdismount (%flash%) devdismount (%disk%) devdismount (%disk%) devmount (%flash%) devmount (%rom%) devmount
If the device is already mounted, the following operators may change the search order:
initializedisk devformat
<</InitializeAction>>setdevparams
Sending these operators has the following effect on the devices in the search order:
1 2 3
If mounted, (%device%) devdismount Formats the device If dismounted in step 1, (%device%) devmount
If you do not want a device searched, dismount it and leave it dismounted.
6-13
Memory
Note: Do not leave the ROM device unmounted. All internal fonts are contained on the ROM device. In the previous examples, the devmount, devdismount operators must be used outside the server loop. We recommend that you place the requests in a stop context so that if the devices do not exist, error recovery can take place. Previous search orders are not retained. Once a change is made, it remains in effect.
Performance
Some performance degradation may occur during initial access to a resource on a disk (as opposed to flash memory or RAM). However, the information is put in cache, and further references to that resource occur at RAM speed. Table 6-1: Device Performance Retrieval Speeds
Device Disk Flash Memory Retrieval Speed 70KB/second 1MB/second Write 70KB/second 200KB/second
Job Buffering
Job buffering to the disk lets you store incoming print jobs on a disk installed on your printer. Although job buffering is designed for individual workstations and networks using MarkVision Professional as the primary tool to control printer operations, you can handle some job buffering functions from the printer operator panel. See your printer documentation for more details. Job buffering requires a minimum of 10 percent of disk storage space. For example, if you have an 840MB hard disk installed, you must partition a minimum of 84MB of the disk for job buffering. You must define the size of the job buffer area before you enable buffering for any link ports.
6-14
Memory
For minimum acceptable job buffering performance, the hard disk should be able to read and write files at a sustained rate of 600Kb/sec. The Lexmark hard disk option supports this requirement. Some advantages of job buffering include:
The printer accepts print jobs more quickly. The printer accepts print jobs from all ports as long as the disk is not filled. The printer continues to print even after the host computer, network connection, or printer server goes down. Buffered jobs print when power is restored after a printer power loss. The printer manages print jobs from multiple sources.
Keep in mind that job buffering may also:
Slow system performance. Restrict the amount of memory available on the disk for other uses. Increase the time required for a printer reset or recovery after a power loss. Reprint jobs after a power-on reset (POR).
Creating a Partition
Before job buffering is enabled for a port, you must allocate a portion of the disk for job buffering functions. The minimum size for a job buffering partition is 10 percent of the disk storage space. When a new partition is created, the entire disk is formatted and all resources previously downloaded to the disk are lost. Once a partition is defined, this disk space is reserved for job buffering.
Enabling Job Buffering

Once a partition is allocated, job buffering to a disk may be enabled for each active link port. You can enable job buffering from the operator panel menus, if available, or through MarkVision Professional. You cannot enable a port before the partition is allocated. When buffering is enabled from the printer operator panel, a power-on reset (POR) automatically occurs. If buffering is enabled through MarkVision Professional, you must perform a full power-on reset before job buffering can occur.
6-15
Memory
Disabling Job Buffering

When you disable job buffering, it takes effect immediately on the port you disabled. A POR is automatically performed when job buffering is disabled for any port from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional, so the unused memory resources can be reallocated. When buffering is disabled on a port, any jobs on the disk are printed before normal processing of incoming jobs continues. To delete or resize a job buffer partition, first delete or print all jobs. Then, disable job buffering on all ports. Finally, delete or resize the job buffer partition.
Recovering from a Power Loss

If the printer loses power, the job being spooled to the disk may be lost. Jobs already stored on the disk remain intact. When power is restored, you are asked if you want to print the jobs held in the buffer. See your printer documentation for information on how to cancel the jobs or print the jobs held in the buffer. Jobs that were partially printed during the loss of power are printed again in their entirety when power is restored.
7-1
Specifications
CHAPTER 7: Printer Specifications

This chapter lists printer specifications and information about hardware, environmental conditions, and power requirements.
Airflow Requirement
Room should meet ASHRAE 621989 standards.
Noise Emission Levels

The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296. Table 7-1: Noise Emission Levels
1-Meter Average Sound Pressure, dBA Status Printing E120, E120n 51 dBA E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n 51dBA (E238, E240, E240n) 52dBA (E340, E342n) Duplex printing Standby (Idle without Power Saver) Sleep 52dBA 32 dBA 26dBA 27dBA (E340, E342n only) inaudible inaudible E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn 50 dBA (E250d, E250 dn) 52 dBA (E350d, E352dn, E450dn) inaudible
Declared Sound Power Level, Bels Status Printing E120, E120n E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n 6.6 BA (all models E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E4450dn 6.5 BA (E250d, E250dn) 6.6 BA (E350d, E352dn, E450dn) Duplex printing Idle (standby mode) Sleep 4.0 BA (all models) inaudible inaudible inaudible
7-2
Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Table 7-2: Printer Electrical Specifications
Printer Model E120, E120n Low Voltage E120, E120n High Voltage Other Voltage models (Japan only) E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n Low Voltage E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n HighVoltage E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n Other Voltage Models (Japan only) E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn Low Voltage E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn HighVoltage E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn Other Voltage Models (Japan only)
1Using
Electrical Specification 110127 V at 50-60Hz (+/-3), nominal 90135 V, limits of operating range 220240 V at 50/60 Hz (+/-3), nominal 198259 V, limits of operating range 90-110 V at 50/60 Hz (+/-3), nominal 110127 V at 50-60Hz (+/-3), nominal 90135 V, limits of operating range 220240 V at 50/60 Hz (+/-3), nominal 198259 V, limits of operating range 90-110 V at 50/60 Hz (+/-3), nominal
110127 V at 50-60Hz (+/-3), nominal 90135 V, limits of operating range 220240 V at 50/60 Hz (+/-3), nominal 198259 V, limits of operating range 90-110 V at 50/60 Hz (+/-3), nominal
220-110 power converter with 110 V printer is not recommended.
Warning: Lexmark recommends that you do not use voltage converters with printers.
7-3
Specifications
Power Requirements
The following tables list the nominal average power requirements (including fuser power).
Table 7-3: Lexmark E120 and E120n average power requirements

Printing states Average power while printing Power consumption Continuous printing (xW or less) Ready Mode (xW or less) Power Saver Mode (xW or less) Peek Current while printing 100 Volts 115 Volts 230 Volts 8.8 A 7.3 A 3.6 A Average Current while printing 100 Volts 115 Volts 230 Volts 3.2 A 3.0 A 1.5 A 3.2 A 3.0 A 1.5 A 8.8 A 7.3 A 3.6 A 300 W 55 W 8W 300 W 55W 8W E120 E120n
Table 7-4: Lexmark E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n nominal average power requirement
Printing states Off Power consumption Continuous Printing (xW or less) Power Consumption Ready Mode (xW or less) Power Consumption Power Saver Move (xW or less) 8W 10 W 70 W 70 W 420 W 460 W E238, E240, E240n 0W E340, E342n 0W
7-4
Specifications
Table 7-4: Lexmark E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n nominal average power requirement
Printing states Maximum Current while printing 100 Volts 120 Volts 230 Volts Average Current while printing 100 Volts 120 Volts 230 Volts 6A 6A 3A 6A 6A 3A 8.6 A 7.7 A 3.4 A 8.6 A 7.7 A 3.4 A E238, E240, E240n E340, E342n
Table 7-5: Lexmark E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn nominal average power requirements
Printing states Power Consumption: Continuous printings (xW or less) Ready Mode (xW or less) Sleep/Power Saver Mode 400 W 10 W 9W Max current while printing: 100 V 110 V 220 V Average current while printing: 100 Volts 120 Volts 230 Volts 7A 6A 3.1 A 7A 6A 3.1 A 9.1 A 9.1 A 4.0 A 9.1 A 9.1 A 4.0 A 520 W 12 W 10 W E250d, E250dn E350d, E352dn, E450dn
7-5
Specifications
Physical Specifications
Table 7-6: Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn Dimensions
Printers E120, E120n Length 485 mm (19.09 in) Toner cartridge (2K) 350 mm (13.78 in.) E238, E240, E240n, E340, and E342n (printer only) 550-Sheet Drawer 353.1 mm (13.9 in) 376.0 mm3 (14.8 in.) E240, E240n, E340, E342n with 550 sheet drawer2 E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn 250-sheet drawer2 376.0mm (14.8 in.) 359 mm1 (14.1 in.) 357 mm
1,3 1, 3
Width 292 mm (11.5 in.) 83 mm (3.27 in.) 396.2 mm (15.6 in) 393.0 mm (15.5 in.) 396.2 mm (15.6 in.) 396 mm (15.6 in.) 396 mm (15.6 in.) 396 mm (15.6 in.)
3
Height 325 mm (12.8 in.) 200 mm (7.87 in.) 248.9 mm (9.8 in.) 130.0 mm (5.1 in.) 381.9 mm (15.0 in.) 259 mm1 (10.2 in.) 101 mm 4.0 in 359 mm1,5 (15.3 in.) 130 mm (5.1 in.) 388 mm, (15.3 in)
1,5 1, 4 1
Weight 8.57 kg (18.9 lb) 0.916 kg (2.018 lb) 10.0 kg2 22 lb. 4.0 kg. (8.8 lb.) 14.0 kg. (30.8 lb.) 11.37 kg2 25.01 lb 2.64 kg 5.8 lb. 14.5 kg 31.81 lb 3.23 kg 7.11 lb. 14.6 kg. (32.12 lb)
(14.7 in.) All printers plus 250-sheet drawer 550-sheet drawer 357 mm1,3 (14.7 in.) 373.5 mm (14.7 in.) All printers plus 550-sheet drawer
1 2Printer
393.0 mm (15.5 in.)
374.5 mm (14.7 in.)
1,3
396 mm (15.6 in.)
Measured with Input and Exit Tray extensions in collapsed positions. weight includes the print cartridge that ships with the printer. 3Measured with paper size set to Letter. 4 Total height of an E240, E240n, E340, E342n printers installed on an optional drawer is 3.0 mm (0.1 in.); greater than the combined height of the individual items due to the interlocking fit of the printer and drawer. 5Total height of a E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn printers installed on an optional drawer is 1.5 mm (0.1 in.); shorter than the combined height of the individual items due to the interlocking fit of the pritner and drawer.
7-6
Specifications
Clearance Requirements
Table 7-7: Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, and E450dn
Left side E120, E120n 355 mm (14 in.) E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n 300 mm (12 in.) Right Side 355 mm (14 in.) 300 mm (12 in.) Front 388 mm (15.3 in.) 200 mm (8 in.) Rear 388 mm (15.3 in.) 90 mm (3.5 in.) Top 213 mm (8.4 in.) 150 mm (6 in.)
Note: When installing the printer, the customer should allow enough room to access the paper tray(s) and paper exits. E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn 609.6 mm (24 in.) 381 mm (15 in.)1 508 mm (20 in.) 304.8 mm (12 in.) 1,0668 mm2 (42 in.)
7-7
Specifications
Environmental Conditions
Note: When shipping or storing printers, always pack the printer supplies (cartridges and photoconductors, for example) separately. Table 7-8: Air Temperature Ranges
Printer Model E120, E120n E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn Operating Value 60 F (15.6 C) to 90 F (32.2oC) 60o F (15.6oC) to 90o F (32.2oC) 60o F (15.6oC) to 90o F (32.2oC)
o o o
Shipping/Storage Value -20 to 40oC (-4 to 104oF) -20 to 40oC (-4 to 104oF) -20 to 40oC (-4 to 104oF)
Table 7-9: Humidity Ranges

Printer Model E120, E120n E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn E450dn Operating Value 880% up to 80% (for temperatures less than 25.50 C (780 F) up to 80% (for temperatures less than 25.50 C (780 F) Shipping/Storage Value 595% 8-80% 8-80%
Altitude Specifications
Table 7-10: Printer Altitude Specifications
Printer Model E120, E120n E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn Altitude (Above Sea Level) 10,300 meters (34,000 ft.) 10,300 meters (34,000 ft.) 10,300 meters (34,000 ft.)
Atmospheric Pressure
74.6 kPa
8-1
Interfaces
CHAPTER 8: Printer Interfaces

Interfaces connect your printer to other devices, such as a computer. Some Lexmark printers have a standard parallel connector (also referred to as a Centronics-type interface) and/or a USB connector. Some Lexmark printers have an internal print server and a USB connector. Some printers also offer a parallel interface option. See your printer documentation for more information. See page 8-7 for more information about parallel interface. If a serial connector is required, you may be able to install an RS-232C Serial/Parallel 1284-C Interface Card. See page 8-20 for more information about serial interface. Some printers have standard print servers, but you can also buy optional print servers that connect the printer to Token-Ring or Ethernet networks. For detailed installation or setup instructions, see your printer documentation or the Software and Documentation CD. See Network Support on page 8-30 for more information about print servers. See your printer documentation for information on which printer interface options your printer supports and for detailed installation instructions. Note: All print servers are capable of supporting AppleTalk.
8-2
Interfaces
Setting Up the Communications Port

You must establish communication between your printer and computer. To do this, you define your communications port in the application you are using. Instructions for several applications or operating systems are as follows.
Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows 95/98/Me

In your Windows 95/98/Me application:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
On the Menu bar, click Start. Click Settings. Click Control Panel. The Control Panel screen appears. Double-click the System icon. The System Properties screen appears. Click the Device Manager tab. Scroll down to Ports and click the + once to expand the list of available Ports. Double-click the communications port you want to configure. Click the Properties button at the bottom of the screen. The Communications Port Properties screen for this specific port displays. For example, if you select the COM1 port, then the Communications Port [COM1] Properties screen displays.
9 10
Click the Port Settings tab. Fill out the fields for the following printer settings to make them match your printer settings:
Bits per second Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow Control Note: For Flow Control, select Hardware if you want DTR protocol or Xon/ Xoff for Xon/Xoff protocol.
8-3
Interfaces
11 12
Click OK. Close all windows now that the port is set up.
Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows NT 4.0

In your Windows NT 4.0 application:
1 2 3 4 5 6
On the Menu bar, click Start. Click Settings. Click Control Panel. The Control Panel screen appears. Double-click the Ports icon. The Ports screen appears. Select the communications port you want to configure. Click the Settings button. The Settings screen for this specific port displays. For example, if you select the COM1 port, then the Settings for COM1 screen displays.
Fill out the fields for the following printer settings to make them match your printer settings:
Baud Rate Parity Stop bits Flow Control Note: For Flow Control, select Hardware if you want DTR protocol or Xon/ Xoff for Xon/Xoff protocol.
8 9
Click OK. Close all screens now that the port is set up.
8-4
Interfaces
Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows 2000

In your Windows 2000 application:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
On the Menu bar, click Start. Click Settings. Click Control Panel. The Control Panel screen appears. Double-click the System icon. The System Properties screen appears. Select the Hardware tab. In the Device Manager area of the Hardware tab screen, click the Device Manager button. The Device Manager screen appears. Scroll down to Ports and click the + once to expand the list of available Ports. Select the communications port you want to configure and double-click. The Communications Port Properties screen for this specific port displays. For example, if you select the COM1 port, then the Communications Port [COM1] Properties screen displays.
9 10
11 12
8-5
Interfaces
Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows XP

In your Windows XP application:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
On the Menu bar, click Start. Click Control Panel. The Control Panel screen appears. Switch the Control Panel to Classic View. Click the Hardware tab. In the Device Manager area of the Hardware tab screen, click the Device Manager button. The Device Manager screen appears. Scroll down to Ports and click the + once to expand the list of available Ports. Select the communications port you want to configure and double-click. The Communications Port Properties screen for this specific port displays. For example, if you select the COM1 port, then the Communications Port [COM1] Properties screen displays.
8 9
10 11
8-6
Interfaces
Deciding Which Interface to Use

On some printers, you can attach multiple interface cables to the printer at the same time. The printer automatically switches to the interface receiving a job. Then it prints the job and begins searching the interfaces for the next job. One or more of the following is built into your printer: a standard parallel connector, a USB connector, or a network connector. To use a port, connect a cable from the printer to the computer, then set the appropriate values from the printer operator panel or, for network connected printers only, through MarkVision Professional. See your printer documentation for more information. Use a parallel interface when you:
Attach your printer to a personal computer. Attach your printer to a host system with a Centronics-compatible parallel port. Attach your printer to a Lexmark external print server.
Use a USB interface when you:
Attach your printer to a personal computer, iMac, Sun Ray, or Sun Blade. Need to connect the printer to a computer that does not have an available parallel port.
Use a serial interface when you:
Require an interface cable more than 10 feet in length. Note: Lexmark also offers a 20-ft parallel interface cable (part number 1427498).
Need to connect the printer to a computer that does not have an available parallel port.
Attach network cables to the Token-Ring or Ethernet print servers installed in your printer. Refer to the MarkNet Quick Start book or your user documentation for additional setup information.
8-7
Interfaces
Parallel Interface
Use the Lexmark 3.04 m (10 ft) parallel cable part number 1021231, or a cable that is IEEE 1284 compliant, to connect your printer to a personal computer or to a host system with a Centronics-compatible parallel port. See your printer documentation for the location of the printer parallel connector. Note: To reset your printer with an INIT* signal, set Honor Init to On from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. See your printer documentation for more information. Your printer can communicate with a computer across the parallel interface in three ways:
Computer to Printer
This is typically how a computer and printer communicate. When the printer is receiving data from the computer, it can use either Standard or Fastbytes protocol. The burst transfer rate in Fastbytes is faster than in Standard protocol. For best throughput, use Fastbytes protocol.
Printer to Computer (Advanced Status)

Your printer can send data to the computer. This capability lets the printer send status messages to the computer on the parallel interface.
Parallel Modes 1 and 2

These are printer features that enhance reliability of data transfer from the host computer to the printer. See Parallel Mode 1 on page 8-14 and Parallel Mode 2 on page 8-15 for more information.
8-8
Interfaces
Standard Parallel Connector

The standard IEEE 1284-B compliant parallel connector on the printer is a 36-pin D-shell female receptacle, as shown.
18 1
36
19
Using the INIT* Signal to Initialize

When the printer is using the parallel interface and it receives an INIT* signal, it initializes as follows (unless INIT* is disabled by a variable default setting):
It prints data received before INIT*, and then initializes. It returns variable defaults to the values stored in the user default settings. It returns fixed default settings to the factory values. It retains permanent downloaded fonts and macros, but deletes temporary downloaded fonts and macros. The link buffer remains intact. Variable default paper size settings become the active paper formatting size. If paper is loaded in a tray with auto size sensing, the printer resets the active default paper formatting size to the size of the paper in the tray. INIT* is not honored when Hex Print is active. INIT* causes the parallel interface to go busy. The printer processes INIT* when the parallel interface becomes active and all preceding characters have been processed.
Computer-to-Printer Communications
This section describes how the parallel interface receives data from the computer.
8-9
Interfaces
Standard Parallel Connector

The cabling in the following illustration supports Standard and Fastbytes protocols and IEEE 1284 Nibble, Byte, and ECP protocols.
18 36 Printer Side 14 Computer Side 1
IEEE 1284-B
IEEE 1284-A
36-Pin D-Shell Connector (Male) 1 19
25-Pin D-Shell Connector (Male) 25 13
The following illustration shows the pin assignments for connecting the 25-pin connector to the 36-pin connector. The symbol * indicates an active low signal.
Printer Side
Computer Side
36-Pin Connector 1284-B
25-Pin Connector
Note: Lexmark IEEE 1284 compliant cables are supported up to 20 feet. Cable lengths greater than 20 feet are not supported. The cable drawing to the left is a functional representation of the Lexmark cables; it does not reflect correct pairing of leads or unused pairs.
8-10
Interfaces
The parallel interface consists of an 8-bit parallel data bus with the following characteristics:
Uses 17 of the 36 positions on the printer connector, as follows: The host system controls 12 lines, which it uses to send data and commands to the printer. The printer controls five lines. The printer uses two lines to notify the computer when data is transferred successfully and three lines to report printer status.
Controls synchronization with an externally supplied STROBE* pulse. Controls data flow control with BUSY and ACKNLG* signals. Does not carry out data transfer by ignoring the BUSY or ACKNLG* signal. (The system can carry out data transfer to the printer only when the level of the BUSY signal is low and after confirming the ACKNLG* signal is high.) Uses standard transistor-transistor logic (TTL) levels for all interface control signals and input data. Interface conditions are based on TTL levels. All printer outputs are totem-pole TTL devices. All printer input/output (I/O) are devices with an internal pull-up resistor to 5 V. Rise and fall times of each signal must be less than 1,500 nanoseconds (ns) without slope reversal.
Note: For best results, use the Lexmark 1.83 m (6 ft) parallel cable, part number 11K4078.
8-11
Interfaces
Standard Protocol Data Transfer Sequence

The following illustration shows the typical data transfer sequence on the parallel interface. See Table 8-1 for typical parallel interface timings on the parallel interface.
DATA1-8 A B C
STROBE* D BUSY E G F
ACK*
8-12
Interfaces
Table 8-1 shows all protocol timings in nanoseconds. Table 8-1: Typical Parallel Interface Timings
Time A B C D E F G Name Data setup to STROBE* low STROBE* width Data hold after STROBE* STROBE* low to BUSY high ACKNLG* low until ACKNLG* high ACKNLG* high to BUSY low1 BUSY low and ACKNLG* high to STROBE* low of ACKNLG* and BUSY is not consistent Minimum/Maximum 500 min. 500 min. 500 min. 500 max. 500 min. 500 min.
1 Relationship
Fastbytes Protocol Data Transfer Sequence

Your printer is equipped with Fastbytes protocol, which is an enhanced parallel interface protocol. Fastbytes protocol may give you a faster data transfer time on some personal computers and operating systems. Fastbytes protocol is the printer default. If you have data transmission problems between your personal computer and the printer, change the parallel protocol to Standard. This causes the printer to operate in IEEE-compliant compatibility mode. The following illustration shows the typical timing sequence.
DATA 1-8
STROBE*
ACK*
BUSY
8-13
Interfaces
Table 8-2 shows all protocol timings in nanoseconds Table 8-2: Fastbytes Timing Sequence
Time T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 Name Data setup to STROBE* low STROBE* low to ACKNLG* low ACKNLG* low to STROBE* high STROBE* high to ACKNLG* high ACKNLG* high and BUSY low to STROBE* low ACKNLG* low to change data STROBE* Timeout Max based on Auto Strobe Timer T8 ACKNLG* width Equal to Data Setup Time T9 T10 ACKNLG* to BUSY Skew STROBE* high time Equal to Data Setup Time +/ - 20 max. 400 min. 400 min. Minimum/Maximum 400 min. 0 0 0 0 50 min. 500 min.
Printer-to-Computer Communication (Advanced Status)

The printer has a standard IEEE 1284-B compliant connector and is an IEEE 1284-I compliant device. The optional RS-232C Serial/Parallel 1284-C Interface Card has an IEEE 1284-C compliant connector and is an IEEE 1284-I compliant device. Your printer could be considered an IEEE 1284-II compliant device if the C to B style connector converter were used. The printer exceeds the maximum allowable circuit capacitance for Level II interfaces. Compliance with IEEE 1284-II may slow data flow control time slightly; however, all minimum and maximum criteria set forth in IEEE 1284 documentation will be met. The printer supports:
Compatibility mode Nibble mode Byte mode ECP mode
8-14
Interfaces
The printer also supports a Device ID function. When queried for its ID, the printer returns the following information:
Manufacturer Command set Model of printer
The LEXPARAL.EXE file is available from ftp.lexmark.com as /pub/driver/ technical_brief/LEXPARAL.EXE. Use your web browser to access ftp:// ftp.lexmark.com/pub/driver/technical_brief/LEXPARAL.EXE. When the Advanced Status menu item is set to On, the printer supports IEEE 1284 communication. If the attached host computer does not support IEEE 1284 communication, you can turn Advanced Status to Off from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional, and SLCTIN* and AUTO FD XT* will be ignored. Note: Excessive device queries and status checks (Nibble and Byte modes) will slow printer performance. You can get IEEE 1284 documentation by calling 1-800-678-IEEE (order number DS02709).
Parallel Mode 1
Parallel Mode 1 is a feature available for many Lexmark printers. The factory default setting is On or Off depending on your printer model. See your printer documentation for the factory default for your printer. If the host side of the parallel interface is using open collector drivers to transmit data to the printer, Parallel Mode 1 should be set to Off to increase reliability of data transfer. Turning this mode Off equalizes all parallel interface signal impedances. On some printer models, you can set Parallel Mode 1 to Off from the printer operator panel, through MarkVision Professional, or through a PJL command. See your printer documentation for more information.
8-15
Interfaces
Parallel Mode 2
Parallel Mode 2 is a feature available for many Lexmark printers. The factory default setting is On. The timing required by the printer is clearly indicated in Standard Protocol Data Transfer Sequence on page 8-11. This is the classic Centronics interface timing. By setting Parallel Mode 2 to Off from the printer operator panel, through MarkVision Professional, or through a PJL command, the printer changes when data is valid. Once Parallel Mode 2 is set to Off, the printer takes data from the host computer at the trailing edge of STROBE. This is the last possible host driven transition where data should be valid. If Parallel Mode 2 is Off, the printer automatically turns Advanced Status to Off, eliminating any IEEE 1284 data flow control. Note: You may find this feature helpful when having data transfer reliability problems.
Signal Descriptions
STROBE Receiver for the Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, E450dn
The following diagram illustrates the STROBE receiver for the Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352d, E352dn, E450dn.
Connector Pin 470 10% GND
74LVC161284
8-16
Interfaces
Connector Pin
74LVC161284
GND 470 pF 10%
8-17
Interfaces
AUTOFD* Receiver for the Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, E450dn
The following diagram illustrates the AUTOFD* receiver for the Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352d, E352dn, E450dn.
74LVC161284
Connector Pin 150 pF 20% GND
DATA 1-8 Signal Driver/Receivers for the Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, E450dn
The following diagram illustrates the DATA 1-8 signal driver/receivers for the Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352d, E352dn, E450dn.
Connector Pin
74LVC161284
150 pF 20% GND
8-18
Interfaces
ACKNLG*, ERROR*, SLCT, PE Drivers for the Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, E450dn
The following diagram illustrates the ACKNLG*, ERROR*, SLCT, PE drivers for the Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352d, E352dn, E450dn.
8-19
Interfaces
BUSY Driver and INIT* Receiver for the Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, E450dn
The following diagram illustrates the BUSY driver and the INIT* receiver for the Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352d, E352dn, E450dn.
INIT* (input) GND 50K ohm 5% 1500 pF20% 74LVC161284
BUSY (output) 150 pF20% GND 74LVC161284
Note: The cap value is 1000 pF for E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352d, E352dn, and E450dn.
8-20
Interfaces
SLCTIN* Receiver for the Lexmark Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352dn, E450dn
The following diagram illustrates the SLCTIN* receiver for the Lexmark E120, E120n, E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352d, E352dn, E450dn.
Connector Pin 39 ohm 10% 1500 pF20% GND
74LVC161284
Note: The cap value is 1000 pF for E238, E240, E240n, E250d, E250dn, E340, E342n, E350d, E352d, E352dn, and E450dn.
Serial Interface
The serial interface allows data to flow back and forth between the computer and the printer. However, the serial interface transfers data at a slower rate than the parallel interface. If a serial connector is required, you may be able to install an RS-232C Serial Interface Card, an External Serial Adapter, or an RS-232C Serial/Parallel 1284-C Interface Card. See your printer documentation for more information. Use RS-232C serial interface if the printer is more than 3.04 m (10 ft) from the computer but less than 15.24 m (50 ft) away. (You can also use a 6.1 m (20 ft) Lexmark cable to connect a printer and a computer located up to 20 feet apart.) When using the serial interface, your printer has the following differences from the serial interface on some other printers:
The printer returns XON/XOFF with 2 stop bits in all cases. The printer does not support DTR inversion.
8-21
Interfaces
Using the RS-232C Serial Interface

This section describes how to use the RS-232C serial interface.
How to Connect the RS-232C Serial Interface

Use Lexmark serial cable P/N 1038693 (15.24 m or 50 ft) to connect the serial interface.
RS-232C Serial Cable Pin Assignments

The RS-232C serial cable appears as follows:
25-Pin D-Shell (Male) 25-Pin D-Shell (Female)
13
25
13
25
14 Printer Side Computer Side
14
Table 8-3: Dedicated Serial Connector Pin Assignments (RS-232C)

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 Signal GND TXD RXD RTS CTS DSR Out In Out In In Direction Description Frame Ground Transmit Data. The pin transmits data to your computer or terminal. Receive Data. The pin receives data from your computer or terminal. Request to Send. The printer sets this signal high and the signal remains high while the printer is on. Clear to Send. This pin is optionally used for serial data flow control protocol when in serial mode. Data Set Ready. This pin is optionally used for data validation, depending on the Honor DSR setting, or flow control, depending on the Serial Protocol setting.
8-22
Interfaces
Table 8-3: Dedicated Serial Connector Pin Assignments (RS-232C) (Continued)

Pin 7 20 Signal GND DTR Out Direction Description Logic Ground Data Terminal Ready. This pin is optionally used for serial data flow control protocol when in serial mode.
Using an IBM-Compatible Personal Computer with Serial Interface RS-232C

Note: These instructions are for connecting the printer to an IBM-compatible personal computer using a dual asynchronous adapter or an external print server. If you are using any of the above products, or if your computer has a 9-pin D shell connector that conforms to the IBM designed 9-pin serial port, use a 9-pin to 25-pin cable, such as IBM Part Number 6450242 (254 mm or 10 in.). Null modem cables, such as Lexmark part number 1038693 [15.24 m (50 ft)], will connect the converter cable to the printer. The illustration below represents the 25-pin connectors for the RS-232C cable (1038693).
13 25
14
8-23
Interfaces
The following illustration shows the pin assignments for the 9-pin to 25-pin IBM EIA RS-232C serial cables.
9 to 25 Pin Cable Adapter, such as IBM 6450242 (10 in.) Lexmark 1038693 (50 ft)
Shield
Shield
9 (F)
25 (M)
25 (F)
25 (M)
Serial Communication Parameters (RS-232C)

The following paragraphs show acceptable values for serial communication parameters.
Voltage Level Range

The maximum voltage level for control lines or data lines is +/- 25 positive V dc and +/- 25 negative V dc. A timing or control line is active if the voltage is more than +3 V, or inactive if the voltage is less than -3 V. The voltage reference point is the signal ground on pin 7. A data signal greater than +3 V means that the bit is a logical 0. A signal less than -3 V means that the bit is logical 1. For additional information, refer to Interface between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Communications Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange, published by the Electronic Industries Association, publications EIA RS-232C and EIA\TIA-232-E.
8-24
Interfaces
Serial Data Frame Considerations (RS-232C)

The computer sends serial data in data frames (also known as packets). You can create 10-bit, 11-bit, and 12-bit data frames and set the serial data transfer parameter so that each data frame contains 7 or 8 data bits. However, your printer is an 8-bit printer; characters, controls, and all points addressable (APA) graphics need 8 bits of data. If you select 7-bit data transfer, some unexpected characters might print.
Data Transmission
The list of acceptable data transfer rates (in bits per second) can be accessed from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. See your printer documentation for more information.
Data Bits
The printer sends or receives 7 or 8 data bits in each transmission frame, depending on which one is selected.
Start and Stop Bits

The printer receives data with 1 start bit and either 1 or 2 stop bits. The printer always sends 1 start and 2 stop bits.
Parity
There are four possible parity settings: Odd, Even, None, and Ignore. Odd The port expects to receive data frames with an odd number of logical 1s per byte. The printer transmits XOFF and XON with odd parity. If the printer detects a parity error, the port sends X'5F' to the printer instead of the character sent by the host system. The port expects to receive data frames with an even number of logical 1s per byte. The port transmits XOFF and XON with even parity. If the port detects a parity error, the port sends an inverted question mark to the printer instead of the character sent by the host system. The port expects no parity bit when it receives data. The port transmits XON and XOFF without parity bits. The port expects a parity bit when the port receives a data frame. The port ignores the parity bit. The port uses even parity when it transmits XON and XOFF.
Even
None Ignore
8-25
Interfaces
Some printers post a 54 Standard Serial Error or a 54 Serial Option x Error (x represents the number of the serial port) the first time they detect a transmission error (parity, overrun, or framing). The 54 Standard Serial Error or the 54 Serial Option x Error can be reset from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. See your printer documentation for more information. If repeated serial errors occur, power the printer off and then back on to restore proper serial operation.
Data Flow Control

Data flow control is accomplished through the following lines:
Data Set Ready (DSR) Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
Five data flow control protocols are available:
DTR pacing DTR/DSR XON/XOFF XON/XOFF/DTR XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR
Your printer supports two modes in which both hardware and software data flow control protocols are performed. In XON/XOFF/DTR mode, the printer uses both XON/XOFF and DTR pacing. When XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR mode is active, the printer uses both XON/XOFF and DTR/DSR pacing. Robust XON may be selected when the data flow control protocol for the serial port is set to XON/XOFF, XON/XOFF/DTR, or XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR pacing. The printer sends a continuous stream of XON signals to the host computer to indicate that the serial port is ready to receive additional data. The signals continue as long as one of the following conditions exist:
No data has been received across the serial port in the last second. The last XON was accepted by the host computer. The printer is ready to receive data.
See your printer documentation for more information about selecting the protocol from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional.
8-26
Interfaces
Protocol (RS-232C)
Table 8-4 shows the state or function of each serial interface signal in the three data flow control protocols when the Honor DSR setting is On. Table 8-4: Serial Link (All Protocols) with Honor DSR On
Printer DTR DSR XON/XOFF Protocol (Honor DSR On) Always active Data validity DTR Protocol (Honor DSR On) Flow control to computer Data validity DTR/DSR Protocol (Honor DSR On) Flow control to computer Flow control (transmit mode) to computer (receive mode) Ignored
CTS
Ignored
Flow control from computer
Table 8-5 shows the state of each serial interface signal in the three data flow control protocols when the Honor DSR setting is Off. Table 8-5: Serial Link (All Protocols) with Honor DSR Off
Printer Signal DTR (Output) DSR (Input) CTS (Input)
1
XON/XOFF Protocol (Honor DSR Off) Always active Ignored Ignored
DTR Protocol (Honor DSR Off) Flow control to computer Ignored1 Flow control from computer1
DTR/DSR Protocol (Honor DSR Off) Flow control to computer Flow control to computer Ignored
These values are compatible with Hewlett-Packard Companys LaserJet printers.
8-27
Interfaces
DTR and DTR/DSR Protocol Timing (RS-232C)

Use DTR to pace the data flow from the computer. DTR goes from high to low to indicate to the computer that the printer cannot receive more data when it detects the following BUSY conditions:
Buffer full Attendance error Printer not in ready state
The following diagram illustrates DTR Protocol Timing. 1
2
Receive Data Valid
Legend:
1 2 3 The RTS signal is driven active as long as power is supplied to the printer. The DTR signal becomes active when initialization is complete, telling the computer that the printer is ready to receive data. When Honor DSR is On, the printer considers data received invalid when DSR is low and discards the data. Only DTR/DSR is used for flow control from the printer to the host computer. DTR drops to tell the computer that the receive buffer is nearly full or that the printer is busy and that data transmission should stop. About 640 free bytes remain in the buffer at this time. If the computer continues to send data after the printer has sent a low DTR signal, data could be lost.
8-28
Interfaces
XON/XOFF Protocol Timing (RS-232C)

When you select this data flow control protocol, the printer sends an XOFF signal when it detects the following BUSY conditions:
Buffer full Attendance error Printer not in ready state
The following diagram illustrates XON/XOFF Protocol Timing.

1 RTS
DTR
2 DSR Receive Data Valid 3
XON XMT
XOFF
XON
5 4 RXD
Legend:
1 2 3 4 The RTS signal is driven active as long as power is supplied to the printer. The DTR signal becomes active at the completion of initialization. The printer considers data received invalid when DSR is low and discards the data. (This is conditional depending on the setting of Honor DSR.) After you power on the printer and DTR is active, the printer sends an XON signal to the computer (DC1 control or X'11'). However, the computer does not need to detect this initial XON before sending data to the printer, because the printer can be powered on before the computer or terminal. The printer sends an XOFF signal (DC3 control or X'13') to request that data transmission end until the buffer clears. About 640 free bytes remain in the buffer at this time. If the computer continues to send data after the printer sent an XOFF signal, data could be lost. The printer sends an XON signal to the computer when the buffer space is again available. The serial interface is ready to receive more data.
8-29
Interfaces
Serial Errors
The printer places an underscore character in the link buffer when it detects an error. Some printers also display serial errors on the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional as attendance messages, such as a 54 Standard Serial Error or 54 Serial Option x Error (x represents the number of the serial port). Serial errors that do not generate such an error message are:
Serial Break Framing error received simultaneously as a Break Powering on an IBM-compatible personal computer connected to the printer
Serial Computer Configuration Recommendations (RS-232C)

For correct operation of the serial interface, your printer and your computer operating system must be configured identically. The following is an example of how to configure DOS for the printer using serial DTR protocol:
DOS:
From the DOS prompt, enter the following commands: mode comy:9600,n,8,1,p mode lptx :=comy where x equals 1, 2, or 3, and y equals 1 or 2 Include these two command statements in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file on the computer so they run each time your system starts operating. Once this is set, to copy to the communications port again use the copy command: copy 'filename' lptx
8-30
Interfaces
Windows 95/98/Me/2000, Windows NT 4.0, and Windows XP:

For correct operation of the RS-232C serial interface, while setting up your communications port, make sure you selected Hardware in the Flow Control field. Selecting Hardware sets the communication to DTR protocol. See the following sections for more information:
Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows 95/98/Me on page 8-2 Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows NT 4.0 on page 8-3 Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows 2000 on page 8-4 Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows XP on page 8-5
RS-232C Port Compatibility

The RS-232C port (on the RS-232C Serial Interface Card or the RS-232C Serial/Parallel 1284-C Interface Card) is compatible with the Plug and Play External COM Device Draft Specification, Rev. 0.86. Devices that are compatible with Plug and Play COM can:
Detect attachment of serial devices. Identify the device. Locate a driver for the device. Detect detachment of serial devices.
Network Support
Installing an internal print server enables you to connect your printer to a local area network (LAN). The print server supports these network interfaces:
The Token-Ring print server conforms to IEEE 802.5 using either IBM Cabling System (STP) or unshielded twisted-pair cable, which meets the IBM Cabling System Type 3 Media Specification (UTP). The Ethernet Combined 10BaseT and 10Base2 print server conforms to IEEE 802.3 with a Category 3, 4, or 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable for the 10BaseT and conforms to IEEE 802.3 with an RG58 coaxial cable for the 10Base2.
8-31
Interfaces
The Ethernet 10/100BaseTX print server conforms to the IEEE 802.3 standard for 10BaseT networks using Category 3, 4, or 5 unshielded twistedpair (UTP) cabling, and to the IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet standard for 100BaseTX networks using Category 5 UTP cabling.
For information on installing a print server in your printer, see your printer documentation. You may also connect your printer to a LAN by using an external print server. Use one of the following:
Lexmark MarkNet print servers IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters (IBM 4033)
Note: Network capabilities are standard on some printer models. See your printer documentation for more information.
Input Buffer
Your printer has an input (link) buffer for each interface. The maximum size of the input buffer depends upon the amount of RAM memory installed. The input buffers serve the same purpose as a print spooler and can be allocated automatically by the printer. The size of the input buffer may be modified or disabled from the operator panel menus or through MarkVision Professional. If NPAP is active on a port, two-thirds of the buffer memory is reserved for NPAP and one-third is set aside for the input buffer. If NPAP is not active, all the memory is available for the input buffer. Table 8-8 shows the sizes automatically selected for the buffers when the buffer size is set to Auto in the menus. Table 8-6: Input Buffer Sizes in Bytes
Memory Size 2MB 4MB 6MB Parallel Buffer Size 12K 12K 24K Serial Buffer Size 12K 12K 12K Network Buffer Size 12K 48K 48K LocalTalk 12K 12K 24K USB 12K 12K 12K Fax N/A 350K 350K
Note: MB represents 1,048,576 bytes. K represents 1024 bytes. N/A means non-applicable.
8-32
Interfaces
Table 8-6: Input Buffer Sizes in Bytes (Continued)

Memory Size 8, 10, or 12MB 16, 18, or 20MB 24, 28, 32, or 34MB 36, 38, or 40MB 44MB or larger Parallel Buffer Size 48K 48K (1MB if no optional adapter is installed) 192K (1MB if no optional adapter is installed) 384K (1MB if no optional adapter is installed) 2MB Serial Buffer Size 24K 24K 150K 300K 300K Network Buffer Size 48K 1MB 1MB 1MB 2MB LocalTalk 48K 1MB 1MB 1MB 2MB USB 24K 24K Fax 350K 1MB
150K 1MB 300K 1MB 300K 1MB
Note: MB represents 1,048,576 bytes. K represents 1024 bytes. N/A means non-applicable.
Note: When using serial communication, the printer signals the host computer to stop transmitting bytes when the serial input buffer is within 640 bytes. In addition, when XON/XOFF protocol is used, the printer signals the host computer to stop transmitting when the serial input buffer is 384, 256, and 128 bytes from full.
A-1
PCL Support
APPENDIX A: PCL Support

Table A-1 lists PCL emulation commands and identifies printers that support them. For detailed information about PCL emulation commands and how to select them, see PCL Emulation on page 2-1. Table A-2 on page A-7 identifies printer support for the GL/2 commands.
Table A-1: PCL Emulation Commands

Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference command descriptions Printer Model E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn
Command Function
ESCE ESCY ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC
Page 2-52 2-73 2-74 2-74 2-58 2-57 2-58 2-55 2-55 2-55 2-59 2-59 2-70 2-55 2-61
Printer Reset Display Functions-On Display Functions-Off Print Test Page Horizontal Cursor Position (in Columns) Duplex Page Side Selection Horizontal Cursor Position (in Decipoints) Set Left Margin Set Right Margin Print Direction Vertical Cursor Position (in Rows) Vertical Cursor Position (in Decipoints) Monochrome Print Mode Character Text Path Direction Underline-Disable
Z z &a#C &a#G &a#H &a#L &a#M
ESC ESC
ESC&a#P ESC&a#R ESC ESC
&a#V &b#M
ESC&c#T ESC
&d@
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
A-2
PCL Support
Table A-1: PCL Emulation Commands (Continued)

Command Function
ESC
Page 2-52 2-61 2-54 2-54 2-54 2-55 2-59 2-63 2-63 2-59 2-56 2-62 2-57 2-54 2-56 2-57 2-55 2-55 2-56 2-54 2-56 2-55 2-74 2-57 2-52 2-55 2-52 2-52
&d#A
Number of Collated Copies Underline-Enable Set Universal Height Set Universal Width Set Universal Feed Direction Set Universal Custom Name Push / Pop Cursor Position Macro Control Set Macro ID Set Line Termination Set Horizontal Motion Index Select Primary and Secondary Pitch Text Scale Mode Page Size Set Vertical Motion Index Set Line Spacing Set Top Margin Set Text Length Set Output Bin Paper Source Skip Perforation Select Orientation Paper Type Set Page Length Simplex/Duplex Print Job Separation Long-Edge Offset Registration Number of Copies
ESC&d#D ESC
&f#F
ESC&f#G ESC&f#O ESC
&f#W
ESC&f#S ESC&f#X ESC
&f#Y
ESC&k#G ESC&k#H ESC
&k#S
ESC&k#W
l#A &l#C ESC &l#D ESC &l#E ESC &l#F ESC &l#G ESC &l#H ESC &l#L ESC &l#O ESC &l#M(b) ESC&l#P ESC &l#S ESC &l1T ESC&l#U ESC &l#X
ESC& ESC
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
A-3
PCL Support

Command Function
ESC
Page 2-52 2-58 2-70 2-70 2-70 2-61 2-72 2-73 2-62 2-53 2-60 2-61 2-61 2-62 2-61 2-60 2-60 2-60 2-61 2-60 2-63 2-60 2-61 2-61 2-61 2-60
&l#Z
Short-Edge Offset Registration Alphanumeric ID Palette Control Palette Control ID Select Palette Transparent Print Data Flush All Pages End-Of-Line Text Wrap Text Parsing Method Unit of Measure Primary Font Symbol Set Select Primary Download Font (by Font ID) Select Default Primary Font Define Symbol Set Primary Font Stroke Weight Primary Font Pitch Primary Font Spacing Primary Font Style Primary Font Typeface Selection Primary Font Height (Point Size) Load Character Secondary Font Symbol Set Select Secondary Download Font (by Font ID) Select Default Secondary Font Secondary Font Stroke Weight Secondary Font Pitch
ESC&n#W
[operation] [string id]

ESC&p#C ESC&p#I ESC
&p#S
ESC&p#X[data] ESC&r#F ESC
&s#C
ESC&t#P ESC&u#D ESC
(#
ESC(#X
ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC
(3@ (f#W[data] (s#B (s#H (s#P (s#S (s#T (s#V
ESC(s#W[data] ESC)# ESC
)#X
ESC)3@ ESC ESC
)s#B )s#H
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
A-4
PCL Support

Command Function
ESC
Page 2-60 2-60 2-61 2-60 2-63 2-68 2-67 2-68 2-67 2-65 2-65 2-63 2-63 2-63 2-64, 2-66 2-65 2-73 2-73 2-66 2-65 2-62 2-62 2-73 2-65 2-65 2-73
)s#P
Secondary Font Spacing Secondary Font Style Secondary Font Typeface Selection Secondary Font Height (Point Size) Load Font Header Set Raster Compression Mode Transfer Raster Data (by Plane) Transfer Raster Data (by Row / Block) Y Offset Horizontal Rectangle Size (in PCL Units) Vertical Rectangle Size (in PCL Units) Set Font ID Set Character Code Font Control Area Fill ID Horizontal Rectangle Size (in Decipoints) GL/2 Horizontal Plot Size (in Inches) GL/2 Vertical Plot Size (in Inches) Fill Rectangular Area Pattern Control Symbol Set ID Code Symbol Set Control Set Picture Frame Anchor Point Vertical Rectangle Size (in Decipoints) User-Defined Pattern Picture Frame Horizontal Size (in Decipoints)
ESC)s#S ESC
)s#T
ESC)s#V ESC)s#W[data] ESC
*b#M
ESC*b#V[data] ESC*b#W[data] ESC
*b#Y
ESC*c#A ESC*c#B ESC
*c#D
ESC*c#E ESC*c#F ESC
*c#G *c#H *c#K *c#L *c#P *c#Q *c#R
ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC
ESC*c#S ESC*c0T ESC ESC
*c#V *c#W[data]
ESC*c#X
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
A-5
PCL Support

Command Function
ESC
Page 2-73 2-64 2-64 2-70 2-70 2-74 2-70 2-70 2-65 2-58 2-59 2-67 2-67 2-67 2-67 2-70 2-68 2-68 2-72 2-72 2-72 2-72 2-72 2-68 2-71 2-71 2-67
*c#Y *l#O
Picture Frame Vertical Size (in Decipoints) Logical Operation Pixel Placement Color Lookup Tables Download Dither Matrix Print Quality Driver Configuration Command Push / Pop Palette Set Pattern Reference Point Horizontal Cursor Position (in PCL Units) Vertical Cursor Position (in PCL Units) Start Raster Graphics Raster Graphics Presentation Mode Raster Width (Source) Raster Height (Source) Simple Color End Raster Graphics (Version B) End Raster Graphics (Version C) Inquire Status Readback Entity Free Space Set Status Readback Location Type Set Status Readback Location Unit Echo Raster Width Destination Gamma Correction Render Algorithm Raster Resolution
ESC
ESC* ESC* ESC
l#R l#W[data]
*m#W[data]
ESC*o#M(b) ESC*o#W[data] ESC
*p#P
ESC*p#R ESC*p#X ESC
*p#Y
ESC*r#A ESC*r#F ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC
*r#S *r#T *r#U *rB *rC *s#I *s1M *s#T
ESC*s#U ESC*s#X ESC ESC
*t#H *t#I
ESC*t#J ESC
*t#R
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
A-6
PCL Support

Command Function
ESC
Page 2-69 2-69 2-71 2-71 2-71 2-71 2-64 2-64 2-71 2-64 2-71 2-71 2-55 2-59 2-73 2-73
*t#V
Raster Height Destination Set Raster Configuration Color Component One Color Component Two Color Component Three Assign Color Index Source Transparency Mode Pattern Transparency Mode Foreground Color Select Current Pattern Configure Image Data Viewing Illuminant Clear Horizontal Margins Half Line-Feed Enter PCL Emulation Enter GL/2 Language Note: The values of -1, 2, and 3 are not supported by any of the printers included in this document.
ESC*g#W ESC
*v#A
ESC*v#B ESC*v#C ESC
*v#I
ESC*v#N ESC*v#O ESC
*v#S
ESC*v#T ESC*v#W[data] ESC
*i#W[data]
ESC9 ESC= ESC ESC
%#A %#B
ESC
%12345X
Universal Exit Language (UEL) / Start of PJL
2-53
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
A-7
PCL Support
Table A-2: GL/2 Commands

Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference command descriptions. Printer Model E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn
Command Function AA AC AD AR AT BR BZ CF CI CO CP CR DF DI DR DT DV EA EP ER ES EW FI FN FP FP Arc Absolute Anchor Corner Define Alternate Font Arc Relative Arc Absolute Three Point Bezier Relative Bezier Absolute Character Fill Circle Comment Character Plot Color Range Default Absolute Direction Relative Direction Define Label Terminator Define Variable Text Path Edge Rectangle Absolute Edge Polygon Edge Rectangle Relative Extra Space Edge Wedge Primary Font Secondary Font Fill Polygon, Odd/Even Fill Polygon, Non-Zero Winding Page 2-75 2-77 2-76 2-75 2-75 2-75 2-75 2-76 2-75 2-74 2-76 2-77 2-74 2-76 2-76 2-76 2-76 2-75 2-75 2-75 2-76 2-75 2-76 2-76 2-75 2-75
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
A-8
PCL Support
Table A-2: GL/2 Commands (Continued)

Command Function FT FT FT IN IP IR IW LA LB LO LO LT LM MC NP PA PC PD PE PM PP PR PU PW RA RF RO RR Fill Type Fill Type - 22 Fill Type - 9 Initialize Input P1 and P2 Input Relative P1 and P2 Input Window Line Attributes Label, Default Terminator = 03x Label Origin Uses PCL Label Origin Line Type Label Mode Logical Operation Number of Pens Plot Absolute Pen Color Pen Down Polyline Encoded Polygon Mode Pixel Placement Plot Relative Pen Up Pen Width Fill Rectangle Absolute Define Raster Fill Rotate Coordinate System Fill Rectangle Relative Page 2-77 2-77 2-77 2-74 2-74 2-75 2-75 2-77 2-76 2-76 2-76 2-77 2-76 2-75 2-77 2-75 2-77 2-75 2-75 2-75 2-75 2-75 2-75 2-77 2-75 2-77 2-75 2-76
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
A-9
PCL Support
Table A-2: GL/2 Commands (Continued)

Command Function RT SA SB SC SD SI SL SM SP SR SS SV SV TD TM TR UL WG WU Arc Relative Three Point Select Alternate Font Scalable/Bitmapped Fonts Scale Define Standard Font Absolute Character Size Character Slant Symbol Mode Select Pen Relative Character Size Select Standard Font Screened Vectors Screened Vectors - 9, level Transparent Data Threshold Matrix Transparency Mode User Defined Line Fill Wedge Pen Width Units Page 2-75 2-76 2-76 2-75 2-76 2-76 2-76 2-77 2-77 2-76 2-76 2-77 2-77 2-76 2-77 2-77 2-77 2-76 2-77
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
B-1
PJL Support
APPENDIX B: PJL Support

The following tables list PJL commands and identify printers that support them. For detailed information about PJL commands, see Printer Job Language on page 3-1. All commands may not have a full description. Note: The word common applies to those variables common to both your Lexmark printer and the Hewlett-Packard Companys LaserJet printers.
Table B-1: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages

Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions and are listed for supported variables only. Default values are listed for exceptions only.
Printer Model E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn,, E450dn
Variable Name AUTOCONT AUTOSELECT BINDING BITSPERPIXEL CLEARABLEWARNINGS CONTEXTSWITCH (SmartSwitch) COPIES CPLOCK DENSITY DISKLOCK DUPLEX ECONOMODE
Page 3-12
3-12 3-12 3-12
3-12 3-13 3-13
3-13 3-13
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
B-2
PJL Support
Table B-1: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)

Variable Name FORMATTERNUMBER FORMLINES HOLD HOLDKEY HOLDTYPE IMAGEADAPT INTRAY1 INTRAY2 INTRAY3 INTRAY4 INTRAY5 INTRAY1SIZE INTRAY2SIZE INTRAY3SIZE INTRAY4SIZE INTRAY5SIZE IOBUFFER IOSIZE JOBATTR JOBNAME JOBOFFSET LANG LOWTONER MANUALFEED MEDIASOURCE
Page 3-13 3-13 3-13 3-13 3-14 3-14
3-14 3-14 3-14 3-14 3-14 3-14 3-14 3-14 3-14
3-14 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
B-3
PJL Support
Table B-1: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)

Variable Name MEDIATYPE MPTRAY ORIENTATION OUTBIN PAGEPROTECT PAPER PARALLEL PASSWORD PERSONALITY POWERSAVE POWERSAVETIME PRINTQUALITY QTY RENDERMODE REPRINT RESOLUTION RESOURCESAVE RESOURCESAVESIZE RET TIMEOUT USERNAME WIDEA4
Page 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-17 3-17 3-17 3-17 3-18
3-18
3-18 3-18 3-18
3-18 3-18 3-19 3-19
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
B-4
PJL Support
Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages
Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions and are listed for supported variables only. Default values are listed for exceptions only. Printer Model E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn
Variable Name LACTIVEBINRESET LADVANCEDSTATUS LALARMCONTROL LAUTOCRLF LAUTOLFCR LBLANKPAGES LBONDLENGTH LBONDLOADING LBONDOUTBIN LBONDTEXTURE LBONDWEIGHT LBWLOCK LCANCEL LCARDSTOCKLENGTH LCARDSTOCKLOADING LCARDSTOCKOUTBIN LCARDSTOCKTEXTURE LCARDSTOCKWEIGHT LCOLLATION LCOLORCORRECTION LCOLOREDLENGTH LCOLOREDLOADING LCOLOREDOUTBIN LCOLOREDTEXTURE LCOLOREDWEIGHT LCOLORMODEL LCUSTOMPAPERUNITS
Page 3-19 3-19 3-19 3-19 3-19 3-19 3-19 3-19 3-20 3-20 3-20 3-20 3-20 3-20 3-20 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-22 3-22 3-22 3-22 3-22 3-22
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
B-5
PJL Support
Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable Name LCUSTOMPAPERWIDTH LCUSTOMPAPERHEIGHT LCUSTOMPAPERFEED LCUSTOMTYPE1LENGTH LCUSTOMTYPE1LOADING LCUSTOMTYPE1MEDIA LCUSTOMTYPE1NAME LCUSTOMTYPE1OUTBIN LCUSTOMTYPE1TEXTURE LCUSTOMTYPE1WEIGHT LCUSTOMTYPE2LENGTH LCUSTOMTYPE2LOADING LCUSTOMTYPE2MEDIA LCUSTOMTYPE2NAME LCUSTOMTYPE2OUTBIN LCUSTOMTYPE2TEXTURE LCUSTOMTYPE2WEIGHT LCUSTOMTYPE3LENGTH LCUSTOMTYPE3LOADING LCUSTOMTYPE3MEDIA LCUSTOMTYPE3NAME LCUSTOMTYPE3OUTBIN LCUSTOMTYPE3TEXTURE LCUSTOMTYPE3WEIGHT LCUSTOMTYPE4LENGTH LCUSTOMTYPE4LOADING LCUSTOMTYPE4MEDIA LCUSTOMTYPE4NAME
Page 3-22 3-23 3-23 3-23 3-23 3-23 3-23 3-24 3-24 3-24 3-24 3-24 3-24 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-26 3-26 3-26 3-26 3-26 3-26 3-27 3-27 3-27
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
B-6
PJL Support
Variable Name LCUSTOMTYPE4OUTBIN LCUSTOMTYPE4TEXTURE LCUSTOMTYPE4WEIGHT LCUSTOMTYPE5LENGTH LCUSTOMTYPE5LOADING LCUSTOMTYPE5MEDIA LCUSTOMTYPE5NAME LCUSTOMTYPE5OUTBIN LCUSTOMTYPE5TEXTURE LCUSTOMTYPE5WEIGHT LCUSTOMTYPE6LENGTH LCUSTOMTYPE6LOADING LCUSTOMTYPE6MEDIA LCUSTOMTYPE6NAME LCUSTOMTYPE6OUTBIN LCUSTOMTYPE6TEXTURE LCUSTOMTYPE6WEIGHT LDOWNLOADTARGET LDRYTIMEDELAY LDUPLICATEHELDJOBS LENVELOPEENHANCE LENVELOPELENGTH LENVELOPEOUTBIN LENVELOPETEXTURE LENVELOPEWEIGHT LESCCHAR LFAXRESOLUTION LFAXREDIAL
Page 3-27 3-27 3-27 3-28 3-28 3-28 3-28 3-28 3-28 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-30 3-30 3-30 3-30 3-30 3-30 3-30 3-30 3-31 3-31 3-31 3-31 3-31
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
B-7
PJL Support
Variable Name LFAXREDIALFREQUENCY LFAXTRANSMISSIONLOG LFEEDERPAPERTYPE LGLOSSYLOADING LGLOSSYOUTPUTBIN LGLOSSYTEXTURE LGLOSSYWEIGHT LHOLEPUNCHALARM LHOLEPUNCHMODE LHONORINIT LIMAGEBRIGHTNESS LIMAGECONTRAST LIMAGEENHANCE LIMAGEENHANCETYPE LIMAGEORIENTATION LIMAGESMOOTHING LINFEEDER LINFEEDERSIZE LINKALERT LINMPFEEDERSIZE LJAMRECOVERY LLABELSLENGTH LLABELSLOADING LLABELSOUTBIN LLABELSTEXTURE LLABELSWEIGHT LLEFTMARGINOFFSET LLETTERHEADLENGTH
Page 3-31 3-31 3-31 3-31 3-32 3-32 3-32 3-32 3-32 3-32 3-32 3-32 3-32 3-33 3-33 3-33
3-33 3-33 3-33 3-33 3-33 3-33 3-34 3-34 3-34 3-34 3-34
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
B-8
PJL Support
Variable Name LLETTERHEADLOADING LLETTERHEADOUTBIN LLETTERHEADTEXTURE LLETTERHEADWEIGHT LMANUALCOLORRGBTEXT LMANUALCOLORRGBGRAPHICS LMANUALCOLORRGBIMAGE LMANUALCOLORCMYKTEXT LMANUALCOLORCMYKGRAPHICS LMANUALCOLORCMYKIMAGE LMANUALENVELOPESIZE LMANUALENVELOPETYPE LMANUALPAPERSIZE LMANUALPAPERTYPE LMAXSTATUSMSG LMPFEEDERPAPERTYPE LMULTIPAGEBORDER LMULTIPAGEORDER LMULTIPAGEPRINT LMULTIPAGEVIEW LNPAP LOPTIONALOUTBIN1NAME LOPTIONALOUTBIN2NAME LOPTIONALOUTBIN3NAME LOPTIONALOUTBIN4NAME LOPTIONALOUTBIN5NAME LOPTIONALOUTBIN6NAME LOPTIONALOUTBIN7NAME
Page 3-34 3-35 3-35 3-35 3-35 3-35 3-35 3-35 3-35 3-36 3-36 3-36 3-36 3-36
3-36 3-36 3-36 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-38 3-38
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
B-9
PJL Support
Variable Name LOPTIONALOUTBIN8NAME LOPTIONALOUTBIN9NAME LOPTIONALOUTBIN10NAME LOUTBINCONFIG LOVERFLOWOUTBIN LOVERFLOWTIMER LPAGECOUNT LPAGEMODE LPAPERSOURCE LPICTUREGRADE LPLAINLENGTH LPLAINOUTBIN LPLAINTEXTURE LPLAINWEIGHT LPOWERSAVER LPPDS LPPDSFORMLINES LPPDSLINESPERINCH LPREPRINTEDLENGTH LPREPRINTEDLOADING LPREPRINTEDOUTBIN LPREPRINTEDTEXTURE LPREPRINTEDWEIGHT LPRINTBUFFER LPRINTHEADIDLETIME LPRINTERUSAGE LPRINTMENUSBUTTON LPRINTQUALITY
Page 3-38 3-38 3-38 3-38 3-39 3-39 3-39 3-39 3-39 3-40 3-40 3-40 3-40 3-40 3-40 3-41 3-41 3-41 3-41 3-41 3-42 3-42 3-42 3-42 3-42 3-42 3-42 3-43
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
B-10
PJL Support
Variable Name LPUNCH LREAROUTBINNAME LREPEATPRINTLIMIT LRESET LRESOURCESAVE LRIGHTMARGINOFFSET LSCREENING LSEPARATORSHEETS LSEPARATORSOURCE LSTANDARDOUTBINNAME LSTAPLE LSTAPLESEMPTYALARM LSTAPLETESTBIN LSTAPLETESTSOURCE LSTROKEWIDTH LSUBSTITUTESIZE LTOPBINROTATE LTOPMARGINOFFSET LTRANSPARENCYLENGTH LTRANSPARENCYOUTBIN LTRANSPARENCYTEXTURE LTRANSPARENCYWEIGHT LTRAY1SENSEDTYPEPAPER LTRAY1SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY LTRAY2SENSEDTYPEPAPER LTRAY2SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY LTRAY3SENSEDTYPEPAPER LTRAY3SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY
Page 3-43 3-43 3-43 3-43 3-43 3-43 3-43 3-43 3-43 3-44 3-44 3-44 3-44 3-44 3-44 3-44 3-44 3-44 3-44 3-45 3-45 3-45 3-45 3-45 3-45 3-45 3-46 3-46
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
B-11
PJL Support
Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions and are listed for supported variables only. Default values are listed for exceptions only. Printer Model E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn
Variable Name LTRAY4SENSEDTYPEPAPER LTRAY4SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY LTRAY1AUTOSIZE LTRAY2AUTOSIZE LTRAY3AUTOSIZE LTRAY4AUTOSIZE LTRAY5AUTOSIZE LTRAY1PAPERTYPE LTRAY2PAPERTYPE LTRAY3PAPERTYPE LTRAY4PAPERTYPE LTRAY5PAPERTYPE LTRAY1RENUMBER LTYPE1FONTS LUSDEFAULTS
Page 3-46 3-46 3-46 3-46 3-46 3-46 3-46 3-46 3-47 3-47 3-47 3-47 3-47 3-48 3-48
Table B-3: Common Variables for PCL Emulation

Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions. Printer Model
Variable Name FONTNUMBER FONTSOURCE
Page 3-48 3-48
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
B-12
PJL Support
Table B-3: Common Variables for PCL Emulation (Continued) (Continued)

Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions. Printer Model E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn E250d, E250dn, E350d, E350, E450dn
Variable Name PITCH PTSIZE SYMSET
Page 3-48 3-48 3-48
Table B-4: Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation

Variable Name LA4WIDTH LASSIGNFEEDER LASSIGNMANUALENVELOPE LASSIGNMANUALPAPER LASSIGNMPFEEDER LASSIGNTRAY1 LASSIGNTRAY2 LASSIGNTRAY3 LASSIGNTRAY4 LASSIGNTRAY5 LBITMAPROUNDING LCOLOREXTENSIONS LFONTCOMPATIBILITY LFONTPRIORITY
Page 3-49 3-49 3-49 3-49 3-49 3-50 3-50 3-50 3-50 3-50 3-50 3-50 3-51 3-51
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
B-13
PJL Support
Table B-5: Common Variables for PostScript Emulation

Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions and are listed for supported variables only. E120, E120n Printer Model E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn E238, E240, E240n, E340, Ed42n
Variable Name JAMRECOVERY PRTPSERRS ADOBEMBT
Page 3-51 3-51
Table B-6: Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation

Variable Name LPICTUREGRADE LPSFONTPRIORITY
Page 3-52 3-52
E120, E120n
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
B-14
PJL Support
Table B-7: Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables

Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions. Printer Model E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn
Variable Name LDESCRIPTION LRWLOCK LWLOCK
Page 3-53 3-53 3-53
Table B-8: Status Readback Commands

Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference command descriptions. Printer Model
E120, E120n
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
Command Name Dinquire Echo Info Inquire Ustatus Ustatusoff
Page 3-54 3-55 3-56 3-58 3-59 3-60
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
B-15
PJL Support
Table B-9: USTATUS Unsolicited Status Variables

Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions. E120, E120n Printer Model E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn.
Variable Name DEVICE JOB PAGE TIMED
Page 3-60 3-60 3-60 3-60
Table B-10: PJL Messages for Auto-Continuable Conditions

Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference message descriptions. E120, E120n Printer Model E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
Message Intervention Required PPDS Font Error Intervention Required Insufficient Collation Area Intervention Required Insufficient Defragment Memory Intervention Required Insufficient Memory Intervention Required Memory Full Intervention Required Held Jobs May Not Be Restored Intervention Required Configuration Change
Page 3-63 3-63 3-63 3-63 3-63 3-63 3-63
Status Code 30014 30016 30016 30016 30016 30016 30016
Return String
50 PPDS Font Error 37 Insufficient Collation Area 37 Insufficient Defrag Memory 37 Insufficient Memory 38 Memory Full Held Jobs May Not Be Restored 57 Configuration Change
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
B-16
PJL Support
Table B-10: PJL Messages for Auto-Continuable Conditions (Continued)

Message Intervention Required Complex Page Intervention Required Standard Serial Error Intervention Required Serial Option Error Intervention Required Parallel Error Intervention Required Network Software Error Intervention Required Standard Serial Fax Connection Lost Intervention Required Standard Serial Disabled Intervention Required Serial Option Disabled Intervention Required Std Parallel Port Disabled Intervention Required Parallel Port Disabled Intervention Required Parallel Port Error Intervention Required Standard USB Disabled Intervention Required Resource Save Off Deficient Memory Intervention Required Insufficient Fax Buffer Intervention Required Std Par ENA Connection Lost Intervention Required Std Parallel Port Disabled
Page 3-63 3-63 3-63 3-63 3-65 3-63
Status Code 30017 30018 30018 30018 30018 30018
Return String
39 Complex Page 54 Standard Serial Error 54 Serial Option <slot #> error 54 Parallel Error 54 Std Network Software Error 54 Std Ser Fax Connection Lost 56 Standard Serial Disabled 56 Serial <slot #> Port Disabled 56 Std Parallel Port Disabled 56 Parallel Port Disabled 56 Parallel Port x Disabled 56 Standard USB Port Disabled 35 Res Save Off Deficient Memory 55 Insufficient Fax Buffer 54 Std Par ENA Connection Lost 56 Std Parallel Port Disabled
3-64 3-64 3-64 3-64 3-64 3-64 3-64
30018 30018 30018 30018 30018 30018 30019
3-64 3-64 3-64
30026 30027 30027
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
B-17
PJL Support

Message Intervention Required Resolution Reduced Intervention Required Print Jobs on Disk Request Intervention Required Restore Held Jobs. Go/Stop? Intervention Required Short Paper Intervention Required Flash Full Intervention Required Disk Full Intervention Required Defective Flash Intervention Required Unformatted Flash Intervention Required Defective Disk Intervention Required Unformatted Disk Intervention Required Scheduled Maintenance Intervention Required Resource Save Off Deficient Memory Intervention Required Insufficient Collation Area Intervention Required Empty Hole Punch Box Intervention Required Empty Box M Intervention Required Insert Box M
Page 3-64 3-64
Status Code 30029 30031
Return String
36 Resolution Reduced Print Jobs on Disk? or Print Jobs on Disk. Go/ Stop? Restore Held Jobs. Go/ Stop? 34 Short Paper 52 Flash Full 62 Disk Full 51 Defective Flash 53 Unformatted Flash 61 Defective Disk 63 Unformatted Disk 80 Scheduled Maintenance 35 Res Save Off Deficient Memory 37 Insufficient Collation Area Empty Hole Punch Box Empty Box M Insert Box M
3-64 3-64 3-64 3-64 3-64 3-64 3-64 3-65 3-65 3-65
30031 30034 30035 30035 30036 30036 30036 30036 30075 30076
3-65 3-65 3-65 3-65
30076 30107 30107 30107
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
B-18
PJL Support

Message Intervention Required Insert Staple Cartridge Intervention Required Insert Stapler Intervention Required Priming Failed Intervention Required Network x Software Error Intervention Required Serial Port x Disabled Intervention Required Serial Option x Error Intervention Required Serial x Fax Connection Lost Intervention Required USB Port Disabled Intervention Required Parallel x ENA Connection Lost Intervention Required Parallel x Port Disabled Intervention Required Disk Operation Failed Jobs on Disk Intervention Required Disk Operation Failed Faxes on Disk Intervention Required Flash Full Intervention Required Disk Full Intervention required: Disk Corrupted. Reformat? Intervention Required Too Many Flash Options Installed
Page 3-65 3-65 3-65 3-65 3-65 3-65 3-65 3-65 3-65 3-65 3-65
Status Code 30107 30107 30107 30112 30112 30112 30112 30112 30113 30113 32001
Return String
Insert Staple Cartridge Insert Stapler Priming Failed, Retry. Go/ Stop? 54 Network x Software Error 56 Serial Port x Disabled 54 Serial Option x Error 54 Ser x Fax Connection Lost 56 USB Port x Disabled 54 Par x ENA Connection Lost 56 Parallel Port x Disabled Operation Failed Jobs on Disk Operation Failed Faxes on Disk 52 Flash Full 62 Disk Full Disk Corrupted. Reformat? 58 Too Many Flash Options
3-65
32001
3-66 3-66 3-66 3-66
32002 32002 32015 32030
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
B-19
PJL Support

Message Intervention Required Unformatted Flash Intervention Required Unformatted Disk Intervention Required: Unsupported Disk Format Intervention Required Defective Flash Intervention Required Defective Disk Intervention Required Scheduled Maintenance Intervention Required Scheduled Maintenance Intervention Required Fuser Maintenance Intervention Required Fuser Life Warning Intervention Required Belt Life Warning Intervention Required Fuser/Belt Life Warning Intervention Required Fuser Exhausted Intervention Required Belt Exhausted Intervention Required Fuser/Belt Exhausted Intervention Required ITU Maintenance
Page 3-66 3-66 3-66 3-66 3-66 3-66 3-66 3-66 3-66 3-66 3-66 3-66 3-66 3-66 3-66
Status Code 32052 32052 32052 32056 32056 35075 35075 40038 40038 40038 40038 40038 40038 40038 40038
Return String
53 Unformatted Flash 63 Unformatted Disk 64 Unsupported Disk Format 51 Defective Flash 61 Defective Disk 80 Scheduled Maintenance 81 Scheduled Maintenance 80 Fuser Maintenance 80 Fuser Life Warning 80 Belt Life Warning 80 Fuser/Belt Life Warning 80 Fuser Exhausted 80 Belt Exhausted 80 Fuser/Belt Exhausted 83 ITU Maintenance
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
B-20
PJL Support
Table B-11: PJL Messages for Attendance Conditions

Message Intervention Required 30 Coating Roll Missing Intervention Required 30 XXXX1 Print Unit Missing Intervention Required Insert Hole Punch Box Intervention Required Insert PC Cartridge Intervention Required Cartridge Life Expired Intervention Required Cartridge Life Warning Intervention Required Printer Upper Door Open Intervention Required Printer Cover Open Intervention Required Close Toner Box Cover Intervention Required Close Deflector G Intervention Required Defective Print Cartridge Intervention Required Defective Ink Cartridge Intervention Required Missing Cartridge Intervention Required Missing Printhead Intervention Required Unsupported Print Cartridge
1 XXXX
Page 3-67 3-67 3-67 3-67 3-67 3-68 3-67
Status Code 40010 40010 40010 40010 40021 40021 40021
Return String
30 Coating Roll Missing 30 XXXX1 Print Unit Missing Insert Hole Punch Box Insert PC Cartridge Cartridge Life Expired XXXX1 Cartridge Life Warning XXXX1 Cover Open, Close Top Covers, Close Door, or Insert Cartridge Close Cover Close Cover A Close Deflector G 31 Defective Print Cartridge 31 Defective Cartridge XXXX1 31 Missing Cartridge XXXX1 31 Missing Printhead 32 Unsupported Print Cartridge
3-68 3-67 3-68 3-67 3-67 3-68 3-68 3-67
40021 40021 40021 40021 40021 40021 40021 40021
represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black cartridges, respectively.
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
B-21
PJL Support
Table B-11: PJL Messages for Attendance Conditions (Continued)

Message Intervention Required Unsupported XXXX1 Cartridge Intervention Required Unsupported Cartridge Intervention Required Unsupported Printhead Intervention Required Tray Size Sense Error Intervention Required Open Bin Exit Tray Intervention Required Change Cartridge Invalid Refill Intervention Required Open Cover Intervention Required Open Rear Door Intervention Required Close Front Door Intervention Required Close Side Door Intervention Required Close Finisher Door Intervention Required Close Finisher Side Door Intervention Required Close Finisher Top Cover Intervention Required Close Door <d> Intervention Required Close Cover <c> Intervention Required Close Tray x Top Cover
1 XXXX
Page 3-67 3-67 3-68 3-68 3-68 3-67
Status Code 40021 40021 40021 40021 40021 40021
Return String
32 Unsupported XXXX1 Cartridge 32 Unsupported Cartridge 32 Unsupported Printhead 40 Tray x Size Sense Error 41 Open Bin 1 Exit Tray Change Cartridge Invalid Refill Open Cover Open Rear Door Close Front Door Close Side Door Close Finisher Door Close Finisher Side Door Close Finisher Top Cover Close Door <d> Close Cover <c> Close Tray x Top Cover
3-68 3-68 3-68 3-68 3-68 3-68 3-68 3-68 3-68 3-68
40021 40021 40021 40021 40021 40021 40021 40021 40021 40021
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
B-22
PJL Support

Message Intervention Required Insert Print Cartridge Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Check Tray Connection Intervention Required Install Tray x or Cancel Job Intervention Required Reattach Envelope Feeder Intervention Required Install Env Feeder or Cancel Job Intervention Required Reattach MP Feeder Intervention Required Reattach Output Bin Intervention Required Reattach Bins Intervention Required Install Bin x or Cancel Job Intervention Required Check Finisher Installation Intervention Required Check Mailbox Installation Intervention Required Tray Config Error Intervention Required Input Config Error Intervention Required Too Many Trays Attached Intervention Required Too Many Bins Attached
1 XXXX
Page 3-69 3-69 3-69 3-69 3-69 3-69
Status Code 40021 40022 40027 40027 40028 40028
Return String
Insert Print Cartridge 2xx Paper Jam Check Tray <source #> Connection Install Tray x or Cancel Job Reattach Envelope Feeder Install Env Feed or Cancel Job Reattach MP Feeder Reattach Output Bin <bin #> Reattach Bins <bin #x - bin #y> Install Bin x or Cancel Job Check Finisher Installation Check Mailbox Installation 33 Tray x Config Error 58 Input Config Error 58 Too Many Trays Attached 58 Too Many Bins Attached
3-69 3-69 3-69 3-69 3-69 3-69 3-69 3-69 3-69 3-69
40028 40029 40029 40029 40029 40029 40030 40030 40030 40030
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
B-23
PJL Support

Message Intervention Required Too Many Disks Installed Intervention Required Too Many Disks Installed Intervention Required PerfectFinish Missing Intervention Required PerfectFinish Empty Intervention Required Toner Low Intervention Required Toner Low
Page 3-69 3-69 3-70 3-70 3-70 3-70
Status Code 40030 40036 40037 40037 40038 40038
Return String
58 Too Many Disks Installed 58 Too Many Disks Installed 31 PerfectFinish Missing 87 PerfectFinish Empty 88 Toner Low 88 Yellow Toner Low 88 Magenta Toner Low 88 Cyan Toner Low 88 Black Toner Low
3-70
88 Color Print Cartridge Low 88 Black Print Cartridge Low 88 Photo Print Cartridge Low
3-70
88 Yellow Toner Empty 88 Magenta Toner Empty 88 Cyan Toner Empty 88 Black Toner Empty
Intervention Required 84 Black Photo Dev Life Warning Intervention Required 84 Color Photo Dev Life Warning Intervention Required 84 All Photo Devs Exhausted Intervention Required 84 Black Photo Dev Exhausted Intervention Required Cartridge Low
1 XXXX
3-70 3-70 3-70 3-70 3-71
40038 40038 40038 40038 40038
84 Black Photo Dev Life Warning 84 Color Photo Dev Life Warning 84 All Photo Devs Exhausted 84 Black Photo Dev Exhausted 88 Cartridge Low <CMYK>
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
B-24
PJL Support

Message Intervention Required Replace PC Kit Intervention Required Replace PC Kit To Continue Intervention Required Replace Toner Cartridge Intervention Required Replace Toner Cartridge To Continue Intervention Required Replace Oil Coating Roll Intervention Required Cartridge Empty Intervention Required Load Staples Intervention Required Priming Failed. Retry? Intervention Required OPMSG Intervention Required STMSG Intervention Required Replace Fuser Intervention Required Replace Transfer Kit Intervention Required Incompatible Bin x Intervention Required Incompatible Duplex Intervention Required Incompatible Tray x
1 XXXX
Page 3-71 3-71
Return String
Replace PC Kit Replace PC Kit To Continue
3-71 3-71
40038 40038
Replace Toner Cartridge Replace Toner To Continue
3-71 3-71 3-71 3-71 3-71 3-71 3-71 3-71 3-71 3-71 3-71
40038 40039 40040 40041 40048 40049 40050 40050 40087 40088 40089
Replace Oil Coating Roll 89 Cartridge Empty <CMYK> Load Staples Priming Failed. Retry?
OPMSG message STMSG message

Replace Fuser Replace Transfer Kit 59 Incompatible Bin x 59 Incompatible Duplex 59 Incompatible Tray x
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
B-25
PJL Support

Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference message descriptions. E120, E120n Printer Model E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn
Message Intervention Required Incompatible Envelope Feeder Intervention Required Check Duplex Connection Intervention Required Install Duplex or Cancel Job Intervention Required Duplex Cover Open Intervention Required Insert Duplex Option Intervention Required Load Staples
1 XXXX
Page 3-71 3-71 3-72 3-72 3-72 3-72
Status Code 40090 40095 40095 40096 40096 40101
Return String
59 Incompatible Envelope Feeder Check Duplex Connection Install Duplex or Cancel Job Close Duplex Door Insert Duplex Option Load Staples
Table B-12: PJL Messages for Paper Handling

Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference message descriptions. E120, E120n E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n Printer Model
Message Intervention Required Wrong Paper Size in Tray x Intervention Required Wrong Paper Size Manual Feed
Pag e 3-73 3-73
Return String*
34 Wrong Paper Size in Tray x 34 Wrong Paper Size Manual Feed
x represents an input source code. For more information, see Table 3-16: Tray Values on page 3-74. yy represents a media size code. For more information, see Table 3-17: Media Size Values on page 3-74. * See your printer documentation for return string messages.
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
B-26
PJL Support
Table B-12: PJL Messages for Paper Handling (Continued)

Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference message descriptions. E120, E120n E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n Printer Model E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn
Message Intervention Required Remove Paper Standard Bin Intervention Required Remove Paper Outbin <bin #> Intervention Required Remove Paper All Output Bins Intervention Required Remove Paper <linked set bin name> Intervention Required Check <Source> Paper Guide Intervention Required Incorrect Media Intervention Required Load Request
Pag e 3-73 3-73 3-73 3-73
Status Code 40019 40019 40019 40019
Return String*
Remove Paper Standard Bin Remove Paper Output Bin <bin #> Remove Paper All Output Bins Remove Paper <linked set bin name> Check <source> Paper Guide 34 Incorrect Media Load <source> <Custom Type Name> <Custom String> <size> <type> <size> Load Manual <Custom Type Name> <Custom String> <size> <type> <size> Change <source> <Custom Type Name> <Custom String> <size> <type> <size> Insert Duplex Pages & Press Go. Insert Tray <source #>
3-73 3-73 3-73
4100x 41xyy 41xyy
Intervention Required Load Manual Request
3-73
41xxy
Intervention Required Change Request
3-73
41xyy
Intervention Required Insert Duplex Pages & Press Go. Intervention Required Insert Tray Request
3-73 3-73
412yy 4300x
x represents an input source code. For more information, see Table 3-16: Tray Values on page 3-74. yy represents a media size code. For more information, see Table 3-17: Media Size Values on page 3-74. * See your printer documentation for return string messages.
B-27
PJL Support
Table B-13: PJL Messages for Paper Jams

Message Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam
Page 3-76 3-76 3-76 3-76 3-76 3-76 3-76 3-76 3-76 3-76 3-76 3-76 3-76 3-76
Status Code 4200x 4201x 4202x 4203x 4204x 4205x 4206x 4207x 4208x 4209x 4210x 4211x 4220x 4221x
w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover. The door or cover needs to be opened. x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer. y represents the tray number. z represents the bin number.
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
B-28
PJL Support
Table B-13: PJL Messages for Paper Jams (Continued)

Message Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam
Page 3-76 3-76 3-76 3-77 3-77 3-77 3-77 3-77 3-77 3-77 3-77 3-77 3-77 3-77 3-77
Status Code 4222x 4230x 4231x 4232x 4233x 4234 424yx 4241wy 4242wy 4243w 4244wy 4245w 4246w 4247wy 4248w
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
B-29
PJL Support

Page 3-77 3-77 3-77 3-77 3-77 3-77 3-78 3-78 3-78 3-78 3-78 3-78 3-78 3-78 3-78
Status Code 4249w 4250w 4250x 4251wy 4251x 4252w 4253w 4254wy 4255 4256w 4257w 4258w 4259wy 4260w 4260x
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
B-30
PJL Support

Page 3-78 3-78 3-78 3-78 3-78 3-78 3-78 3-78 3-79 3-79 3-79 3-79 3-79 3-79 3-79
Status Code 4261w 4261x 427zx 4271 4272 4273 4280w 4280x 4281w 4281x 4282w 4282x 4283w 4283x 4284w
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
B-31
PJL Support

Message Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam Intervention Required Paper Jam
Page 3-79 3-79 3-79 3-79 3-79 3-79 3-79 3-79 3-79 3-79 3-80 3-80
Status Code 4284x 4285w 4286w 4287 4288 4289 4290 4291 4292 4293 4294 4295
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
B-32
PJL Support
Table B-14: Service Errors

Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference message description. Printer Model E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
Message ALL SERVICE MESSAGES
Page 3-80
Error Code 50000
Table B-15: Device Attendance Messages

Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference message descriptions. Printer Model
Message RDYMSG OPMSG STMSG
Page 3-80 3-81 3-81
Table B-16: Lexmark Unique PJL Commands

Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference command descriptions. Printer Model
Command LBEEP LDOWNLOADTARGET
Page 3-82 3-30
E120, E120n
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
B-33
PJL Support
Table B-16: Lexmark Unique PJL Commands (Continued)

Command LPORTROTATE LPRINT testpage LPRINTDIRECTORY LPRINTTESTPAGE LPRINTMENUS LPRINTPCLFONTS LPRINTPSFONTS LESCAPECHAR LFAX PHONENUMBER LOPENFILE LCLOSEFILE LREADFILE LWRITEFILE LRUNFILE LRENAMEFILE LDELETEFILE LFORMAT LDEFRAG
Page 3-82 3-83 3-83 3-83 3-83 3-83 3-83 3-83 3-85 3-89 3-89 3-90 3-91 3-91 3-92 3-92 3-92 3-92
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
B-34
PJL Support
Table B-17: File and Device Protection Commands

Command LDECLARE LRESOURCE LDELETEPASSWORD LQUERYSEED LBYPASSPASSWORD KEY
Page 3-95 3-96 3-98
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
C-1
PostScript Support
APPENDIX C: PostScript Support

The following tables list PostScript commands and identify printers that support them. For detailed information about PostScript emulation, see PostScript Emulation on page 4-1. Table C-1: Supplemental Operators
Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference operator descriptions. Printer Model E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn
Operator Name appletalktype buildtime byteorder checkpassword currentfilenameextend currentmanualduplexmode currentuniversalsize defaulttimeouts deletefile devcontrol devdismount devforall devformat devmount devstatus diskonline diskstatus displayoperatormsg doidlefonts
Page 4-14 4-14 4-14 4-15 4-15 4-15 4-3 4-16 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-19 4-19 4-20 4-20 4-21 4-22 4-22 4-22
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
C-2
PostScript Support
Table C-1: Supplemental Operators (Continued)

Operator Name dojamrecovery doprinterrors doret dostartpage dosysstart duplexer duplexmode enginesync file filenameforall fileposition firstside fontnonzerowinding hardwareiomode idlefonts ignoresize initializedisk jobname jobsource jobtimeout manualfeed manualfeedtimeout newsheet pagecount pagesprinted papertray printername product
Page 4-23 4-23 4-23 4-24 4-24 4-24 4-25 4-25 4-26 4-26 4-26 4-27 4-27 4-27 4-27 4-4 4-28 4-28 4-29 4-30 4-8 4-31 4-31 4-31 4-32 4-8 4-32 4-32
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
C-3
PostScript Support

Operator Name PS2fonts PS3fonts quiet ramsize realformat renamefile resolution revision sccbatch sccinteractive setcoverpage setdefaulttimeouts setdoidlefonts setdojamrecovery setdoprinterrors setdoret setdostartpage setdosysstart setduplexmode setenginesync setethernetaddress setfilenameextend setfileposition sethardwareiomode setidlefonts setignoresize setjobtimeout setmanualduplexmode
Page 4-33 4-33 4-33 4-34 4-34 4-34 4-35 4-35 4-36 4-37 4-37 4-37 4-38 4-38 4-38 4-39 4-39 4-40 4-40 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-42 4-42 4-42 4-4 4-43 4-43
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
C-4
PostScript Support

Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference operator descriptions. Printer Model E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn
Operator Name setpapertray setprintername setquiet setresolution setsccbatch setsccinteractive setsoftwareiomode settumble setuniversalsize setuserdiskpercent softwareiomode tumble userdiskpercent waittimeout
Page 4-9 4-44 4-44 4-45 4-45 4-46 4-46 4-46 4-5 4-47 4-47 4-47 4-48 4-48
Table C-2: Page Device Parameters

Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference parameter descriptions. Default values are listed. E120, E120n Printer Model
Key BeginPage Collate DeferredMediaSelection
Page 4-49 4-49 4-49
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
C-5
PostScript Support
Table C-2: Page Device Parameters (Continued)

Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference parameter descriptions. Default values are listed. E120, E120n Printer Model E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn
Key DeviceRenderingInfo Screening ColorGrade PictureGrade IET IETImagesOnly IETPictureGrade None TonerSaver PictureGrade ImageEnhancement PrintDarkness AutoMediaType EdgeToEdge DefaultPoliciesPageSize SubstituteSize Type ColorCorrection ImageBrightness ImageContrast PrintQuality Duplex EndPage ExitJamRecovery HWResolution ImagingBBox InputAttributes 0 - Tray 1
Page 4-49 4-49 4-49 4-49 4-49 4-49 4-49 4-49 4-50 4-50 4-50 4-50 4-51 4-51 4-51 4-51 4-52 4-52 4-52 4-52 4-52 4-52 4-52 4-52 4-52 4-53 4-53 4-53
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
C-6
PostScript Support

Key 1 - Tray 2 2 - Envelope Feeder 3 - Tray 3 4 - Multipurpose Feeder 5 - Tray 4 6 - Tray 5 PageSize MatchAll MediaColor MediaType MediaWeight InputLocation Mode Priority Install Jog ManualFeed ManualFeedTimeout MediaColor MediaPosition MediaType MediaWeight NumCopies Nup NupDetails Rows Columns Orientation
Page 4-53 4-53 4-53 4-53 4-53 4-53 4-53 4-53 4-53 4-53 4-53 4-53 4-54 4-54 4-54 4-54 4-55 4-55 4-55 4-55 4-55 4-55 4-55 4-55 4-56 4-56 4-56 4-56
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
C-7
PostScript Support

Key Border Order Type LandscapeOverride OutputAttributes 0 - Standard Bin 1 - Optional Bin 1 2 - Optional Bin 2 3 - Optional Bin 3 4 - Optional Bin 4 5 - Optional Bin 5 6 - Optional Bin 6 7 - Optional Bin 7 8 - Optional Bin 8 9 - Optional Bin 9 10 - Optional Bin 10 OutputType OutputLocation OutputPage OutputType PageDeviceName PageSize Policies PolicyNotFound PolicyReport PageSize PostRenderingEnhance
Page 4-57 4-57 4-57 4-57 4-58 4-58 4-58 4-58 4-58 4-58 4-58 4-58 4-58 4-58 4-58 4-58 4-58 4-58 4-58 4-58 4-58 4-59 4-59 4-59 4-59 4-59 4-59
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
C-8
PostScript Support

Key PostRenderingEnhanceDetails REValue Type PowerSave ProcessColorModel Punch SlipSheet SlipSheetDetails SlipSheetSource Type Staple TraySwitch Tumble UniversalDetails Type PageSize Orientation Prompt
Page 4-60 4-60 4-60 4-60 4-60 4-60 4-60 4-61 4-61 4-61 4-61 4-61 4-62 4-62 4-62 4-62 4-62 4-62
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
C-9
PostScript Support
Table C-3: User Interpreter Parameters

Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference parameter descriptions. Printer Model E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn
Key AccurateScreens CollatedCopies HalftoneMode IdiomRecognition JobName JobTimeout MaxDictStack MaxExecStack MaxFontItem MaxFormItem MaxLocalVM MaxOpStack MaxPatternItem MaxScreenItem MaxSuperScreen MaxUPathItem MinFontCompress PageCount UseOldcopypage VMReclaim VMThreshold WaitTimeout
Page 4-63 4-63 4-64 4-64 4-64 4-64 4-64 4-64 4-64 4-64 4-64 4-65 4-65 4-65 4-65 4-65 4-65 4-65 4-65 4-65 4-65 4-65
Default false Collation - Collated Copies (QTY) value 0 true () JobTimeout system parameter 255 10015 12500 100000 2147483647 100000 20000 48000 1024 5000 2147483647 0 false 0 25000 per MB of RAM WaitTimeout system parameter
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
C-10
PostScript Support
Table C-4: System Interpreter Parameters

Key BuildTime ByteOrder CurDisplayList CurFontCache CurFormCache CurInputDevice CurOutlineCache CurOutputDevice CurPatternCache CurScreenStorage CurSourceList CurUPathCache DisableFastProcs DoPrintErrors DoStartPage EnableExtraFonts EngineBoot EngineCode EngineSpeed EnvironmentSave FactoryDefaults FatalErrorAddress FontResourceDir FontVersion GenericResourceDir GenericResourcePathSep InstalledRam
Page 4-66 4-66 4-66 4-66 4-66 4-67 4-67 4-67 4-67 4-67 4-67 4-67 4-67 4-68 4-68 4-68 4-68 4-68 4-68 4-68 4-68 4-68 4-68 4-68 4-68 4-68 4-69
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
C-11
PostScript Support
Table C-4: System Interpreter Parameters (Continued)

Key JobTimeout languagelevel MaxDisplayList MaxFontCache MaxFormCache MaxImageBuffer MaxOutlineCache MaxPatternCache MaxPermanentVM MaxRasterMemory MaxScreenStorage MaxSourceList MaxUPathCache PageCount PanelCode PrinterCode PrinterName RamSize RealFormat Revision SearchBuiltinFontsFirst SerialNumber StartJobPassword StartupMode StaticRamSize SystemParamsPassword UseOldcopypage UseOldfonts
Page 4-69 4-69 4-69 4-69 4-69 4-69 4-69 4-69 4-69 4-69 4-69 4-70 4-70 4-70 4-70 4-70 4-70 4-70 4-70 4-70 4-70 4-70 4-70 4-70 4-70 4-71 4-71 4-71
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
C-12
PostScript Support
Table C-4: System Interpreter Parameters (Continued)

Key ValidNV WaitTimeout
Page 4-71 4-65
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
C-13
PostScript Support
Table C-5: Devices Supported

Supported Not Supported n Network version of the printer model Printer Model E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn
Device %ParallelA% %ParallelB% %ParallelC% %ParallelD% %SerialA% %SerialB% %SerialC% %SerialD% %LocalTalkA% %LocalTalkB% %LocalTalkC% %LocalTalkD% %EtherTalkA% %EtherTalkB% %EtherTalkC% %EtherTalkD% %IR_A% %IR_B% %IR_C% %IR_D% %USB_A% %USB_B% %USB_C% %USB_D% %TokenTalkA% %TokenTalkB% %TokenTalkC% %TokenTalkD% %AppSocketA%
Page 4-66
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
C-14
PostScript Support
Table C-5: Devices Supported (Continued)

Supported Not Supported n Network version of the printer model Printer Model E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn
Device %AppSocketC% %AppSocketD% %RemotePrinterA% %RemotePrinterB% %RemotePrinterC% %RemotePrinterD% %PrintServerA% %PrintServerB% %PrintServerC% %PrintServerD% %LPR_A% %LPR_B% %LPR_C% %LPR_D% %LexLinkA% %LexLinkB% %LexLinkC% %LexLinkD% %IP_A% %IP_B% %IP_C% %IP_D% %EthernetPhysicalA% %EthernetPhysicalB% %EthernetPhysicalC% %EthernetPhysicalD% %TokenRingPhysicalA% %TokenRingPhysicalB% %TokenRingPhysicalC%
Page 4-66
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
C-15
PostScript Support
Table C-6: Device Parameters

Key DelayedOutputClose Enabled Filtering Handshake HasNames Interpreter On OutputDevice PCLSmartSwitch PortLocation PSSmartSwitch Type Baud CheckParity DataBits DelayedOutputClose Enabled Filtering FlowControl HasNames HonorDSR Interpreter On Parity PCLSmartSwitch PortLocation PSSmartSwitch
Page 4-73 4-73 4-73 4-73 4-73 4-73 4-73 4-73 4-73 4-73 4-74 4-74 4-74 4-74 4-74 4-74 4-74 4-74 4-74 4-74 4-74 4-75 4-75 4-75 4-75 4-75 4-75
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
C-16
PostScript Support
Table C-6: Device Parameters (Continued)

Key RobustXon SerialMode StopBits Type DelayedOutputClose Enabled Filtering HasNames Interpreter LocalTalkType NodeID On PCLSmartSwitch PortLocation PSSmartSwitch Type DelayedOutputClose Enabled EthernetAddress EtherTalkType EtherTalkZone Filtering HasNames Interpreter NodeID On PCLSmartSwitch PortLocation
Page 4-75 4-75 4-76 4-76 4-76 4-76 4-76 4-76 4-76 4-76 4-76 4-76 4-77 4-77 4-77 4-77 4-77 4-77 4-77 4-77 4-77 4-78 4-78 4-78 4-78 4-78 4-78 4-78
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
C-17
PostScript Support

Key PSSmartSwitch Type DelayedOutputClose Enabled Filtering HasNames Interpreter On PCLSmartSwitch PortLocation PSSmartSwitch Type DelayedOutputClose Enabled Filtering HasNames Interpreter On PCLSmartSwitch PortLocation PSSmartSwitch Type Address Bridging DelayedOutputClose Enabled Filtering HasNames
Page 4-78 4-78 4-78 4-79 4-79 4-79 4-79 4-79 4-79 4-79 4-79 4-79 4-79 4-80 4-80 4-80 4-80 4-80 4-80 4-80 4-80 4-80 4-80 4-80 4-81 4-81 4-81 4-81
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
C-18
PostScript Support

Key Interpreter NodeID On PCLSmartSwitch PortLocation PSSmartSwitch TokenTalkType Type Zone DelayedOutputClose Enabled Filtering HasNames Interpreter On PortLocation Type
Page 4-81 4-81 4-81 4-81 4-81 4-81 4-82 4-82 4-82 4-82 4-82 4-82 4-82 4-82 4-82 4-82 4-82
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %RemotePrinter%, %RemotePrinterA%, %RemotePrinterB%, %RemotePrinterC%, %RemotePrinterD% DelayedOutputClose Enabled Filtering HasNames Interpreter On PortLocation Type 4-83 4-83 4-83 4-83 4-83 4-83 4-83 4-83
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
C-19
PostScript Support

Key
Page
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %PrintServer%, PrintServerA%, PrintServerB%, %PrintServerC%, %PrintServerD% DelayedOutputClose Enabled Filtering HasNames Interpreter On PortLocation Type Enabled Filtering HasNames Interpreter On PortLocation Type 4-84 4-84 4-84 4-84 4-84 4-84 4-84 4-84 4-85 4-85 4-85 4-85 4-85 4-85 4-85
DelayedOutputClose Enabled HasNames Interpreter On PortLocation Type
4-85 4-85 4-86 4-86 4-86 4-86 4-86
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
C-20
PostScript Support

Key
Page
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %IP%, %IP_A%, %IP_B%, %IP_C%, %IP_D% GatewayAddress IPAddress IPAddressDynamic NetworkMask On Physical PortLocation Type 4-86 4-86 4-86 4-86 4-86 4-86 4-86 4-86
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %EthernetPhysical%, %EthernetPhysicalA%, %EthernetPhysicalB%, %EthernetPhysicalC%, %EthernetPhysicalD% EthernetAddress On PortLocation Type 4-87 4-87 4-87 4-87
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %TokenRingPhysical%, %TokenRingPhysicalA%, %TokenRingPhysicalB%, %TokenRingPhysicalC%, %TokenRingPhysicalD% Address On PortLocation Speed Type 4-87 4-87 4-87 4-87 4-87
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %Engine% BSizeStandard Darkness PageCount TimeToStandby Type 4-87 4-88 4-89 4-89 4-89
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %Console%
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
C-21
PostScript Support

Key Language Type
Page 4-89 4-89
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %Calendar%, %CalendarA%, %CalendarB%, %CalendarC%, %CalendarD% Day Hour Minute Month Running Second Type Year DateTime DayOfWeekLong DayOfWeekNum DayOfWeekShort 4-89 4-89 4-89 4-89 4-89 4-89 4-89 4-89 4-89 4-89 4-89 4-89
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
C-22
PostScript Support

Key Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %disk1% BlockSize Free HasNames InitializeAction LogicalSize Mounted PhysicalSize Removable Searchable SearchOrder Type Writeable Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %flash1% BlockSize Free HasNames InitializeAction LogicalSize Mounted PhysicalSize Removable Searchable SearchOrder Type Writeable
Page
4-89 4-89 4-89 4-90 4-90 4-90 4-90 4-90 4-90 4-90 4-90 4-90
4-90 4-90 4-91 4-91 4-91 4-91 4-91 4-91 4-91 4-91 4-91 4-91
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
C-23
PostScript Support

Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference parameter descriptions. Printer Model E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn E250d, E250dn, E350d, E352dn, E450dn
Key Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %rom% BlockSize Free HasNames InitializeAction LogicalSize Mounted PhysicalSize Removable Searchable SearchOrder Type Writeable
Page
4-92 4-92 4-92 4-92 4-92 4-92 4-92 4-92 4-92 4-92 4-92 4-92
Table C-7: PostScript Commands: Message Keys

Supported Not Supported Page numbers reference status message key and value descriptions. Printer Model
Key job status source
Page 4-94 4-94 4-94
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
E238, E240, E240n, E340, E342n
E120, E120n
X-1
Index
Index
A
airflow requirement 7-1 altitude specifications 7-7 atmospheric pressure 7-7 attendance messages (PJL) 3-63, 3-67, 3-72, 3-75 operator panel 6-3 PJL 3-83 disk description 6-1 directory of contents 6-4 job buffering 6-13 password protection 6-7 performance 6-13 Resource Data Collection mode 6-2 retrieval speed 6-13 storing fonts, macros, and symbol sets 6-2 viewing the contents 6-3 disk option, download target (PJL) 3-30 drivers ACKNLG* Lexmark C510 8-18 ERROR* Lexmark C510 8-18 PE Lexmark C510 8-18 SLCT Lexmark C510 8-18 DSR protocol 8-26 DTR protocol 8-25, 8-26 DTR/DSR protocol 8-25, 8-26
B
bibliography 1-5
C
clearance requirements 7-6 communications computer-to-printer 8-8 ports, setting up 8-2 Windows 2000 8-4 Windows 95/98/Me 8-2 Windows NT 4.0 8-3 Windows XP 8-5 printer-to-computer 8-13 protocols 8-25 compatibility modes backward and forward Lexmark E323 2-9 Lexmark T634 2-9 compression description, raster image graphics 2-78 raster compression mode command 2-78 set raster compression mode 2-68 connectors 8-1
E
edge to edge printing See whole page setting electrical specifications 7-2 envelope sizes supported 4-10 Lexmark C510(n) 2-4 environmental commands and variables (PJL) 3-7 environmental conditions 7-7 errors, service 3-80 escape commands (PCL emulation) categorized by function color extensions 2-70 cursor positioning 2-58 font creation 2-63 font selection 2-60 job control 2-52
D
device (flash memory or disk) names (PostScript emulation) 6-9 search order 6-12 dimensions, printer 7-5 directory description 6-4 example 6-4 printing MarkVision Professional 6-3
X-2
Index
macros 2-63 miscellaneous commands 2-73 page control 2-54 picture frame 2-73 print model 2-64 raster graphics 2-67 rectangular area fill graphics 2-65 status readback 2-72 user-defined pattern 2-65 user-defined symbol set 2-62 external network adapter See external print server external print server MarkNet Pro 8-31 MarkNet XLe 8-31
Lexmark X422 2-8 printing directory list for flash or disk 3-83, 6-3 saving on flash memory or disk 6-3 setting password protection 3-93 formatting flash or disk, PJL 3-92
G
GL/2 commands character group 2-76 configuration group 2-74 line and fill attributes group 2-77 polygon group 2-75 vector group 2-75
F
fastbytes protocol 8-12 file (flash memory or disk) close 3-89 delete 3-92 format device 3-92 open 3-89 read 3-90 rename 3-92 run 3-91 write 3-91 filenames file types 6-6 filename parameter (PJL) 3-88 macros, font, and symbol set ID 6-5 PostScript emulation conventions 6-9 searching 6-12 fit to page printing 2-6, 2-7 flash memory description 6-1 directory of contents 6-4 download target (PJL) 3-30 password protection 6-7 performance 6-13 Resource Data Collection mode 6-2 retrieval speed 6-13 rewriting contents 6-8 storing fonts, macros, and symbol sets 6-2 viewing the contents 6-3 fonts PCL emulation
H
hard disk See disk hardware specifications 7-1, 8-1 Honor DSR setting 8-26
I
information messages status messages (PJL) 3-61 interface parallel 8-7 selecting 8-6 serial 8-20 SmartSwitch 5-2 internal network adapter See internal print server internal print server MarkNet S 8-30
J
job buffering 6-13 creating a partition 6-14 disabling 6-15 enabling 6-14 recovering from a power loss 6-15
L
language switching PCL emulation
X-3
Index
MarkVision Professional 2-1 operator panel 2-1 software program 2-2 PostScript emulation 4-1 operator panel 4-1 software program 4-2 Printer Job Language (PJL) 3-3 setting for different interfaces 5-2 SmartSwitch 5-1 logical page PCL emulation 2-3, 2-6
output bins status message codes 3-75
P
page, printable PCL emulation 2-3 paper handling 3-72 paper sizes status message codes 3-74 paper sizes supported Lexmark C510(n) 2-4 paper trays PCL emulation paper size 2-54 paper source 2-54 PostScript emulation automatic size sensing search order 4-5 operators 4-7 Printer Job Language (PJL) paper size 3-14 paper source 3-39 status message codes 3-74 parallel interface 8-7 connector pin assignments 8-8 signal descriptions 8-15 standard connector 8-8 parallel modes 8-14 parameters, PostScript emulation interpreter 4-63 device 4-72 system 4-66 user 4-63 page device 4-49 password 6-7 directory of flash memory or disk 6-6 general notes 3-93 locking entire flash or disk 3-94 lost file or device password 3-98 read/write protection 6-7 relocking file or device 3-96 setting job password 3-5, 3-6 setting password for a file 3-93 unlocking file or device for current job 3-97 unlocking protection for flash or disk 3-95 write protection 6-7 PCL emulation command structure 2-49
M
macros printing directory list flash memory or disk 6-3 setting password protection 3-93 storing on flash memory or disk 6-3 MarkNet Pro external print server 8-31 MarkNet S internal print server 8-30 MarkNet XLe external print server 8-31 MarkVision Professional job buffering 6-13 passwords 6-8 Resource Data Collection mode 6-2 viewing contents of flash memory and disk 6-3 media sizes status message codes 3-74 menus, printing settings from PJL 3-83 multipurpose feeder paper source PCL emulation 2-54 Printer Job Language (PJL) 3-39
N
network support 8-30 noise emission levels 7-1 nonprintable areas 2-6 notation, commands PCL emulation 2-48 Printer Job Language (PJL) 3-1
O
operator intervention status messages (PJL) 3-72, 3-75
X-4
Index
control codes 2-48 escape control code 2-49 linking commands 2-50 parameters 2-49 relative positioning 2-50 syntax 2-49 commands alphabetic 2-51 alphanumeric ID 2-58 color extensions assign color index 2-71 color component one 2-71 color component three 2-71 color component two 2-71 color lookup tables 2-70 configure image data 2-71 driver configuration command 2-70 foreground color 2-71 gamma correction 2-71 monochrome print mode 2-70 palette control 2-70 palette ID 2-70 push/pop palette 2-70 render algorithm 2-71 select palette by ID 2-70 simple color 2-70 user-defined dither matrix 2-70 viewing illuminant 2-71 cursor positioning half line-feed 2-59 horizontal (columns) 2-58 horizontal (decipoints) 2-58 horizontal (PCL units) 2-58 line termination 2-59 push/pop cursor position 2-59 vertical (decipoints) 2-59 vertical (PCL units) 2-59 vertical (rows) 2-59 font creation character code 2-63 font control 2-63 font descriptor 2-63 font ID 2-63 load character 2-63 font selection height (primary) 2-60 height (secondary) 2-60 pitch (primary) 2-60
pitch (secondary) 2-60 primary and secondary pitch 2-62 select default font (primary) 2-61 select default font (secondary) 2-61 select download font (primary) 2-61 select download font (secondary) 2-61 spacing (primary) 2-60 spacing (secondary) 2-60 stroke weight (primary) 2-61 stroke weight (secondary) 2-61 style (primary) 2-60 style (secondary) 2-60 symbol set (primary) 2-60 symbol set (secondary) 2-60 text parsing method 2-62 transparent print data 2-61 typeface selection (primary) 2-61 typeface selection (secondary) 2-61 underline disable 2-61 underline enable 2-61 job control job separation 2-55 long-edge offset registration 2-52 number of collated copies 2-52 number of copies 2-52 output bin 2-56 printer reset 2-52 short-edge offset registration 2-52 simplex/duplex print 2-52 unit of measure 2-53 Universal Exit Language 2-53 macros macro control 2-63 macro ID 2-63 miscellaneous commands display functions off 2-74 display functions on 2-73 end-of-line wrap 2-73 paper type 2-74 print quality 2-74 print test page 2-74 page control character text path 2-55 clear horizontal margins 2-55 duplex page side selection 2-57 horizontal motion index 2-56 left margin 2-55 line spacing (alternative method) 2-57
X-5
Index
page orientation 2-55 page size 2-54 paper source 2-54 print direction 2-55 right margin 2-55 set page length 2-57 set universal custom name 2-55 set universal feed direction 2-54 set universal height 2-54 set universal width 2-54 skip perforation 2-56 text length 2-55 text scale mode 2-57 top margin 2-55 vertical motion index 2-56 picture frame enter GL/2 language 2-73 enter PCL emulation 2-73 GL/2 plot horizontal size 2-73 GL/2 plot vertical size 2-73 picture frame horizontal size 2-73 picture frame vertical size 2-73 set picture frame anchor point 2-73 print model area fill ID 2-64 logical operation 2-64 pattern control 2-65 pattern transparency mode 2-64 pixel placement 2-64 select current pattern 2-64 set pattern reference point 2-65 source transparency mode 2-64 user-defined pattern 2-65 raster graphics destination raster height 2-69 destination raster width 2-68 end raster graphics (version B) 2-68 end raster graphics (version C) 2-68 raster graphics presentation 2-67 raster resolution 2-67 set raster compression mode 2-68 set raster configuration 2-69 source raster height 2-67 source raster width 2-67 start raster graphics 2-67 transfer raster data by plane 2-67 transfer raster data by row/block 2-68 Y offset 2-67
rectangular area fill graphics area fill ID 2-66 fill rectangular area 2-66 horizontal rectangle size 2-65 vertical rectangle size (decipoints) 2-65 vertical rectangle size (PCL Units) 2-65 status readback echo 2-72 flush all pages 2-72 free space 2-72 inquire status readback entity 2-72 set status readback location type 2-72 set status readback location unit 2-72 user-defined symbol set define symbol set 2-62 symbol set control 2-62 symbol set ID code 2-62 control codes 2-48 font and symbol set support Lexmark X422 2-8 GL/2 Language 2-74 linking commands 2-49 paper and envelope dimensions Lexmark C510(n) 2-4 password protection 3-93 saving files on flash memory or disk 6-3 selecting MarkVision Professional 2-1 operator panel 2-1 SmartSwitch 2-1 software program 2-2 SmartSwitch 2-1 specialty fonts 2-13 standard fonts 2-9 Type 1 fonts 2-11 variables, PJL common 3-48 printer unique 3-49 physical page PCL emulation 2-3 physical page border 2-6 physical specifications 7-5 ports, communication 8-2 Windows 2000 8-4 Windows 95/98/Me 8-2 Windows NT 4.0 8-3 Windows XP 8-5 PostScript emulation
X-6
Index
accessing files 6-9 device names 6-9 device parameters 4-72 device search order 6-12 envelope size support 4-10 filenames 6-9 interpreter parameters 4-63 page device parameters 4-49 paper size commands currentuniversalsize 4-3 ignoresize 4-4 setignoresize 4-4 setuniversalsize 4-5 paper tray commands manualfeed 4-8 papertray 4-8 setpapertray 4-9 paper tray support 4-5 password protecting Type 1 fonts on flash memory or disk 3-93 saving fonts on flash memory or disk 6-3 selecting language 4-1 SmartSwitch 4-1 status and error messages 4-93, 4-94 supplemental operators 4-14 appletalktype 4-14 buildtime 4-14 byteorder 4-14 checkpassword 4-15 currentfilenameextend 4-15 currentmanualduplexmode 4-15 defaulttimeouts 4-16 deletefile 4-16 devcontrol 4-17 devdismount 4-18 devforall 4-19 devformat 4-19 devmount 4-20 devstatus 4-20 diskonline 4-21 diskstatus 4-22 displayoperatormsg 4-22 doidlefonts 4-22 dojamrecovery 4-23 doprinterrors 4-23 doret 4-23 dostartpage 4-24 dosysstart 4-24
duplexer 4-24 duplexmode 4-25 enginesync 4-25 file 4-26 filenameforall 4-26 fileposition 4-26 firstside 4-27 fontnonzerowinding 4-27 hardwareiomode 4-27 idlefonts 4-27 ignoresize 4-28 initializedisk 4-28 jobname 4-28 jobsource 4-29 jobtimeout 4-30 manualfeed 4-30 manualfeedtimeout 4-31 newsheet 4-31 pagecount 4-31 pagesprinted 4-32 papertray 4-32 printername 4-32 product 4-32 PS2fonts 4-33 PS3fonts 4-33 quiet 4-33 ramsize 4-34 realformat 4-34 renamefile 4-34 resolution 4-35 revision 4-35 sccbatch 4-36 sccinteractive 4-37 setcoverpage 4-37 setdefaulttimeouts 4-37 setdoidlefonts 4-38 setdojamrecovery 4-38 setdoprinterrors 4-38 setdoret 4-39 setdostartpage 4-39 setdosysstart 4-40 setduplexmode 4-40 setenginesync 4-41 setethernetaddress 4-41 setfilenameextend 4-41 setfileposition 4-42 sethardwareiomode 4-42 setidlefonts 4-42
X-7
Index
setignoresize 4-42 setjobtimeout 4-43 setmanualduplexmode 4-43 setpapertray 4-43 setprintername 4-44 setquiet 4-44 setresolution 4-45 setsccbatch 4-45 setsccinteractive 4-46 setsoftwareiomode 4-46 settumble 4-46 setuserdiskpercent 4-47 softwareiomode 4-47 tumble 4-47 userdiskpercent 4-48 waittimeout 4-48 system parameters 4-66 user parameters 4-63 using the operator panel 4-1 power requirements 7-3 printable areas 2-3, 2-6 Printer Job Language (PJL) attendance messages 3-67 30 Print Unit Missing 3-67 30 Coating Roll Missing 3-67 31 Defective Cartridge XXXX 3-67 31 Defective Print Cartridge 3-67 31 Missing Cartridge XXXX 3-68 31 Missing Printhead 3-68 31 PerfectFinish Missing 3-70 32 Unsupported Cartridge 3-67 32 Unsupported Cartridge 3-67 32 Unsupported Print Cartridge 3-67 32 Unsupported Printhead 3-68 33 Tray x Config Error 3-69 40 Tray x Size Sense Error 3-68 41 Open Bin 1 Exit Tray 3-68 58 Input Config Error 3-69 58 Too Many Bins Attached 3-69 58 Too Many Disks Installed 3-69 58 Too Many Trays Attached 3-69 59 Incompatible Bin x 3-71 84 All Photo Devs Exhausted 3-70 84 Black Photo Dev Exhausted 3-70 84 Black Photo Dev Life Warning 3-70 84 Color Photo Dev Life Warning 3-70 87 PerfectFinish Empty 3-70 88 Black Print Cartridge Low 3-70
88 Black Toner Empty 3-70 88 Black Toner Low 3-70 88 Cartridge Low <CMYK> 3-71 88 Color Print Cartridge Low 3-70 88 Cyan Toner Empty 3-70 88 Cyan Toner Low 3-70 88 Magenta Toner Empty 3-70 88 Magenta Toner Low 3-70 88 Photo Print Cartridge Low 3-70 88 Toner Low 3-70 88 Yellow Toner Empty 3-70 88 Yellow Toner Low 3-70 89 Cartridge Empty <CMYK> 3-71 2xx Paper Jam 3-69 Cartridge Life Expired XXXX 3-67 Cartridge Life Warning XXXX 3-68 Change Cartridge Invalid Refill 3-67 Check Duplex Connection 3-71 Check Finisher Installation 3-69 Check Mailbox Installation 3-69 Check Tray <source #> Connection 3-69 Close Cover 3-68 Close Cover <c> 3-68 Close Cover A 3-67 Close Deflector G 3-68 Close Door 3-67 Close Door <d> 3-68 Close Duplex Door 3-72 Close Finisher Door 3-68 Close Finisher Side Door 3-68 Close Finisher Top Cover 3-68 Close Front Door 3-68 Close Side Door 3-68 Close Top Covers 3-67 Close Tray x Top Cover 3-68 Cover Open 3-67 Incompatible Duplex 3-71 Incompatible Envelope Feeder 3-71 Incompatible Tray x 3-71 Insert Cartridge 3-67 Insert Duplex Option 3-72 Insert Hole Punch Box 3-67 Insert PC Cartridge 3-67 Insert Print Cartridge 3-69 Install Bin x or Cancel Job 3-69 Install Duplex or Cancel Job 3-72 Install Env Feed or Cancel Job 3-69 Install Tray x or Cancel Job 3-69
X-8
Index
Load Staples 3-71, 3-72 Open Cover 3-68 Open Rear Door 3-68 OPMSG message 3-71 paper handling 34 Incorrect Media 3-73 34 Wrong Paper Size in Tray x 3-73 34 Wrong Paper Size Manual Feed 373 Change <source> 3-73 Check <source> Paper Guide 3-73 Insert Duplex Pages & Press Go. 3-73 Insert Tray <source #> 3-73 Load <source> 3-73 Load Manual 3-73 Remove Paper <linked set bin name> 3-73 Remove Paper All Output Bins 3-73 Remove Paper Output Bin <bin #> 3-73 Remove Paper Standard Bin 3-73 paper jams 200 Paper Jam 3-76 201 Paper Jam 3-76 202 Paper Jam 3-76 203 Paper Jam 3-76 204 Paper Jam 3-76 205 Paper Jam 3-76 206 Paper Jam 3-76 207 Paper Jam 3-76 208 Paper Jam 3-76 220 Paper Jam 3-76 221 Paper Jam 3-76 222 Paper Jam 3-76 230 Paper Jam 3-76 231 Paper Jam 3-76 232 Paper Jam 3-77 241 Paper Jam 3-77 242 Paper Jam 3-77 243 Paper Jam 3-77 244 Paper Jam 3-77 245 Paper Jam 3-77 246 Paper Jam 3-77 247 Paper Jam 3-77 248 Paper Jam 3-77 249 Paper Jam 3-77 24y Paper Jam 3-77 250 Paper Jam 3-77 251 Paper Jam 3-77
252 Paper Jam 3-77 253 Paper Jam 3-78 254 Paper Jam 3-78 255 Paper Jam 3-78 256 Paper Jam 3-78 257 Paper Jam 3-78 258 Paper Jam 3-78 259 Paper Jam 3-78 260 Paper Jam 3-78 261 Paper Jam 3-78 271 Paper Jam 3-78 272 Paper Jam 3-78 273 Paper Jam 3-78 27z Paper Jam 3-78 280 Paper Jam 3-78 281 Paper Jam 3-79 282 Paper Jam 3-79 283 Paper Jam 3-79 284 Paper Jam 3-79 285 Paper Jam 3-79 286 Paper Jam 3-79 287 Paper Jam 3-79 288 Paper Jam 3-79 289 Paper Jam 3-79 290 Paper Jam 3-79 291 Paper Jam 3-79 292 Paper Jam 3-79 293 Paper Jam 3-79 294 Paper Jam 3-80 295 Paper Jam 3-80 Priming Failed. Retry? 3-71 Reattach Bins <bin #x - bin #y> 3-69 Reattach Envelope Feeder 3-69 Reattach MP Feeder 3-69 Reattach Output Bin <bin #> 3-69 Replace Fuser 3-71 Replace Oil Coating Roll 3-71 Replace PC Kit 3-71 Replace PC Kit To Continue 3-71 Replace Toner Cartridge 3-71 Replace Toner Cartridge To Continue 3-71 Replace Transfer Kit 3-71 STMSG message 3-71 auto-continuable messages 3-63 34 Short Paper 3-64 35 Res Save Off Deficient Memory 3-64, 365 36 Resolution Reduced 3-64
X-9
Index
37 Insufficient Collation Area 3-63, 3-65 37 Insufficient Defrag Memory 3-63 37 Insufficient Memory 3-63 38 Memory Full 3-63 39 Complex Page 3-63 50 PPDS Font Error 3-63 51 Defective Flash 3-64, 3-66 52 Flash Full 3-64, 3-66 53 Unformatted Flash 3-64, 3-66 54 Network x Software Error 3-65 54 Par x ENA Connection Lost 3-65 54 Parallel Error 3-63 54 Ser x Fax Connection Lost 3-65 54 Serial Option 1 Error 3-63 54 Serial Option x Error 3-65 54 Standard Serial Error 3-63 54 Std Network Software Error 3-63 54 Std Par ENA Connection Lost 3-64 54 Std Ser Fax Connection Lost 3-63 55 Insufficient Fax Buffer 3-64 56 Parallel Port Disabled 3-64 56 Parallel Port x Disabled 3-65 56 Serial Port 1 Disabled 3-64 56 Serial Port x Disabled 3-65 56 Standard Parallel Port Disabled 3-64 56 Standard Serial Disabled 3-64 56 Standard USB Port Disabled 3-64 56 Std Parallel Port Disabled 3-64 56 USB Port x Disabled 3-65 57 Configuration Change 3-63 58 Too Many Flash Options 3-66 61 Defective Disk 3-64, 3-66 61 Unformatted Disk 3-65 62 Disk Full 3-64, 3-66 63 Unformatted Disk 3-66 64 Unsupported Disk Format 3-66 80 Belt Exhausted 3-66 80 Belt Life Warning 3-66 80 Fuser Exhausted 3-66 80 Fuser Life Warning 3-66 80 Fuser Maintenance 3-66 80 Fuser/Belt Exhausted 3-66 80 Fuser/Belt Life Warning 3-66 80 Scheduled Maintenance 3-65, 3-66 81 Scheduled Maintenance 3-66 83 ITU Maintenance 3-66 Disk Corrupted. Reformat? 3-66 Empty Box M 3-65
Held Jobs May Not Be Restored 3-63 Insert Box M 3-65 Insert Staple Cartridge 3-65 Insert Stapler 3-65 Operation Failed Faxes on Disk 3-65 Operation Failed Jobs on Disk 3-65 Priming Failed, Retry. Go/Stop? 3-65 Print Jobs on Disk. Go/Stop? 3-64 Print Jobs on Disk? 3-64 Restore Held Jobs. Go/Stop? 3-64 command categories device attendance 3-80 file and device protection 3-93 file commands for flash and disk 3-86 job separation commands 3-4 kernel commands 3-2 miscellaneous 3-82 status readback 3-53, 3-54 command syntax command codes 3-1 optional parameters 3-2 commands COMMENT 3-3 DEFAULT 3-8, 3-94 DINQUIRE 3-54 ECHO 3-55 ENTER LANGUAGE 3-3 EOJ 3-6 INFO 3-56 INITIALIZE 3-11 INQUIRE 3-58 JOB 3-4 LBEEP 3-82 LBYPASSPASSWORD 3-97 LCLOSEFILE 3-89 LDECLARE 3-95, 3-97 LDELETEFILE 3-92 LDELETEPASSWORD 3-96 LDOWNLOADTARGET 3-86 LESCAPECHAR 3-83 LFAX PHONENUMBER 3-85 LFORMAT 3-92 LOPENFILE 3-89 LPORTROTATE 3-82 LPRINTDIRECTORY 3-83, 6-4 LPRINTMENUS 3-83 LPRINTPSFONTS 3-83 LPRINTTESTPAGE 3-83
X-10
Index
LREADFILE 3-90 LRENAMEFILE 3-92 LRUNFILE 3-91 LWRITEFILE 3-91 OPMSG 3-81 RDYMSG 3-80 RESET 3-11 SET 3-9 STMSG 3-81 USTATUS 3-59 USTATUSOFF 3-60 information messages 88 Black Print Cartridge Low 3-61 88 Black Toner Low 3-61 88 Color Print Cartridge Low 3-61 88 Cyan Toner Low 3-61 88 Magenta Toner Low 3-61 88 Photo Print Cartridge Low 3-61 88 Toner Low 3-61, 3-62 88 Yellow Toner Low 3-61 Bin <bin #> Full 3-62 Busy 3-62 Cancelling Job 3-62 Not Ready 3-61 Power Saver with 88 Ink Low 3-62 Powersaver 3-62 RDYMSG 3-61 Ready 3-61 Ready with 88 Ink Low 3-61 Replace Fuser 3-61, 3-62 Replace PC Kit 3-61, 3-62 Replace Toner 3-61, 3-62 Replace Transfer 3-62 Res Reduced 3-62 Resetting the Printer 3-61 Tray <source #> Empty 3-62 Tray <source #> Missing 3-62 Waiting 3-62 status messages and codes 3-61 variable categories 3-7 common variables all printer languages 3-12 PCL emulation 3-48 PostScript emulation 3-51 printer unique all printer languages 3-19 LRESOURCE 3-52 PCL emulation 3-49
PostScript emulation 3-52 variables AUTOCONT 3-12 BINDING 3-12 BITSPERPIXEL 3-12 CLEARABLEWARNINGS 3-12 COPIES 3-12 CPLOCK 3-13 DENSITY 3-13 DUPLEX 3-13 ECONOMODE 3-13 FONTNUMBER 3-48 FONTSOURCE 3-48 FORMATTERNUMBER 3-13 FORMLINES 3-13 HOLD 3-13 HOLDKEY 3-13 HOLDTYPE 3-14 IMAGEADAPT 3-14 INTRAY1SIZE 3-14 INTRAY2 3-14 INTRAY2SIZE 3-14 INTRAY3 3-14 INTRAY3SIZE 3-14 INTRAY4 3-14 INTRAY4SIZE 3-14 INTRAY5 3-14 INTRAY5SIZE 3-14 JAMRECOVERY 3-51 JOBNAME 3-14 JOBOFFSET 3-15 LA4WIDTH 3-49 LACTIVEBINRESET 3-19 LADVANCEDSTATUS 3-19 LALARMCONTROL 3-19 LANG 3-15 LASSIGNFEEDER 3-49 LASSIGNMANUALENVELOPE 3-49 LASSIGNMANUALPAPER 3-49 LASSIGNMPFEEDER 3-49 LASSIGNTRAY1 3-50 LASSIGNTRAY2 3-50 LASSIGNTRAY3 3-50 LASSIGNTRAY4 3-50 LASSIGNTRAY5 3-50 LAUTOCRLF 3-19 LAUTOLFCR 3-19 LBITMAPROUNDING 3-50
X-11
Index
LBLANKPAGES 3-19 LBONDLENGTH 3-19 LBONDLOADING 3-19 LBONDOUTBIN 3-20 LBONDTEXTURE 3-20 LBONDWEIGHT 3-20 LBWLOCK 3-20 LCANCEL 3-20 LCARDSTOCKLENGTH 3-20 LCARDSTOCKLOADING 3-20 LCARDSTOCKOUTBIN 3-21 LCARDSTOCKTEXTURE 3-21 LCARDSTOCKWEIGHT 3-21 LCOLLATION 3-21 LCOLORCORRECTION 3-21 LCOLOREDLENGTH 3-21 LCOLOREDLOADING 3-22 LCOLOREDOUTBIN 3-22 LCOLOREDTEXTURE 3-22 LCOLOREDWEIGHT 3-22 LCOLOREXTENSIONS 3-50 LCOLORMODEL 3-22 LCUSTOMPAPERFEED 3-23 LCUSTOMPAPERHEIGHT 3-23 LCUSTOMPAPERUNITS 3-22 LCUSTOMPAPERWIDTH 3-22 LCUSTOMTYPE1LENGTH 3-23 LCUSTOMTYPE1LOADING 3-23 LCUSTOMTYPE1MEDIA 3-23 LCUSTOMTYPE1NAME 3-23 LCUSTOMTYPE1OUTBIN 3-24 LCUSTOMTYPE1TEXTURE 3-24 LCUSTOMTYPE1WEIGHT 3-24 LCUSTOMTYPE2LENGTH 3-24 LCUSTOMTYPE2LOADING 3-24 LCUSTOMTYPE2MEDIA 3-24 LCUSTOMTYPE2NAME 3-25 LCUSTOMTYPE2OUTBIN 3-25 LCUSTOMTYPE2TEXTURE 3-25 LCUSTOMTYPE2WEIGHT 3-25 LCUSTOMTYPE3LENGTH 3-25 LCUSTOMTYPE3LOADING 3-25 LCUSTOMTYPE3MEDIA 3-26 LCUSTOMTYPE3NAME 3-26 LCUSTOMTYPE3OUTBIN 3-26 LCUSTOMTYPE3TEXTURE 3-26 LCUSTOMTYPE3WEIGHT 3-26 LCUSTOMTYPE4LENGTH 3-26
LCUSTOMTYPE4LOADING 3-27 LCUSTOMTYPE4MEDIA 3-27 LCUSTOMTYPE4NAME 3-27 LCUSTOMTYPE4OUTBIN 3-27 LCUSTOMTYPE4TEXTURE 3-27 LCUSTOMTYPE4WEIGHT 3-27 LCUSTOMTYPE5LENGTH 3-28 LCUSTOMTYPE5LOADING 3-28 LCUSTOMTYPE5MEDIA 3-28 LCUSTOMTYPE5NAME 3-28 LCUSTOMTYPE5OUTBIN 3-28 LCUSTOMTYPE5TEXTURE 3-28 LCUSTOMTYPE5WEIGHT 3-29 LCUSTOMTYPE6LENGTH 3-29 LCUSTOMTYPE6MEDIA 3-29 LCUSTOMTYPE6NAME 3-29 LCUSTOMTYPE6OUTBIN 3-29 LCUSTOMTYPE6TEXTURE 3-30 LCUSTOMTYPE6WEIGHT 3-30 LDESCRIPTION 3-53 LDOWNLOADTARGET 3-30 LDRYTIMEDELAY 3-30 LDUPLICATEHELDJOBS 3-30 LENVELOPEENHANCE 3-30 LENVELOPELENGTH 3-30 LENVELOPEOUTBIN 3-30 LENVELOPETEXTURE 3-31 LENVELOPEWEIGHT 3-31 LESCCHAR 3-31 LFAXREDIAL 3-31 LFAXREDIALFREQUENCY 3-31 LFAXRESOLUTION 3-31 LFAXTRANSMISSIONLOG 3-31 LFEEDERPAPERTYPE 3-31 LFONTCOMPATIBILITY 3-51 LFONTPRIORITY 3-51 LGLOSSYLOADING 3-31 LGLOSSYOUTPUTBIN 3-32 LGLOSSYTEXTURE 3-32 LGLOSSYWEIGHT 3-32 LHOLEPUNCHALARM 3-32 LHOLEPUNCHMODE 3-32 LHONORINIT 3-32 LIMAGEBRIGHTNESS 3-32 LIMAGECONTRAST 3-32 LIMAGEENHANCE 3-32 LIMAGEENHANCETYPE 3-33 LIMAGEORIENTATION 3-33
X-12
Index
LIMAGESMOOTHING 3-33 LINFEEDERSIZE 3-33 LINKALERT 3-33 LINMPFEEDERSIZE 3-33 LJAMRECOVERY 3-33 LLABELSLENGTH 3-33 LLABELSLOADING 3-33 LLABELSOUTBIN 3-34 LLABELSTEXTURE 3-34 LLABELSWEIGHT 3-34 LLASTTRAYRENUMBER 3-34 LLEFTMARGINOFFSET 3-34 LLETTERHEADLENGTH 3-34 LLETTERHEADLOADING 3-34 LLETTERHEADOUTBIN 3-35 LLETTERHEADTEXTURE 3-35 LLETTERHEADWEIGHT 3-35 LMANUALENVELOPESIZE 3-36 LMANUALENVELOPETYPE 3-36 LMANUALPAPERSIZE 3-36 LMANUALPAPERTYPE 3-36 LMPFEEDERPAPERTYPE 3-36 LMULTIPAGEBORDER 3-36 LMULTIPAGEORDER 3-36 LMULTIPAGEPRINT 3-37 LMULTIPAGEVIEW 3-37 LNPAP 3-37 LOPTIONALOUTBIN1NAME 3-37 LOPTIONALOUTBIN2NAME 3-37 LOPTIONALOUTBIN3NAME 3-37 LOPTIONALOUTBIN4NAME 3-37 LOPTIONALOUTBIN5NAME 3-37 LOPTIONALOUTBIN6NAME 3-38 LOPTIONALOUTBIN7NAME 3-38 LOPTIONALOUTBIN8NAME 3-38 LOPTIONALOUTBIN9NAME 3-38 LOPTIONALOUTBIN10NAME 3-38 LOUTBINCONFIG 3-38 LOVERFLOWOUTBIN 3-39 LOVERFLOWTIMER 3-39 LOWTONER 3-15 LPAGECOUNT 3-39 LPAGEMODE 3-39 LPAPERSOURCE 3-39 LPICTUREGRADE 3-40, 3-52 LPLAINLENGTH 3-40 LPLAINOUTBIN 3-40 LPLAINTEXTURE 3-40
LPLAINWEIGHT 3-40 LPOWERSAVER 3-40 LPPDS 3-41 LPPDSFORMLINES 3-41 LPPDSLINESPERINCH 3-41 LPREPRINTEDLENGTH 3-41 LPREPRINTEDLOADING 3-41 LPREPRINTEDOUTBIN 3-42 LPREPRINTEDTEXTURE 3-42 LPREPRINTEDWEIGHT 3-42 LPRINTBUFFER 3-42, B-9 LPRINTERUSAGE 3-42 LPRINTHEADIDLETIME 3-42 LPRINTMENUSBUTTON 3-42, B-9 LPRINTQUALITY 3-43 LPSFONTPRIORITY 3-52 LPUNCH 3-43 LREAROUTBINNAME 3-43 LREPEATLIMIT 3-43 LRESET 3-43 LRESOURCESAVE 3-43, B-10 LRIGHTMARGINOFFSET 3-43 LRWLOCK 3-53 LSCREENING 3-43 LSEPARATORSHEETS 3-43 LSEPARATORSOURCE 3-43 LSTANDARDOUTBINNAME 3-44 LSTAPLE 3-44 LSTAPLESEMPTYALARM 3-44 LSTAPLETESTBIN 3-44 LSTAPLETESTSOURCE 3-44 LSTROKEWIDTH 3-44 LSUBSTITUTESIZE 3-44 LTOPBINROTATE 3-44 LTOPMARGINOFFSET 3-44 LTRANSPARENCYLENGTH 3-44 LTRANSPARENCYOUTBIN 3-45 LTRANSPARENCYTEXTURE 3-45 LTRANSPARENCYWEIGHT 3-45 LTRAY1AUTOSIZE 3-46 LTRAY1PAPERTYPE 3-46 LTRAY1RENUMBER 3-47 LTRAY1SENSEDTYPEPAPER 3-45 LTRAY1SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY 3-45 LTRAY2AUTOSIZE 3-46 LTRAY2PAPERTYPE 3-47 LTRAY2SENSEDTYPEPAPER 3-45
X-13
Index
LTRAY2SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY 3-45 LTRAY3AUTOSIZE 3-46 LTRAY3PAPERTYPE 3-47 LTRAY3SENSEDTYPEPAPER 3-46 LTRAY3SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY 3-46 LTRAY4AUTOSIZE 3-46 LTRAY4PAPERTYPE 3-47 LTRAY4SENSEDTYPEPAPER 3-46 LTRAY4SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY 3-46 LTRAY5AUTOSIZE 3-46 LTRAY5PAPERTYPE 3-47 LTYPE1FONTS 3-48 LUSDEFAULTS 3-48 LWLOCK 3-53 MANUALFEED 3-15 MEDIATYPE 3-15 MPTRAY 3-15 ORIENTATION 3-15 OUTBIN 3-16 PAGEPROTECT 3-16 PAPER 3-16 PARALLEL 3-17 PASSWORD 3-17 PERSONALITY 3-17 PITCH 3-48 POWERSAVE 3-17 POWERSAVETIME 3-18 PRTPSERRS 3-51 PTSIZE 3-48 QTY 3-18 REPRINT 3-18 RESOLUTION 3-18 RESOURCESAVE 3-18 RET 3-18 SYMSET 3-48 TIMEOUT 3-18 USERNAME 3-19 WIDEA4 3-19 printer languages, selecting MarkVision Professional 2-1 methods 5-1 operator panel 2-1, 4-1 PCL emulation 2-1 Printer Job Language (PJL) 3-3 setting for different interfaces 5-2
SmartSwitch 5-1 software program 2-2 switching 5-1 printer specifications airflow requirement 7-1 altitude 7-7 atmospheric pressure 7-7 clearance requirements 7-6 dimensions 7-5 electrical 7-2 environmental conditions 7-7 flash memory and disk retrieval speeds 6-13 interfaces 8-1 noise emission levels 7-1 power requirements 7-3 size 7-5 weight 7-5 protocol DTR/DSR 8-26 fastbytes data transfer sequence 8-12 Robust XON 8-25 RS-232C 8-27 standard data transfer sequence 8-11 XON/XOFF 8-28
R
raster compression mode 2-78 adaptive compression 2-82 delta row 2-81 group 3 and 4 2-83 Lexmark adaptive 2-84 run-length encoded data 2-80 Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) 2-80 uncoded data 2-79 raster image graphics 2-78 receivers BUSY driver Lexmark C510 8-19 INIT* Lexmark C510 8-19 SLCTIN* Lexmark C510 8-20 required clearance 7-6 Resource Data Collection 6-2, 6-3 Robust XON protocol 8-25 RS-232C cable pin assignments 8-21
X-14
Index
connecting 8-21 port compatibility 8-30 protocol timing 8-27 XON/XOFF protocol timing 8-28
S
selecting printer languages setting for different interfaces 5-2 SmartSwitch 5-1 serial interface network support 8-30 RS-232C cable pin assignments 8-21 communication parameters 8-23 DTR and DTR/DSR protocol timing 8-27 port compatibility 8-30 protocol 8-26 serial configuration recommendations 8-29 using RS-232C 8-21 when to use 8-20 service errors 3-80 signal descriptions 8-15 size, printer 7-5 SmartSwitch 5-1 setting for different interfaces 5-2 switching printer languages 5-1 sniffing 5-3 specialty PCL emulation fonts forward/backward compatibility modes 2-13 specialty PCL fonts 2-13 specifications See printer specifications standard PCL emulation fonts 2-9 forward/backward compatibility modes 2-9 standard protocol 8-11 status messages attendance conditions 3-67 auto-continuable conditions 3-63 information messages 3-61 operator intervention - paper handling 3-72 operator intervention - paper jams 3-75 PostScript emulation 4-94 switching printer languages MarkVision Professional 2-1 methods 5-1 operator panel 2-1, 4-1 PCL emulation 2-1
PostScript emulation 4-1 Printer Job Language (PJL) 3-3 setting for different interfaces 5-2 SmartSwitch 5-1 software program 2-2, 4-2 Symbol Set Tables, locating ID values 2-50 symbol sets printing directory list flash memory or disk 6-3 setting password protection 3-93 storing on flash memory or disk 6-3 support ISO fonts 2-30, 2-47 syntax, commands PCL emulation 2-48 Printer Job Language 3-1
T
test page, printing from PJL flash memory and disk directory 3-83, 6-4 menu settings page 3-83 PostScript emulation font list 3-83 printer test page 3-83 trays PCL emulation page size 2-54 paper source 2-54 PostScript emulation automatic size sensing search order 4-5 operators 4-7 Printer Job Language (PJL) paper size 3-14 paper source 3-39 status message codes 3-74 Type 1 fonts description 2-11 forward/backward compatibility modes 2-11
U
Universal Exit Language 3-2
V
variables, PJL common for all printer languages 3-12 common for PCL emulation 3-48
X-15
Index
common for PostScript emulation 3-51 environment 3-7 printer unique for all printer languages 3-19 printer unique for PCL emulation 3-49
W
weight, printer 7-5 whole page setting 2-7
X
XON/XOFF protocol 8-25 RS-232C 8-28

Lexmark 2

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lexmark 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lexmark 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Reference

Edition: May 2007

Chicago Clarendon Eurostile Geneva GillSans Helvetica Hoefler

Printer Job Language ......................................................3-1

PostScript Emulation .......................................................4-1

Switching Languages ......................................................5-1

Flash Memory and Disk ...................................................6-1

Printer Specifications ......................................................7-1

PCL Support .................................................................... A-1

PJL Support ..................................................................... B-1

PostScript Support ......................................................... C-1

Index ................................................................................. X-1

The Technical Reference is divided into the following:

Chapter 2: PCL Emulation

Chapter 3: Printer Job Language

Chapter 4: PostScript Emulation

Chapter 5: Switching Languages

Chapter 6: Flash Memory and Disk

Chapter 7: Printer Specifications

Chapter 8: Printer Interfaces

Appendix A: PCL Support Appendix B: PJL Support Appendix C: PostScript Support

Printing the File

CHAPTER 2: PCL Emulation

Selecting PCL Emulation

Using the Operator Panel or MarkVision Professional

Using Your Software Program

Dimensions by Area (pels)1 A B C D E F G H I

3496 4300 4960 4960 4350 5100 5100 5100 3300

4960 6070 7014 7014 6300 6600 8400 7800 5100

3196 4000 4676 4800 4050 4800 4800 4800 3000

4720 5830 6778 6778 6060 6360 8160 7560 4860

142 150 142 80 150 150 150 150 150 150

100 100 80 80 100 100 100 100 100 100

100 100 80 80 100 100 100 100 100 100

Dimensions by Area (pels)1 A B C D E F G H I

DL C5 B5 Envelope Other Envelope 9 (Com 9) 10 (Com 10) 7 3/4 (Monarch)

2598 3826 4156 5100 2326 2474 2326

5196 5408 5904 8400 5324 5700 4300

2314 2542 3872 4800 2024 2174 2024

4960 5172 5668 8160 5084 5460 4260

142 142 142 150 150 150 150

118 118 118 120 120 120 120

100 100 100 100 100 100 100

100 100 100 100 100 100 100

Print Area Menu Item

Legend: PCL Logical Page Area

Physical Page Border

PCL Printable Area

Only Portrait Orientation is shown for all settings.

Formatted Image with Fit to Page

Printed Image with Fit to Page

Standard PCL Emulation Fonts

Typeface 4099 4099 4099 4099 4101

font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Companys LaserJet 4050.

font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Companys LaserJet 4050.

Typeface 4362 4362 4140 4297 4116 0 0 31402 16686

font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Companys LaserJet 4050.

CourierPS Bold3 CourierPS Bold Oblique3 Times Roman3